JP2019025285A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized by its display means, concerning a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) or a reel type game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: A second variation icon h02 is sometimes displayed in a region other than an icon display region HN1. An animation (second moving animation) in which the second variation icon h02 moves is sometimes displayed in a period in which a first variation icon h01 is displayed. Only the second variation icon h02 is sometimes displayed after a state is changed to a state in which both the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed from a state in which only the first variation icon h01 is displayed while one pattern variable display is being performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 164

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, in such gaming machines, those equipped with display means are known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to symbol variation display being executed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display.
One of the two change icons is a first change icon,
One of the two change icons is a second change icon,
The first variation icon and the second variation icon may be displayed without overlapping,
In some cases, all of the second change icon may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area.
An animation in which the second fluctuation icon moves (hereinafter referred to as "second movement animation") may be displayed in a period in which the first fluctuation icon is displayed.
In the case of changing from the first state to the second state, and from the second state to the third state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), during execution of one pattern variation display There is
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed,
The second state is a state in which both of the two change icons are displayed,
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed,
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in stages. It is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of an effect shown in FIG. It is a figure showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord has taken action on the variation icon h0. It is a figure showing some examples in which navi character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on fluctuation icon h0. It is a figure which shows the several example from which the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM is raising the action of multiple times with respect to the fluctuation icon h0 in one time of the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 23 in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions to the fluctuation icon h0 in one fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of icon change production. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM is taking action with respect to a pending | hold icon in multiple times in one time of the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26 in which the navigation character YM has taken a plurality of actions with respect to the hold icon in one time variable display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the several example in which the navigation character YM has taken action with respect to the pending | holding icon in multiple times of the variable display of the decorative symbol several times. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 28 in which the navigation character YM has taken a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plural times of variable display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of an icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decorative symbol performed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja of a default display mode is taking action with respect to a pending | holding icon. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the red ninja is taking action with respect to a pending | holding icon. It is a figure which shows an example of selection of an icon change advance notice display, and an aspect change. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third column from the left in FIG. 34 and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown from the left in FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and item provision presentation which concern on Example 2 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 3 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 4 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 5 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 6 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation concerning Example 7 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is a figure showing an example of screen transition when various menus are chosen on a menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 8 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 9 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 10 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 11 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 12 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 13 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 14 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 15 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 16 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 17 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on Example 18 in a time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase presentation and the item provision presentation which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 1 and movable object 2. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using movable object 90 and movable object 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using structure object 247. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation of button production. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in which a selection effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the presentation example in which a mini game production is performed in a big hit game. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation using a fluctuation icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation in which timer advance presentation production and frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of presentation in which timer advance presentation production and frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 52 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a supporting machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker from which a low frequency sound is output) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main frame 104 and the outer frame 102). A pair of floating connectors are provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state); Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game shop can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 is also provided to detect that the front frame door 106 is opened. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high sound speaker outputting high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. It is done. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, etc. may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light. It corresponds to

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The door with ball storage tray 108 is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and guiding the gaming balls to the launcher 110. The upper tray 126, the lower tray 128 for storing gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 126, and the ball extraction button 130 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 126 by the operation of the player to the lower tray 128 The ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player A ball emission handle 134 for launching a ball into the game area 124 of the game board and an effect button 136 (chance button 136) for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player. , A chance button lamp 138 which is incorporated in the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and causes the effect button 136 (chance button 136) to emit light, and a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade A ball lending operation button 140 to be performed, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit; Equipped with In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up and down keys and the left and right keys of the left and right keys are arranged as the cross key, and the decision key is arranged at the center of the cross key. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also disposed below and to the right of the cross key. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the upper plate 126, the lower plate 128, the ball extraction button 130, the ball ejection lever 132, the ball emission handle 134, the chance button 136, the chance button on the front frame door 106. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the bottom plate full detection sensor and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage plate) is in an open state with respect to the main body 104 If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106 Button lamp 138. Including the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), display of the ball rental display unit, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the bottom plate full detection sensor can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply substrate case 184 containing the power supply substrate 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with ball storage plate The door 108 may be included, and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. The ball release handle 134 is a release stop switch (not shown) for disabling the release (injection) of the game ball by the operation of the ball release handle 134 and the player touching the ball release handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball shooting handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, effect display by display means, effect sound by sound output means, and light emission effects by various decoration LEDs and light guide plates, effect movable bodies (provided on a game board or a frame) may be mentioned. An effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more effect means. Moreover, even if it is the same kind of effect means, there may be an effect means for performing an exclusive effect and an effect means for not performing it (for example, the effect movable body of the frame performs an exclusive effect, but the effect movable body of the game board is dedicated There is no effect, or the effect movable body A of the game board performs an exclusive effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board does not perform an exclusive effect, etc. This example is also applicable to other effect means. Is).

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 4) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 The second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 4) and a release board case 172 for storing a release board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch substrate case 176 for housing a launch substrate 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices A power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub board case 162 containing the first sub board 160, and the second sub board case 166 containing the second sub board 164 are the game board 200. A discharge substrate case 172 containing a discharge substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168, a launch substrate case 176 containing a launch substrate 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180 are provided. A power supply substrate case 184 for housing the substrate 182 and a CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 2) is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as the winning balls onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, in this embodiment, although two 1st special figure starting ports 230 and 2nd special figure starting ports 232 are provided, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting openings, two first special drawing starting openings may be provided and one second special drawing starting opening may be provided. Conversely, one first special drawing starting opening is provided. It is provided, and two 2nd special figure starting ports may be provided. In addition, when there is only one special view display device, the three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special view display device. Moreover, four or more starting openings may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls due to passage or entry of game balls, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach. The game board may be provided with an out sensor. Out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has entered the ball and the out port. The sensor may be configured to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects depression of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., various effects buttons 136 (chance button 136), and various buttons that constitute the operation key unit 137. A detection signal from button sensor 426 is output to basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1. In FIG. 5 (a), nine types of special drawings, "special drawing A" to "special drawing I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, of which five types of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at a predetermined timing Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main control unit timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special view look-ahead process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the process of step S303 is performed prior to the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information is Prior determination processing prior to the success or failure determination processing in FIG. 2 related lottery processing (step S229). In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later, prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view 2 change game according to the start information is performed before the display symbol drawing process S708. Also, this pre-judging process may be performed using a special table for pre-judging instead of the table used at the time of pass / fail judgment.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the process of step S311 is performed prior to the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later, prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view 1 change game according to the start information is performed before the display symbol drawing process S708. Also, this pre-judging process may be performed using a special table for pre-judging instead of the table used at the time of pass / fail judgment.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always performed for the start information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (a), "special figure I" (disappeared) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4" Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.9 (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none."

  FIG. 9C shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result and the special map fluctuation time are determined in advance, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and as the prefetch result information in the first sub control unit 400 Can be sent.

  Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination. The present invention is also applicable to a success / failure determination table used in the lottery process per special drawing in step S801 in FIG. 53 (b) described later.

  Similarly, in the case of the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 10A is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected. In addition, it is applicable also to the table for small hit determination used by the special figure small hit lottery process of FIG.53 (b) of FIG. 53 mentioned later.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a view showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When deciding the stop design of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), special figure on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the table for special figure 2 design decision which is shown in figure 11 (b), on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random number, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  In addition, the table for special figure determination of this example may be used also for determination of the symbol in the special figure state update process of Fig. 53 (a), and the display symbol data of special figure 1 is displayed in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When it decides, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), on the basis of the result of the special figure 1 due to the drawing process per special figure of step S707 and the numerical range of random value, The display symbol data of the special view 1 is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is displayed according to the detection result. A process of changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450. Do.

  In step S417 following step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S 443 following step S 441, transmission of control commands to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S 419), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S501, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in step S509, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S 551, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes). The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and is configured such that a part can not be viewed. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. In the first UI unit 280, a variation icon display area is provided on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is disposed in the variation icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 can be displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal h0s. When the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. In addition, in the case of symbol determination display (during symbol suspension), the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the holding icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific advance notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. In addition, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or it is expressed that the change icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (FIG. 5) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, "4" and "0") of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern that simulates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), but the game is Depending on the progress, the display mode may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". And in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is displayed stopped by the combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 14 (b), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 14 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Moreover, in FIG.14 (b), the 4th symbol display apparatus 284 is provided under the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N.

  Next, an example of effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15 (A1) to (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H are operated, the embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  In (C1) to (C4) of FIG. 15, the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in (a) of FIG. 14 is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 15C1 shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 15C2 shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm, and the LED array is overlapped on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 15C3 shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the character of "Heat" is displayed, and a state where a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 15 (E1) to (E2) show that the family crest 224E is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, it is applicable also to the presentation apparatus 206 shown by Fig.14 (a).

  In FIG. 15 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), it is shown that the one-hundred-box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state by the overlapping of the two-car box character 224H. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  In FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to the position where the LED arrays overlap to the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED arrays rotate, and a fixed rotation occurs. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  In (K3) to (K4) of FIG. 15, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in proximity to each other, along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1 '), a display image (a background image or a character SBH of a safari) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 19 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the general view hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. In addition, although it demonstrates by applying the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 14 (a) below, it is also possible to apply the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG.14 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (background image of the coast) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 16A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 have default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the turn off of the fourth symbol is further performed. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (4), the moving animation of the hold icon h11, h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the variation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time, the holding icon located at the display position of the second holding icon h12 starts moving toward the display position (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14) of the first holding icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. And the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the change of the first decorative symbol Display starts. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (7), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation effective period It is comprised by the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Also, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 16 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), It is shown that the person presses the presentation button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the presentation button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. The letter of may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It is intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the production button 136 (chance button 136) It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has elapsed without the operation of.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear have been erased and the conversation announcement has ended. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16 (17), “right The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the time of reach start. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 16 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIG. 16 (22) to FIG. (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 17 (26), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), the image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27), the battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the big hit reliability is high A preview effect is performed. The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the rendering button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the rendering button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into the super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At the same time, the first large-screen behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed without being displayed. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss without performing the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be performed, and further, the loss After the effect display having the above-mentioned effect is performed, the resurrection effect may be displayed to perform the effect display having the big hit. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (39), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 17 (40) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image is faded out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the protagonist's lord wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene is faded out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. . Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be determined stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini-right-handed display instructing a right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 in FIGS. 18 (58) to (63), the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but in actuality this broken line is displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of “bonus x ○” indicating the number of consecutive units is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first-time big hit game is over, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the player is instructed to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 (62), the right-handed notification is not displayed. In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been suspended by four. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17 show the case where the "decorative 7" is in the reach state and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, but here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state and the middle The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  After that, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view B at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), mini-right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy character swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (41 b) to FIG. 42 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (hold frame) scroll in from below the display area and the hold icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view I. In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop, so The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol or the fourth symbol display device 284 is still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 becomes gradually smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIGS. 20-30 is a figure which shows in a step the change production | presentation centering on the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is an example of the effect performed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is shown in the other drawings. Various effects are also feasible. Furthermore, in FIGS. 20 to 30, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N may be used, and in this case, the second The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Also, in FIG. 20 to FIG. 30, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed.

  The symbols shown in FIG. 20 to FIG. 30 indicate common components when the same symbols as the symbols used so far are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 or the technical ideas shown in the other drawings to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. On the contrary, it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In addition, although the description in FIGS. 20-30 is applicable to any presentation example of this specification, the application to the presentation example demonstrated using FIGS. 14-19 is preferable.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the effect icon causes an action on the change icon h0.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, first, in FIG. 20A, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2" -"Decoration 2" is stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20A, a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and on the right base icon bIr, in FIG. 20A, the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a portion (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 20A, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 4, and the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, the third suspension icon h13, and the fourth suspension icon h14 of the special diagram 1 are displayed. ing. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of all the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0 It is reported that

  Further, FIG. 20 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. is there. The fluctuation icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is finalized and displayed. The navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing when it is determined and displayed, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed even during the determined display.

  In (b) of FIG. 20, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, in the pending icon display area HIS, three pending icons of the first pending icon h11, the second pending icon h12 and the third pending icon h13 are displayed, and in the variation icon display area CIS, the first pending icon The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. Any of the hold icons h1 to h3 and the change icon h0 are display modes of default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front so far. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 20C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the change icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled and shaken. In (d) of FIG. 20, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navy character YM, and in (e) of FIG. 20, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image. Are more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f), the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 20 (e) is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (f), the wave may still oscillate, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 20 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 20 (c) and may be considered to be terminated immediately before (FIG. 20) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while waves are being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  Due to the change in the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed remains displayed, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Note that the variation icon h0 in which the display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 described above, the A-th effect icon (the icon of the n-type navigation character YM) of the A-th color (blue) changes the default variation display icon to the A-th color. This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be omitted, but the description in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 applies. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 20, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20E, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (F) of FIG. 20, the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red which is the same as the embodiment of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the red display mode is at least partially displayed in red. In other words, all may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, an area inside a black edge line) may be displayed in red. The variation icon h0 is changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the variation icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the mode (red mode) of the variation icon h0 after change is different from the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 20 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the A-th color (blue color) (the icon of the navy character YM of the lady) has a variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color of B (red) at the Bth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the A frequency and the B frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be such that the A frequency may be higher than the B frequency, or the A frequency may be higher than the B frequency. The Bth frequency may be higher than the frequency, or the Ath frequency and the Bth frequency may be the same.

  Subsequently, an example shown third from the left in FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 20, the same figure (a) to the same figure (e) is the same as the figure (a) to the same figure (d) described above, and a blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a smoke image of blue similar to the aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is viewed before being covered It is difficult. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 20 (f), there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in this example, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default (white) display mode. Thus, even if the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but also not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes may be regarded as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icons does not change may be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may always change. Even in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Subsequently, an example illustrated in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a blue display mode, and in FIG. 20 (d1), the display mode navigation of the display mode wearing a blue kimono The character YM swings a sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, an area inside a black edge line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e1), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is the same as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM, and is also the same as the display aspect of the variation icon h0. The covered icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (f1) of FIG. 20, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0, which has been displayed in blue until it is covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a red display. That is, the variation icon h0 is changed to an aspect different from the aspect (blue aspect) of the kimono of the navigation character YM as well as the effect image Eh0. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Subsequently, an example illustrated in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the variation icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be a blue display mode. In addition, in the case of the display mode in which the blue character Kimono is worn, the display character in the red kimono may be possible. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a blue display mode, and it is an example of the display mode in which the you-like navi character YM is a red kimono. In (d2), the lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings the sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navi character YM shown in FIG. 20 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, all may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, a kimono part) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e2), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the display mode of the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is before being covered It is difficult to see. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 20 (f2), in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the blue display mode. The variation icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) that the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 20 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target.

  In addition, as an aspect, white, blue and red have been described as an example, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or no pattern aspect (A aspect), a blue or diagonal aspect (B aspect), a green or diamond aspect (C aspect), red or The lattice pattern aspect (D aspect) and the golden color and vertical line pattern aspect (E aspect) become higher in order, and the rainbow color and horizontal line aspect aspect (F aspect) become the highest aspect . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described using FIG. 20 may be replaced with blue. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Also, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the display character with a blue kimono may have been a display with a white kimono, or may have a green kimono with a blue kimono. The effect image Eh0 which is the display mode of may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the display character with the blue kimono may be a display with the red kimono or may be the display with the golden kimono. It may be a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the effect image Eh0 which is a blue display mode may be a red display mode or a gold display mode, or a rainbow It may be a color display mode. In addition, when the aspect is roughly divided, the aspect (the C aspect) of the green or diamond pattern, the following aspects (the first group which is the group of the A aspect, the B aspect, the C aspect), the red color and the Lattice Pattern Aspect (D Aspect) The above aspect (D aspect, E aspect, F group second group) can be divided. Here, the aspect belonging to the first group can not be changed to the aspect belonging to the second group, and the aspect belonging to the second group can not be altered to the aspect belonging to the first group. On the other hand, while exchanging of the aspect in a 1st group is enabled, the exchange of an aspect in a 2nd group may also be enabled. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number or the like. In addition, the player's advantage is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state or / and a short time state), that a premier effect is likely to be started, or a big hit finalization effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same as in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Furthermore, the aspect of each icon may be the aspect of the entire icon (entire area) or the aspect of only a part of the icon (partial area).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 20, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navi character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action on the variation icon h0.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a), the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 21 (c), the navigation character YM which has been in the initial posture up to that point faces the variation icon h0 in the white display mode, It changes to the pose which is pulling out the sword and waving. In (d) of FIG. 21, the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino character YM, and in (e) of FIG. 21, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the blue smoke image The icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (f), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a blue display that is the same as the embodiment of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is false notice It will have been.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21 described above, the A-th presentation icon (the icon of the navigation character YM of the B-color (red)) of the B-th color (red) is the variation icon of the default display mode. Blue) is an example of changing with the Cth frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 21, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 21, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0, which has been the default (white) display mode until it is covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a red display mode. That is, the variation icon h0 is changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 21 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red color) (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lady) has a variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color (red) of D at the Dth frequency (probability). In addition, not the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode, for example, the fluctuation icon h0 of the green display mode may be used. In this case, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red) (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lord) changes the display icon of the C-th color (green) to the B-th color (red) ) At the Dth frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example illustrated third from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 21, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the example shown third from the left in FIG. 21, the same figure (a) to the same figure (e) are the same as the figure (a) to the same figure (d) described above, and red kimono The main character's navi character YM of the worn display mode faces the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swings, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (f) of FIG. 21, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variation icon h0, which was the display mode of the default (white) until covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (H), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice with the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown from the left of FIG. 21 described above, the A-th presentation icon of the B-th color (red color) (the icon of the do-you-so navi character YM) is the variation icon of the default display mode. It is an example of changing to the color (gold) at frequency E (probability). Here, the relationship between the Cth frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, the Dth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 21, and the Eth frequency is the Dth frequency. It may be a relationship of> Eth frequency> Cth frequency. Alternatively, the Dth frequency may be less than the Eth frequency, or the Dth frequency may be the Eth frequency. Also, the Cth frequency may be zero.

  Furthermore, the Dth frequency may be the Bth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 20, or the Ath frequency in the example shown on the left end of FIG. 20> the Cth frequency. It may be.

  Next, an example illustrated at the right end of FIG. 21 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 21, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21, the same figure (A) to the same figure (E) are the same as the figure (a) to the same figure (d) described above, and the display wearing red kimono A state of the lord-like navi-character YM points to the variation icon h0 in the default (white) display manner, changes to a pose in which the sword is removed and shook, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (o), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (k), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change in the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 21 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the mode of each of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color. The display mode may be iridescent or iridescent. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21, the normal advance notice based on the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing some examples in which the display mode of the icons changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, first, in the same figure (a), the combination (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) of the lost design is displayed in a stopped state. The number of reservations shown in FIG. 1 is two, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 22 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed Yes.

  In (b) of FIG. 22, the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special view 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 have default (white) display modes. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. In the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 22 (d), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, is a blue display that is the same as the embodiment It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the fluctuation icon in the default display mode changes to the A-th color (blue) at the F-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, an example shown second from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 22, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown second from the left in FIG. 22, the same figure (A) to the same figure (B) are the same as the figure (a) to the same figure (b) described above, and the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22C, with no icon being displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, an icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is an effect image that is a red smoke image Covered by Eh0, the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D, the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same as the mode of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (E), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice with the fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown from the left of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon in the default display mode changes to the B-th color (red) at the G-th frequency (probability).

  Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 22 (B '), the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed, and in the same figure (C'), the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is red. Is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D ', the variation icon h0, which was a blue display mode until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a red display mode in which the mode is the same as the mode of the effect image Eh0 It is changing. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Also in this example, after this, the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Subsequently, an example illustrated third from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated in the left end of FIG. 22, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown third from the left in FIG. 22, the same (a) to (b) are the same as the previously described (a) to (b), and the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22C, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (d) of FIG. 22, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the default (white) until covered with the effect image Eh0 is the same as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (E), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice with the fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  The example shown from the left of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the variation icon in the default display mode changes to the Cth color (gold) at the Hth frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the Fth frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, the Gth frequency in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 22, and the Hth frequency is the Fth frequency. It may be a relation of> Gth frequency> Hth frequency.

  Next, an example illustrated at the right end of FIG. 22 will be described focusing on differences from the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 22, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22, the same figure (A) to the same figure (I) are the same as the figure (a) to the figure (c) described above, and the display mode of the default (white) The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22 (u), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 22 (e), in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (O), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change in the stage of FIG. Is lower. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  As described above, the examples described with reference to FIG. 22 are all examples for the change icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is the target. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the aspect of each of the fluctuation icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the aspect described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a blue display mode, may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the effect image Eh0, which is a gold display mode, may be a rainbow display mode, and in this case, the display mode of the variation icon h0 after change may be a gold display mode. And may have a rainbow color display mode. Furthermore, the effect image Eh0, which is the display mode of the gold color, may be the display mode of the red color, or may be the display mode of the white color, or may be the display mode of the blue color, the display mode of the green color It may be

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM causes the action of the fluctuation icon h0 to perform a plurality of times in one time of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, first, in the same figure (a), in a state in which the combination of the decorative symbols of lost (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) is stopped and displayed The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed. It is reported that Further, FIG. 23 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In (b) of FIG. 23, the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special view 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 23C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the change icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 23 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, and in FIG. 23 (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh0. The icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (f), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 23 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 23 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 23 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (FIG. 23 immediately before returning to the initial posture) of FIG. 23 (g). The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 23K, during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the variation icon h0 in the red display mode. In the figure (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (n) of FIG. 23, the change image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0 and the change icon h0 which was the display mode of red until it is covered with the effect image Eh0 changes to the gold display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 23 (k) and may be considered to end immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated. It may be considered as an animation performed only in ((l) to (m) in the figure) or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed, and the second icon change animation is It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, in the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and a display (pseudo linked symbol) showing pseudo continuous effect is displayed It may be hours, it may be when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0, it may be at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., the variation display of the decorative symbol has ended It may be time (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may be during or after the operation of the effect moving means such as the family crest item 224E, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd, and the one-man box character article 224H. The start timing of the icon change presentation described here is the same as the icon change presentation described before, and the same applies to the icon change presentation described later.

  Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the icons changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a success animation in which the display mode of the icon changed. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation continued in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation described here is not only twice but once. That is, it can also be viewed as starting from FIG. 23 (c) and ending immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may once disappear between FIG. 23 (g) and FIG. 23 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 23 (g), or disappears immediately after FIG. 23 (g), and is displayed again immediately before FIG. In this case, the separation of the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 23 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigational character YM in the display mode is directed to the variation icon h0 in the display mode in the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 23E, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 23F, in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 23H to FIG. 23L, the above-described FIG. 23H to FIG. 23H described above except that the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. It is the same as figure (l), and after reaching the reach state, the character of the lord of the display style wearing red kimono, YM, faces the variation icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls the sword out The pose changes to a swinging pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (M), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered again by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. Although the effect image Eh0 disappears in FIG. 23 (N), there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23O is returned to the initial posture. In this example also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal advance notice using the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not performed. However, even if the display mode of the variation icon h0 does not change, it may be a big hit.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the icons does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 23, in which the navigation character YM has taken action on the fluctuation icon h0 multiple times in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. .

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 24 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, the same figures (a) to (d) are the same as FIG. 23 (a) to the same figure (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigation character YM in the display mode is directed to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 24E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24F, the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 24 (h) to FIG. 24 (l), the above-described FIG. 23 (h) to FIG. 23 (h) are the same except that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 It is the same as figure (l), and after reaching the reach state, the character of the lord of the display style wearing red kimono, YM, faces the variation icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls the sword out The pose changes to a swinging pose, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (m), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (n), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a golden display mode which is the same as the effect image Eh0. It is changing. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, blue or red) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the icon display mode does not change, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode Was a successful animation. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 24 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The main character's navigation character YM in the display mode is directed to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the default (white color), the pose is removed by pulling out the sword, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 24E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24F, the change icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is in the red display mode which is the same as the effect image Eh0. It is changing. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (preliminarily) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the change of the icon (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  (H) to (L) in FIG. 24 are the same as (h) to (l) in FIG. 24 described above, and a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state The character of the dragon character YM faces the variation icon h0 in the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out, and the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered again by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24N, the effect image Eh0 disappears, but there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24O is returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 whose aspect has changed is that it is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the icon display mode changes, whereas the second icon change animation changes the icon display mode Not a failure anime. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  As mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG.23 and FIG.24, although white, red, and a golden color were mentioned as the example and demonstrated as an aspect, other colors, patterns, etc. may be sufficient. Further, the modes of the variation icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the normal notice by the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but it is a big hit and it is a true notice Good. Here, to summarize the example described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, an example in which success animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. “A continuous success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, an example where a failure animation is continuous (hereinafter referred to as “a continuous failure example”), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High, then the failure success cases were high, then the success failure cases were High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the icon change animation is performed only twice in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

  Furthermore, in the case where the change in the display mode fails, the default color white smoke image effect image Eh0 may always be displayed, or conversely, the white smoke image effect image Eh0 may be displayed. There may be a case where the display mode changes successfully.

  FIG. 25 shows two examples of the icon change effect.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect performed even if the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described in FIG. It is an example performed in the variable display of time.

  First, in FIG. 25 (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 2 in the state where the combination (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed. The first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 25 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes.

  In (b) of FIG. 25, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 have default (white) display modes. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. In the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 25C, the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the red effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 25 (d), the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, is a red display that is the same as the embodiment of the effect image Eh0. It is changing to the aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. In this example, in the effect icon display area DIS, no icon is displayed and the navigation character YM is not displayed, but even if the navigation character YM is displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol A period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display where the display screen becomes dark), a period during which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (preliminary display or error display) In some cases, the navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, an icon change animation as shown in FIG. 25C may be performed.

  In FIG. 25 (e), there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25F, the animation for increasing the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0.

  In FIG. 25 (g), there is one more ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears according to the number of reservations. That is, when the number of reservations is N (N = 3 here), the navigation character YM appears (display is started), and when the number of reservations becomes M (here M = 2), the navigation character YM disappears (display ends) To do). The relationship between N and M in this condition of the navigation character YM may be in the relationship of N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and so on. Note that this condition can be applied to the previous examples, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but may not be applied. In (h) of FIG. 25, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, a navy character YM of a display manner wearing a red kimono appears in an initial posture. And, the navigation character YM is attached with a display of a balloon of "One more remaining with reserve". Further, in FIG. 25 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. The navigation character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigation character YM appears after the variation display of the decorative symbol starts and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed or after reaching the reach state, that is, appears during the reach state You may In addition, it may appear at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may appear when the display (pseudo sequence symbol) showing the pseudo continuous effect is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0 It may appear, it may appear at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., and it may appear when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may appear during or after the operation of the effect moving means such as the family crest item 224E, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd, and the one-man box character article 224H. About the appearance timing of the navigation character YM demonstrated here, it is applicable also to the example demonstrated before this, and is applicable also to the example demonstrated after this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed with the initial posture.

  In FIG. 25 (k), during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In the figure (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (m), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (n) of FIG. 25, the change image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0 and changes to a gold color display that is the same as the current effect image Eh0, which has been a red display until the effect image Eh0 is covered. doing. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the change icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, although the icon change effect performed even if the navigation character YM is not displayed is only one change, it is performed even if a plurality of changes are performed. Also, even with the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the first and second times, the navigation character YM This is an example in which the display mode is different.

  First, in FIG. 25 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. , And four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25A, the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 25A shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h 0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 25 (B), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B), the number-of-holds of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of pendings of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 25C, the navi character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the change icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 25D which follows, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino-like navigation character YM, and in FIG. Covered by the effect image Eh0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25F, the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the display mode. The fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (F), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 25 (F) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 25 (C) and may end immediately before (right before returning to the initial posture) of FIG. 25 (G), while the wave is being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (D) to (E), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (H), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In FIG. 25 (H), the navigation character YM is covered by the effect image EYM which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is less visible than before being covered. The navigation character YM0 may be partially covered by the effect image EYM or may be entirely covered by the effect image EYM. In FIG. 25I, the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono before being covered by the effect image EYM, is a red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. The change effect of the navigation character YM which is the effect icon may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and before reaching the reach state or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state, that is, during the reach state It may be done. In addition, it may be started according to the change display start of the decorative symbol, it may be started when the display (pseudo run symbol) indicating the pseudo run effect is displayed, and the timer of the timer notice becomes 0 It may be started at the time, may be started at the time of operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, etc., and may be started when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished (during stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during swing fluctuation of three decorative symbols, start of operation effects (such as button effects) using operation means such as chance button 136 It may be started later, during or after operation of the effect movable means such as a family crest item 224E, a first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to a fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd, and a one-man box character article 224H. The start timing of the change presentation of the presentation icon (here, the navigation character YM) described here is also applicable to the example described before this, and is also applicable to the example described thereafter.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (I), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (J) that follows, the word display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 25K, during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the fluctuation icon h0 in the blue display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (M), at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is the same red smoke image as the changed aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variation icon h0 is not It is more difficult to see. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (N) of FIG. 25, the variation image h0 which is the display mode of blue until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of red which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It is changing. The fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Even in the second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect (here, blue) as the display aspect of the fluctuation icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25O is returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 25 (K) and may be considered to end immediately before the same figure (O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in ((L) to (M) in the figure, or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  It should be noted that, when a change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is performed, and a display mode of the effect icon changes, a change effect of the display mode of the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. May be Furthermore, the display mode of the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the changed display mode of the presentation icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B-th display mode are performed in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, only one change is performed as an icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode, but a plurality of changes may be performed, and Also in the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B-th display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  The example described with reference to FIG. 25 is an example in which the change icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted. In addition, as an aspect, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. The mode of each of the variation icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the variation icon h0, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a golden color. It may be a display mode, or may be a rainbow display mode. In addition, the display character with the blue kimono may be a display with the white kimono, or may be the display with the green kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a red kimono, the display mode wearing a golden kimono, or the display mode wearing a rainbow kimono. Furthermore, the display character navi-character YM, which is a display mode wearing a red kimono, may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode wearing an iridescent kimono Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono.

  FIG. 26 is a view showing several examples in which the navigation character YM is taking action on the hold icon a plurality of times in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, first, in the same figure (a), with the combination (“decor 2”-“decor 3”-“decor 2”) of the decorative patterns of the lost being stopped, The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 26 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In (b) of FIG. 26, the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special view 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 26C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 26 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26E, at least a part of the first variation icon h11 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh1, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 26 (f), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM It has changed to the red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (g) is returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing shown in FIG. 26 (f) (effect image It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 26 (c) and may be considered to have ended immediately before (right before returning to the initial posture) of FIG. 26 (g), or while waves are being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decor 4" is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has started to shake. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (i), the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the same figure (j) that follows, the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In the reach state, the second icon change animation is started in the reach state in FIG. 26K, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the left side, and in FIG. , The wave is oscillated from the sword. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 26 (n), the first display icon h11, which is the display mode of red until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is the gold display mode in which the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 26 (k) and may be considered to end immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), while the wave is being oscillated. It may be considered as an animation performed only in the same figure (l) to the same figure (m) or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a success animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation continued in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation described here is not only twice but once. That is, it can also be viewed as starting from FIG. 26 (c) and ending immediately before the same figure (o) (immediately returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may once disappear between FIG. 26 (g) and FIG. 26 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 26 (g), or disappears immediately after FIG. 26 (g), is redisplayed immediately before FIG. 26 (k), or is redisplayed at FIG. 26 (k). In this case, the separation of the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 26 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, the same figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26E, at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 26F, in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  26H to FIG. 26L are the same as the above-described FIG. 26H except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode. ~ Same as in Figure (l), after reaching reach, the character Nayomi YM of the display manner wearing a red kimono turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and shook Waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26M, at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 becomes less visible than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 26N, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged, and the first hold icon h11 remains the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26O has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. (1) The change display of the decoration symbol (the change display of the decoration symbol to be started next) performed when the suspension is digested may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode did not change from the default display mode, the pre-reading advance notice by the 1st hold icon h11 is not performed, and it is possible to lose rather than the big hit in the next fluctuating display of the decoration symbol. Sex is high.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 26, in which the navigation character YM has taken action on the hold icon a plurality of times in one time variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, the same figures (a) to (d) are the same as the previously described figures 26 (a) to (d), and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navi-character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and extends from the sword of the navi-character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11. The wave is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27E, at least a portion of the first storage icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 27F, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 27 (h) to FIG. 27 (l), FIG. 26 (h) explained above except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode. ~ Same as in Figure (l), after reaching reach, the character Nayomi YM of the display manner wearing a red kimono turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and shook A wave extending from the sword of the navigation character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 27 (n), the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, blue, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Was a successful animation that changed. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and the overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 27, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navi-character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and extends from the sword of the navi-character YM through the variation icon h0 to the front of the first hold icon h11. The wave is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27E, at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a red smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 27F, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, green, gold, or rainbow color) different from the aspect after the change of the icon. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  FIGS. 27H to 27L are the same as FIGS. 7H to 7L described above, and a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state The character changes from the sword of the navigation character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 from the sword of the navigation character YM by turning to the pose where the character of the character of the dragon YM turns to the left and withdraws the sword. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27M, at least a portion of the first reserved icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1, which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 becomes less visible than before being covered. ing. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 27N, the effect image Eh1 disappears, but there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27O is returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. A big hit may be made with the variation display of the decoration pattern (the variation display of the decoration pattern started next) which is performed by being digested by the first suspension. That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Is a failure animation that does not change. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it is possible to think that the icon change animation is not once but once.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, white, red, and gold are described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the modes of the reserve icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. For example, the hold icon that is the white display mode may be the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display It may be an aspect or may be an iridescent display aspect. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the holding icon is not limited to the first holding icon h11, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display mode of a plurality of hold icons or the display mode of the change icon h0 and the display mode of one or more hold icons change.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the prefetch notice by the hold icon whose display mode is changed is a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the example described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, an example in which the success animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. “A continuous success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, an example where a failure animation is continuous (hereinafter referred to as “a continuous failure example”), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High, then the failure success cases were high, then the success failure cases were High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, although the icon change animation is performed only twice in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM has taken a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, first, in the same figure (a), in the state where the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, The number of reservations of the special view 1 is four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28A, the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is four, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is zero. It is reported that Further, FIG. 28 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In (b) of FIG. 28, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (b), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 28C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 28 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the domino navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and also passes through the first holding icon h11 and extends to the front of the second holding icon h12. In FIG. 28E, at least a part of the second variation icon h12 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh2, and the second variation icon h12 is less visible than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. The effect image Eh2 may also overlap at least a part of another icon (a change icon or another reserved icon). In FIG. 28 (f), the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh2, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the red display mode. The second reserve icon h12 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing shown in FIG. 28 (f) (effect image It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 28 (c) and may be considered to have ended just before FIG. 28 (g) (immediately returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is being oscillated (FIG. The animation may be viewed as being performed only in (d) to (e), or may be viewed as being performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 28 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons such as the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (i), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0 Is reported. When the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (i), no icon is displayed.

  28 (j) to (l), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 28 (m), the second icon change animation is displayed in the state where the display of the navigation character YM remains off. It has been started. In FIG. 28 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (n), the first display icon h11, which is the display mode of red until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is the gold display mode in which the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time Has changed. Even in the second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect different from the aspect after the icon change (for example, the same aspect as the display aspect of the first hold icon h11 before the change (here, red)). As shown in FIG. 28 (o), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a success animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. That is, in a plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol, the successful animation is an example in which it is continuous. Moreover, although the holding icon whose display mode changes according to the icon change animation is a holding icon indicating the same holding, it may be a holding icon indicating a different holding (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 28 (m), which is the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 28 (f), may change.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 28 will be described focusing on the difference from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, the same diagrams (A) to (D) are the same as the diagrams (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn The lord-like navigation character YM in the display mode turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0, and also passes through the first hold icon h11 and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 28E, at least a part of the second reserved icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 that is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is less visible than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. Although the effect image Eh2 disappears in FIG. 28F, in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28H, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 28 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. Whether the two pending icons or the variation icon h0 is a default (white) display mode. Further, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (I).

  28J to FIG. 28L are the same as the above-described FIG. 27J except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. The same as (a) to (d) in the figure, with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 28 (M), the second icon change is performed in that state. The animation has been started. In FIG. 28M, at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 28N, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed here either, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 28O, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the first suspension is digested. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol to be performed (the variation display of the decorative symbol to be started next), there may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode did not change from the default display mode, the pre-reading advance notice by the 1st hold icon h11 is not performed, and it is possible to lose rather than the big hit in the next fluctuating display of the decoration symbol. Sex is high.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, it is an example in which the failure animation is continuous in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 28, in which the navigation character YM has caused a plurality of actions with respect to the hold icon in the plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, the figures (a) to (d) are the same as the previously described figures 28 (a) to (d), and a red kimono was worn In the display mode, the lord-like navi character YM turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and from the sword of the navi character YM, it passes the variation icon h0 and also passes the first holding icon h11 (2) A wave extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 29E, at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 that is a white smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29F, the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 29 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. Whether the two pending icons or the variation icon h0 is a default (white) display mode. Further, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 28 (I).

  In the subsequent FIGS. 29 (j) to (l), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not the red display mode but the white display mode, and the previously described FIG. The same as in the figure (l), and with the display of the navigation character YM turned off, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 29 (m), the second icon remains in that state. Change animation has been started. In FIG. 29 (m), at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (n), the first reserved icon h11, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same as the effect image Eh1. It is changing to the aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, blue, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. As shown in FIG. 29 (o), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Was a successful animation that changed. That is, this is an example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is first displayed in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, the figures (A) to (D) are the same as the figures 28 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono was worn In the display mode, the lord-like navi character YM turns to the left and changes to a pose with the sword removed and swung, and from the sword of the navi character YM, it passes the variation icon h0 and also passes the first holding icon h11 (2) A wave extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 29E, at least a portion of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 that is a red smoke image, and the second variation icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. . Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29F, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same as the effect image Eh2 It is changing to the aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, green, gold, or rainbow color) different from the aspect after the change of the icon. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29H, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 29 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, when the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 29 (I).

  The following FIG. 29 (J) to FIG. (L) are the same as FIG. 28 (i) to FIG. The display is continued, and in FIG. 29 (M), the second icon change animation is started in that state. In FIG. 29M, at least a part of the first reserved icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is less visible than before covered. It has become. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. Although the effect image Eh1 disappears in FIG. 29N, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed here, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 29O, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the icon change animation of the second time is the display mode of the hold icon Is a failure animation that does not change. That is, this is an example in which a failure animation is displayed after the success animation is displayed first in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, white, red, and gold are described as an example, but other colors, patterns, and the like may be used. Further, the modes of the holding icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. For example, the hold icon that is the white display mode may be the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display It may be an aspect or may be an iridescent display aspect. In addition, the display character with a red kimono may be a display with a golden kimono or a display with a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be wearing a white kimono, the display mode wearing a blue kimono, or the display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the holding icon is not limited to the first holding icon h11, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display mode of a plurality of hold icons or the display mode of the change icon h0 and the display mode of one or more hold icons change.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the prefetch notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed is a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the example described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, an example in which the success animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. “A continuous success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, an example where a failure animation is continuous (hereinafter referred to as “a continuous failure example”), an example shown in the left half of An example in which the success animation is displayed after the failure animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “failure success example”), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, is a failure after the success animation is displayed first There are cases where animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success and failure cases"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a final manner, is the most likely to be the case of continuous success. High, then the failure success cases were high, then the success failure cases High if done, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be a loss by all means (big hit probability is 0%), and there may be a big hit (big hit probability is higher than 0%).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the icon change animation is performed only once in the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one variable display of the decorative symbol is In the inside, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed multiple times in one time of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and further, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times in the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol. Good.

  FIG. 30 shows two examples of the icon change animation.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 30 is an example where it is easy to recognize an icon to be changed in the icon change animation.

  First, in FIG. 30 (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. , And four special icon 1 hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is four, and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is zero. It is reported that Further, FIG. 30 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In (b) of FIG. 30, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (b), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is 0 Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 30 (d), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave in this case extends to the front of the second holding icon h12 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the point of the sword toward the second holding icon h12. Since the wave shown in FIG. 28 (d) passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11, the fluctuation icon h0 can be seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 can also be seen as a change target . On the other hand, the wave shown in FIG. 30D does not have such a thing because it avoids the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11, and the second holding icon h12 is a change target by the display of the arrow. It is clearer that there is something.

  In FIG. 30E, at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh2, and the second change icon h12 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the second hold icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or the entire second reserve icon h12 may be covered by the effect image Eh2. The effect image Eh2 may also overlap at least a part of another icon (a change icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 30 (f), the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh2 Has changed to the display mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh2 may be an aspect (for example, white, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (f), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 30 (f) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears.

  In (g) of FIG. 30, there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 30 (i), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is done. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done.

  In FIG. 30 (j), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 30 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, turns left and pulls the sword. It changes to the pose you are shaking. In the following FIG. 30 (l), the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave in this case extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0. Furthermore, an arrow also extends from the point of the sword toward the first holding icon h11. Since the wave shown in FIG. 30 (l) also avoids the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is not seen as a change target, and moreover, the first hold icon h11 is a change target by the display of the arrow. Is becoming clearer.

  In FIG. 30M, at least a part of the first suspension icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 30 (n), the first display icon h11, which is a display mode of red until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is a gold display mode in which the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh1 Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, but the first suspension is digested. There is a case that a big hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed (the variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, there may be a case where the advance notice by the first hold icon h11 in which the display mode has changed is a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 30, the effect icon (navi character YM) of the A-th display mode (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the B-th display mode (red kimono) shown in FIG. This is an example in which the icon to be changed is more easily recognized than the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode of

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the display mode changes again with the hold icon whose display mode has changed becoming a change icon.

  First, in FIG. 30 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state in which the combination (“decor 2” − “decor 3” − “decor 2”) of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed. , And four special icon 1 hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (A), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0. It is reported that Further, FIG. 30 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. Yes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr in an initial posture.

  In FIG. 30 (B), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Regardless of the three reserved icons or the variation icon h0, all display modes are default (white). In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (B), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts an icon change animation, turns to the left, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In the following FIG. 30D, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono. The wave here passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 30E, at least a portion of the first suspension icon h11 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh1, and the first variation icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh2, or all of the first hold icon h11 may be covered by the effect image Eh1. In addition, the effect image Eh1 may overlap even at least a part of another icon (a fluctuating icon or another reserved icon).

  In FIG. 30F, the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode until the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to the red display mode. The first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh1 may be an aspect (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (F), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image of FIG. 30 (F) It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears.

  In FIG. 30 (G), there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 30 (I), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is done. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous change has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed with the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across continuous symbol variation display It will be done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30J, the reach state is formed, and the character display of "reach" is displayed. In other words, in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 4" in swinging movement, the middle symbol display area 208b in which the fluctuation display is continued at high speed, and the "decoration 4" in swing fluctuation in the right symbol display area 208c In order to overlap from the side), the character display of "reach" is displayed, and the display in each symbol display area 208a-c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 30K, during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings the sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 30M, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before being covered. The variation icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In (N) of FIG. 30, the change image h0 disappears from the effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 which was the display mode of red until it is covered with the effect image Eh0 changes to the gold display mode which is the same mode as the mode of the effect image Eh0. doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. However, the aspect of the effect image Eh0 may be an aspect (for example, white, red, etc.) different from the aspect after the icon change. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30O has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (P), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 4") is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 30, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed multiple times. In addition, the icon change presentation is performed only once for the variation icon, but may be performed multiple times. That is, after an icon change effect is performed one or more times on a certain hold icon, the hold icon may become a change icon, and an icon change effect may be performed one or more times on the change icon. May be

  In the above description, the navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations becomes N (N = 3 here) and disappears when the number of reservations becomes M (M = 2 here), but the navigation character YM , May be always displayed. However, even if it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or can not be seen for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, in a period during super reach, a period during dark display in which the display screen is dark, or a period in which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (notice display or error display), the navigation character YM is It may disappear or disappear. In addition, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0 and the symbol variation display (variation display of the decoration symbol) is finished, a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as "demonstration display") is displayed. That is, the demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. The demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a game console title and the like is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display. Also in these demonstration displays, the navigation character YM may be displayed. Further, in the display period of the demonstration display, the navigation characters YM of all the display modes may be displayable, or only the navigation characters YM of the display modes belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the navigation character YM in the white, blue, and green display modes may be displayed. Alternatively, only the navigation character YM of the white display mode may be displayed, or only the navigation character YM of the blue display mode may be displayed in the display period of the demonstration display, or the navigation of the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

  Also, although the description has been made only for the example of presentation using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the presentation icon, the effect icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the character of the lord, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. It may be an icon of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b).

  Also, the icon to be changed may be a change icon or a hold icon. In the case of the hold icon, it may be the first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, or the fourth hold icon. . Furthermore, the type of the change target icon may be the type of the hold icon or the change icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The certain icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a blue display mode],
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, red display mode].
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Rather, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be displayed finally in the final display [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed,
The presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [e.g. Figure 25 (N)],
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red],
The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
Even when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode [for example, , Figure 20 (f2)],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a result different from the expectation of the player who expects to change to the second display mode.

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  In the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain mode may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain mode.

  Further, a certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The certain icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a blue display mode],
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Rather, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be displayed finally in the final display [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed,
The presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing red kimono].
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [e.g. Figure 25 (N)],
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red],
The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed in a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [e.g. Figure 22 (D ')],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even if the change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good. In addition, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed in a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

Also,
“The presentation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing blue kimono]]
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode].
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon,
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, a display mode of the certain icon changes to a first frequency [for example, the first , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [eg, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [eg , B frequency (B probability)] [eg, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The frequency referred to here may be a probability (the same applies hereinafter).

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means by which a certain icon [for example, the change icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The certain icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display,
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a blue display mode],
The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],
When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Rather, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be displayed finally in the final display [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed,
The presentation icon is an icon different from the certain icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The presentation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a statue wearing a blue kimono].
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing red kimono].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [e.g. Figure 25 (N)],
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red],
The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [e.g. Figure 20 (f1)],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, when an icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Also, one aspect may be only one of color, pattern, size, shape, type of character, all or part of character, or a combination of all of them. Some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It is also good.

Also,
"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon,
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, a display mode of the certain icon changes to a first frequency [for example, the first , Ath frequency (Ath probability)] [eg, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [eg , B frequency (B probability)] [eg, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode,
When an icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a gold display mode] is displayed, a case where an icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed Rather, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be displayed finally in the final display [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the third display mode [eg, the third display mode] , Cth frequency (the Cth probability)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG. 21 (h)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, a fourth frequency [for example, , Dth frequency (Dth probability)] [eg, FIG. 21 (A) to FIG. 21 (H)],
When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon switches to the fifth display mode at a fifth frequency [eg, , E (frequency of E)] [eg, FIG. 21 (A) to FIG. (G)],
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The third frequency is 0,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The certain icon has a sixth frequency [eg, the Fth frequency (Fth probability)] from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. Change [for example, FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [eg, a Gth frequency (Gth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed [Eg, FIG. 22 (A) to FIG. 22 (E)],
The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, H-th frequency (H-th probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed [For example, FIG. 22 (A) to FIG. (E)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed more than once [e.g., hold icon h11 to h14],
In the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the certain icons are displayed, the display mode of the certain icon to be changed is changed,
Rather than the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the fourth display aspect, the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the third display aspect is the change target It is easy to recognize which icon among a plurality of icons is displayed [for example, wave and arrow shown in FIG. 11 (d) or FIG. 1 (l)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the certain icon to be changed may be one or a plurality of icons.

Also,
"The display means may be a means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as" demo display "),
The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214] is stopped Is a display that may be
The presentation icon of the third display mode may be displayed in the display period of the demonstration display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including the title of the game stand is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display.

  Moreover, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in displayed words, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as a "demo display") without fail. Further, the demonstration display may be a display which is always displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.

Also,
"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda," Navira character change "by a spider character Means that may
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display aspect is displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display aspect [eg, as shown in FIG. A) 3-1) to the same figure (A) 6-1, FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), and FIG. 83 (F 1-3-1) to the same figure (G 1-3-4), meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (S 2-2-1) to the same (S 2-2-3)],
If a second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. -1) to Fig. 83-2 (Fig. 3-2-2), Fig. 83 (Fig. 1-3-1) to Fig. 83 (Fig. 1-3-3 b2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the change effect display without fail. In addition, after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
The display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode during the display of the one variation display of the decorative symbol, and during the display of the variation display, Depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times [for example, FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (P)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"While displaying a single variation display of a decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may change a plurality of times depending on the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. (P) ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"While the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon succeeds for the first time and the second time, and the variation display is ended. There are cases (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”) [eg, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (p)],
While the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the certain icon fails for the first time and succeeds for the second time, and the variation display There is also a case (hereinafter referred to as "the second case") when the process ends (for example, Fig. 24 (a) to Fig. (P)),
In the state where the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon succeeds for the first time, and the second time fails, and the variation display There is also a case (hereinafter referred to as the “third case”) when it is finished [eg, FIG. 24 (A) to FIG. (P)],
In the state where the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails for the first time or the second time, and the variation display is ended (Hereinafter referred to as the “fourth case”) [for example, FIG. 23 (A) to FIG. (P)],
In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display],
In the second case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display),
In the first case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The description of the game stand here is in the case where the display mode of the certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the one variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It becomes limitation about the ease of the big hit.

Also,
The display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times in a state where the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect icon is displayed while the variable display is displayed. The display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times while no icon is displayed [eg, FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (p)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The above-mentioned certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area of kimono] displayed in the certain color,
An icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [e.g., an area inside an edge line].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain color. Further, a certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain color.

Also,
“The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over continuous symbol variation display [eg, the example shown in FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. (12), FIG. 30, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a third change animation may be displayed,
The third change animation is an animation for performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by an effect by another icon [for example, the icon I1 of the treasure box shown in FIG. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [eg smoke image] of the certain aspect [eg red] is displayed [eg FIG. 79 (e.g. 2) to FIG. (E.g. 3-2) ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the third change animation without fail. The third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be

Also,
“The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],
A certain icon of the sixth display mode is changed by the effect icon [eg, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lady wearing a red kimono] When an effect is performed, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode [eg, red display mode] [eg, FIG. 21 (F)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When an effect of changing a certain icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. It may change.

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a fourth change animation may be displayed,
The fourth change animation is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon [eg, FIG. 77 (i) to FIG. 21 (i), and FIG. 20 (c) to FIG. 20 (C) to FIG. 20 (F) etc.],
The display means is a means by which an invariable animation may be displayed;
The non-changing animation is an animation that performs an effect that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [eg, FIG. 77 (i)-FIG. 20 (c)-FIG. 20 (c)-FIG. Etc]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the fourth change animation without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the non-change animation without fail.

Also,
"The display means is a means in which a fluctuation icon [eg, fluctuation icon h0] may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon related to symbol variation display being executed,
The certain icon is the change icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the fluctuation icon without fail.

Also,
“The display means may be a means for displaying a hold icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14],
The hold icon is an icon related to symbol variation display to be started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds.
The certain icon is the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the hold icon without fail.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means by which a fluctuation icon [for example, fluctuation icon h0] may be displayed,
The display means may be a means for displaying a hold icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14].
The variation icon is an icon related to symbol variation display being executed,
The hold icon is an icon related to symbol variation display to be started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds.
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],
The variation icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed more than the variation icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol form is likely to be clearly displayed [eg, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high],
The display means is a means by which a presentation icon may be displayed,
The presentation icon is an icon different from the variation icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The presentation icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing red kimono].
When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. (N)],
The effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red],
The variation icon of the second display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red],
When an effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [e.g. 26 (f)],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game console, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the interest of the player may be improved. .

  Here, one aspect may be only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, all or part of the character, or a combination of all of them. And some combinations may be used.

  The display means may be means for displaying the fluctuation icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the hold icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the effect icon without fail. Further, when the effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed to the second display mode without fail . In addition, when an effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the hold icon always changes to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. Good.

Also,
“The presentation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown wearing blue kimono]]
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the variation icon,
When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the first display mode with a first frequency [e.g. Change according to the frequency of A (the probability of A) [eg, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],
When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the second display mode at a second frequency [e.g. Change according to the frequency of B (the probability of B)] [eg, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The case where the variation icon of the fifth display mode [for example, the gold display mode] is displayed is more than the case where the variation icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol form is likely to be clearly displayed [eg, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high],
When an effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the change icon changes to the third display mode from the third frequency [e.g. Change according to the frequency of C (the probability of C) [eg, FIG. 21 (a) to FIG. (H)],
When an effect of changing the change icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the change icon changes to the second display mode as a fourth frequency [e.g. It changes with the frequency (D probability) of D] [for example, FIG. 21 (A)-the figure (H)],
When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes to the fifth display mode with a fifth frequency [e.g. It changes with the frequency of E (the probability of E)] [for example, FIG. 21 (a)-the same figure (ku)],
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The third frequency is 0,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The variation icon changes from the default display mode to the first display mode at a sixth frequency [eg, the Fth frequency (Fth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [Eg, FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e)],
The variation icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [eg, a Gth frequency (Gth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [Eg, FIG. 22 (A) to FIG. 22 (E)],
The variation icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [eg, Hth frequency (Hth probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIG. 22 (a) to the same figure (e)],
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed more than once [e.g., hold icon h11 to h14],
In the effect of changing the fluctuation icon by the effect icon, the display mode of the fluctuation icon to be changed is changed when a plurality of the fluctuation icons are displayed,
The variation icon for which the variation icon is to be changed is more effective for changing the variation icon by the effect icon of the third display mode than the effect of changing the variation icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, It is easy to recognize which fluctuation icon among the plurality of fluctuation icons displayed [for example, wave and arrow shown in FIG. 11 (d) or FIG. (L)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means may be a means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as" demo display "),
The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214] is stopped Is a display that may be
The presentation icon of the third display mode may be displayed in the display period of the demonstration display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the demonstration display includes a symbol demonstration display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including the title of the game stand is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display.

  Moreover, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not the difference due to the difference in displayed words, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It does not have to be a difference depending on the presence or absence.

  The display means may be means for displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter referred to as a "demo display") without fail. Further, the demonstration display may be a display which is always displayed in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the special symbol display is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.

Also,
"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda," Navira character change "by a spider character Means that may
After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,
When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display aspect is displayed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display aspect [eg, as shown in FIG. A) 3-1) to the same figure (A) 6-1, FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), and FIG. 83 (F 1-3-1) to the same figure (G 1-3-4), meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (S 2-2-1) to the same (S 2-2-3)],
If a second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. -1) to Fig. 83-2 (Fig. 3-2-2), Fig. 83 (Fig. 1-3-1) to Fig. 83 (Fig. 1-3-3 b2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the change effect display without fail. In addition, after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
The display mode of the fluctuation icon changes one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode during the display of the one fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the fluctuation display is performed during the display of the fluctuation display. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may change one or more times depending on the effect by the effect icon of the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (P)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"During the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon may change a plurality of times depending on the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. (P)] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the variation icon succeeds for the first time or the second time, and the variation display is ended. (Hereinafter referred to as the “first case”) [eg, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (p)],
While the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails for the first time and succeeds for the second time, and the variation display ends Case (hereinafter referred to as the “second case”) [eg, FIG. 24 (a) to FIG. 24 (p)],
While the effect icon is being displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change in the display mode of the variation icon is succeeded for the first time, and the second time fails, and the variation display is ended Case (hereinafter referred to as “third case”) [eg, FIG. 24 (A) to FIG. 24 (P)],
In the state where the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails for the first time or the second time, and the variation display is ended ( Hereinafter, this will be referred to as the “fourth case.” [Eg, FIG. 23 (A) to FIG. (P)],
In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the fourth case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display],
In the second case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the third case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display),
In the first case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easy to hit the corresponding variable display or the subsequent variable display),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The description of the game stand here is in the case where the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed only twice while the effect icon is being displayed while the one fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It becomes limitation about the ease of the big hit.

Also,
The display mode of the fluctuation icon changes one or more times in the state where the effect icon is displayed while displaying the one time variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect icon is displayed while the fluctuation display is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may change one or more times in a state where it is not displayed [eg, FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (p)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The above-mentioned certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],
The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area of kimono] displayed in the certain color,
The variation icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside an edge line].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the area may be entirely displayed in the certain color. Further, the variation icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color or an area displayed in the certain color.

  Also, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character, or may be a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

Also,
“The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over continuous symbol variation display [eg, the example shown in FIG. 77 (1) to FIG. (12), FIG. 30, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over the continuous symbol variation display.

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a third change animation may be displayed,
The third change animation is an animation for performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by an effect by another icon [for example, the icon I1 of the treasure box shown in FIG. ,
The third change animation is an animation in which at least an effect image [eg smoke image] of the certain aspect [eg red] is displayed [eg FIG. 79 (e.g. 2) to FIG. (E.g. 3-2) ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the third change animation without fail. The third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. May be

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],
An effect that causes the variation icon of the sixth display mode to be changed by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a lady wearing red kimono] When is performed, the display mode of the variation icon may change to the second display mode [eg, red display mode] [eg, FIG. 21 (F)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When an effect of changing the fluctuation icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuation icon always changes to the second display mode. May be

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a fourth change animation may be displayed,
The fourth change animation is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon [eg, FIG. 77 (9) to FIG. 11 (), and FIG. 20 (c) to FIG. Fig. 20 (C) to Fig. 20 (F), etc.]
The display means is a means by which an invariable animation may be displayed;
The non-changing animation is an animation that performs an effect that does not change the display mode of the variation icon [eg, FIG. 77 (4-1) to FIG. 20 (6), FIG. 20 (C) to FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the fourth change animation without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying the non-change animation without fail.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Next, the explanation of the icon change effect will be continued. The icon change effect referred to here changes the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the notice icon, the mini game icon, and the icon change notice icon in addition to the hold icon and the change icon It is an effect.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 31 (a) is a flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is out without reaching the reach state. FIG. 7B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit or a loss after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 31 (a), after the start (the start of the change) of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol stops being decided after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In addition, in the following description, although the stop order of a decorative symbol is made in order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle, it is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop may be performed simultaneously according to the notice (the change notice and the advance notice), the mini game and the effect of the dummy game, etc., or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the finalized stop 11) can be expressed in some cases. In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of rendering that will be out without reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (11) -1”, “Figure XX (11) -2” ... as branch numbers in the drawings. Etc. may be used, and these branched numbers can be mutually replaced. Further, there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects in the timing chart shown in FIG. 31 (a) can be performed in a period indicated by "(11)" (for example, a Gasse notice, etc.). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or from the third stop to the decision stop, perform false eye announcement (preceeding notice) by pseudo-gaze effect, same color (same kind) symbol stop, etc. There are also cases where you can do it. This is a concept that is also applicable to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 31 (b) shows that after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol (variation start), formation of reach state, transition to super reach (SP reach), derivation of result of reach effect, the decorative symbol is detached or big hit It shows the flow until it is decided and stopped in the aspect of, and then the big hit game is over. Here, a period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by a period of “(1)”, and a period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to the SP reach is the period of “(2)” The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of reach production is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the result of the reach production to derivation is from "(4) In some cases, it may be possible to represent the period from the decision stop to the end of the big hit game by the period "(5)". In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of an effect that becomes a big hit or lose after reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (2) -1” and “Figure XX (2) -2” as branch numbers in the drawings. There are cases where “Figure XX (3) -1”, “Figure XX (3) -2”, etc. are used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, various notices including mini games and advance notices may be performed in the period of “(1)”, and effects such as pseudo-links may be performed in the period of “(2)”. If a notice or group notice may be made by the display of a normal reach or a cut-in image, or if there is a chance up notice during SP reach or a notice by a cut-in image displayed in the period of (3). In the period of "(4)", there may be swing fluctuation, revival big hit effect, wipe display, etc. In the period of "(5)", the effect during the big hit game is performed, and the big hit There may be a case in which a probability change notification or a hold sequence notification etc. is performed during the game. In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is performed. In addition, these notices and effects may be combined and performed, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, portions described with the same branch numbers can be replaced as appropriate.

  FIGS. 32 to 37 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner the change effects centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effect shown in FIG. 32 to FIG. 37 is the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effect shown in FIG. 32 to FIG. An effect is also feasible. Furthermore, although the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided in FIGS. 32 to 37, these are not illustrated, but are illustrated in FIGS. 32 to 37. The effect example may be an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. In FIGS. 32 to 37, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. A transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The symbols shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 represent common components when the same symbols as the symbols used so far are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 31 or the technical idea shown in the other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIG. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In addition, although the description in FIGS. 31-37 is applicable to any presentation example of this specification, the application to the presentation example demonstrated using FIGS. 14-31 is preferable.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja in the default display mode is taking action on the hold icon.

  First, in FIG. 32A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") It is displayed stopped. Although the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Α (a), it may be displayed.

  Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (a). The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr, but in FIG. The character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a type of display of the effect icon, and is also a type of icon change notice display. The navigation character is also a display for giving notice that one of the icons may change, and depending on the animation using this navigation character, one of the icons may actually change.

  The navi characters NJ of the ninja shown in FIG. 32 (a) are displayed in the default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. A plurality of display modes are prepared for the navigation character NJ of the ninja, and the default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. In addition, as the above-mentioned plural types of display modes, as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit, the mode of white or no pattern (A mode), the blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode ), Green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), red or lattice aspect (D aspect), gold or vertical line aspect (E aspect), iridescent or transverse line aspect (C) The Fth aspect is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect having the lowest player's degree of advantage and the expectation of the jackpot is the A aspect, and the B aspect, the C aspect, the D aspect and the E aspect. The order F becomes higher, and the F-th mode becomes the mode in which the player's degree of advantage and the expectation of the big hit are the highest. In addition, the player's advantage referred to here is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a definite change state or / and a short time state), that a premier presentation is easy to be started, or a big hit finalization presentation It may be easy to be started. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number or the like.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 32A, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 are both 0, and neither the holding icon nor the variation icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigation character NJ may be displayed even during a period when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and may be displayed even when the number of reservations is 0. is there. In addition, even if it is a navigation character NJ of a ninja in other display modes (for example, a red display mode etc.), the number of reservations may be displayed if it is displayed during a period when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed. It may be displayed in a period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed in the period in which the number of reservations is zero. In this case, the ninja's navigation character NJ of the display mode other than the default display mode during a period (period of stop display or finalized display) in which the number of reservations is 1 or more and the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed May also be displayed. In addition, the period during which the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed may be limited to the navigation character NJ of the white ninja which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of reservations.

  In addition, the second number-of-holds display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (0) -1, and the number of reservations of the special view 1 and the number of special views 2 are also 0. It is informed that there is.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -1, there is one ball entering in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1, the animation for increasing the holding icon is completed, and the first holding icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed only for a moment. Further, in the upper right second number-of-holds display, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 becomes 1 only for a moment. In FIG. 32 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the change display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of reservations is 0, a message display of “Welcome” is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the change is congratulated. Further, in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the moving animation of the reserve icon of the special view 1 is completed, and the icon of the first reserve icon h11 displayed earlier for a moment is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. This variation icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white).

  In FIG. 32 (11) -3, the special figure 1 starting opening 230 again has one ball entered, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Also, in the upper right second number-of-holds display, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is one. While displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 32 (11) -2, entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 continues to occur, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 32 (11) -4 In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed, and in the second hold number display in the upper right, the number of holds for special figure 1 is It is four. Furthermore, a message display of "HOLD MAX" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ. Each of the four hold icons is a default (white) display mode hold icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -5, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. That is, the "decoration 7" has started to fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6, the second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is In the same figure (11) -7 which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of the decorative patterns of lost is fluctuating. And in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the finalized display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  32 (11) -1 continued, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special figure 1 is completed. doing. As a result, in the pending icon display area HIS, three pending icons of the first pending icon h11, the second pending icon h12 and the third pending icon h13 are displayed, and in the variation icon display area CIS, the first pending icon The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13, the change icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white). In the upper right second number-of-retentions display, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed, and this navigation character is displayed across continuous symbol variation display. The ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the initial posture facing the front so far, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In the subsequent FIG. 32 (11)-2, a message display of “Focus on me” is added to the navigation character NJ of the ninja, and an icon change effect is started. That is, although the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it may be simultaneous with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, it can be said that it is after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol and before the start of reach effect start . This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and in FIG. 32 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ previously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. However, the character moves to the upper left corner, and in the same figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. In addition, although the aspect of the shuriken is an aspect different from the display aspect of the navi character NJ of the ninja, it may be the same aspect (here, white). In (11) -5 in FIG. 32, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0. In FIG. 32 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any one of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, and the three suspension icons h11 All ~ h13 remain the default (white) display mode. In this manner, the icon may be covered by the effect image EHI, and may not only change but not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes may be regarded as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icons does not change may be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may always be changed. In addition, the effect image EHI may not occur even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears on the way, or reaches the effect display area 208d, and in this case, in this case, It also becomes a failure animation. However, the icon may be changed even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI. If the icon changes, it becomes a successful animation.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ, which has been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and on the right base icon bIr Display of failure message is added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ) is an effect performed in the period of FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -7, but moves from the effect icon display area DIS It may be considered that the effect is performed only during the same period ((11) -3 to (11) -6), or until the effect image EHI disappears after the shuriken is thrown (FIG. (11)-4-It may be considered as the effect currently performed only in the same figure (11)-6), and may be regarded as the effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 6) -6, a second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the same figure continues In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the lost, is fluctuating. And in FIG. 32 (11) -11, finalized display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  In (1) -1 of Fig. 32, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of Special Figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon which has been the first suspension icon h11 so far in the variation icon display area CIS Is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The two pending icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are also default (white) display modes. In the upper right second number-of-retentions display, it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 1) -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. A message display of "reach" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1.

  However, as shown in FIG. 32 (4) -1, at the third stop, "decoration 3" rather than "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and "decoration 2"-"decoration 3" which is a combination of the decorative designs of lost. -"Decoration 2" is fluctuating. And in FIG. 32 (4) -2, finalization display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  Here, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the hold icon as well as the navi characters NJ of the ninja, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. It is a display mode. In addition, as a display mode of a plurality of types in the hold icon, a white or no pattern (A mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode), a green or a diamond pattern as a display mode of the preview preview Aspect (the C aspect), red or lattice aspect (the D aspect), golden or vertical line aspect (the E aspect), iridescent or horizontal line aspect (the F aspect) It is prepared. Among these embodiments, the embodiment with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the A embodiment, and the B embodiment, the C embodiment, the D embodiment and the E embodiment are in the order of highest. The Fth aspect becomes an aspect (for example, an aspect of the big hit determination) in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest.

  The figure (11) -6 'shown at the right end of FIG. 32 is an example different from the figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the figure (11) -5 disappears. Of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, although the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 'is an example of a successful animation, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit is lower than the case of changing to the red display mode.

  Further, in the same figure (11) -6 ′ shown at the right end of FIG. 32 and in the same figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the same figure (11) -5 disappears. Each of the three reserve icons h11 to h13 has only the first reserve icon h11 changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 ′ ′ is also an example of a successful animation, and an expectation of a big hit than in the case of changing to a blue display mode (in the case of FIG. (11) -6 ′). Degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

  As described above, in the icon change effect which is an animation using the navi character NJ of the default display mode, the change of the icon may be successful or may fail. In addition, in the icon change effect which is an animation using the navigation character NJ of the ninja of blue (the B mode), it is more than the icon change presentation which is an animation using the navigation character NJ of the ninja of the white (the A mode). The probability of success in changing the icon is high, and in the icon change effect that is an animation using the green (Nth C mode) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (Bth mode) ninja navigation character NJ is used. The probability of success in changing the icon is higher than that of the icon change effect that is the animation used.

  Similarly to the variation icon h0, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared, which are the same as the modes A to E. Also in the display mode in the variation icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. In addition, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal advance notice) regarding a big hit in the currently displayed variable display, and represents an expectation (reliability) of the big hit. In other words, the mode with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the A mode, and the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode become higher in the order of The aspect of F becomes the aspect with the highest expectation of the big hit (for example, the aspect of the big hit determination).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ takes action on the hold icon.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 32 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  33 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in FIG. 33 are the (11) in the second column from the left in FIG. It is the same as -3 and all three pending | holding icons h11-h13 are display modes of default (white), and the fluctuation icon h0 is also a display mode of default (white). Further, in FIG. 33 (11) -2, a message display of “Focus on me” is added to the navigation character NJ of the white ninja, an icon change effect is started, and in the next FIG. 'S ninja navigation character NJ is moving to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 33 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered with the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only part of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH, or all of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 33 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the navi character NJ of the ninja, which was in the white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH, changes to the red display mode. Although the mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navi character NJ after the change, the mode may be the same mode (red here).

  In FIG. 33 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ throws three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In FIG. 33 (11) -7, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. Although the mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja, it may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0. In FIG. 33 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and among the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation in which one or more of the hold icon and the change icon must be changed. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after change) may be determined in advance to be the same mode as the navigation character NJ, that is, red, or may not be determined to the mode after change. However, it is changed to a mode that the reliability of the big hit increases. Therefore, there may be a case where the game is changed to a big hit finalized rainbow aspect. In addition, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, it may be surely changed to the same mode as the mode of the effect image EHI covering the icon. Even in the case of an animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, a case of failure animation (the form of the icon does not change) may be intentionally provided.

  In FIG. 33 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ which has been moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and "do it" on the right base icon bIr. Display of success message has been added. In this example, in the icon change presentation, the change presentation of the navigation character is also performed. It should be noted that the icon change effect and the change effect of the navigation character can be considered separately, and in this case, the change effect of the navigation character is as shown in FIG. 33 (11) -3 to FIG. The icon change effect is as shown in FIG. 33 (11) -6 to FIG. 33 (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  33 (11) -10 to FIG. 33 (11) -13 indicate that the navigation character NJ of the ninja is in the red display mode and that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also the red display mode. Except for the above, this is the same as FIG. 32 (11) -8 to FIG. Is displayed.

  In Fig. 33 (1) -1, the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variation display of the ornamental figure is started again in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon display area CIS is the red first suspension icon h11. Icon is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0. Although the red fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in FIG. 33 (1) -1, this red fluctuation icon h0 is larger than the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 32 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are display modes of default (white). Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 11) -3, a second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is formed. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1 is added with a red “superheat” message display instead of a “reach” message display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (2) -2, at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the presentation icon display area DIS is started with the advance notice of the sabo hani group. , Sabohani is overlapping. The navigation character may overlap with at least a portion of the sabothani without the sabothani overlapping. Also, at least a portion of the "superheat" message display may overlap with the SaboHani, and conversely, the "superheat" message display may overlap with at least a portion of the SaboHani. In the following FIG. 33 (2) -3, a message display of "SP development is red" is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, and it is reported that the game will develop into super reach. In addition, when the Sabohani group advance notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second number-on-hold display. In this example, even if the sabothani group announcement is started, the hold icon, the fluctuation icon, and the navi character remain without disappearing, but when the sabohani group announcement is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon may disappear, and the base icon hs0 may disappear as well. Also, the navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be displayed continuously.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (3) -1, it is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostess swordsman confront is displayed. In addition, a message display of “Ken-Age Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the enemy character swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy character swordsman.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (3)-2, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays a deca-button image 136 ab, which is a large image imitating the chance button 136, as a result of the development to the super reach. This big button image 136ab overlaps with all of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman, which are displayed as a super reach effect display, so that the Yoshimune and the swordsman can not be seen. The deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is less visible than before being overlapped. Furthermore, the deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being overlapped. Further, in the deca-button image 136ab, characters of “push” for promoting the operation are displayed large according to the size of the deca-button image 136ab. Furthermore, the red ninja navigation character NJ is added with a message display "It is a big button" in place of the message display of "Swordsman Reach".

  In FIG. 33 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136ab disappears, and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being overlapped. Furthermore, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is less visible than before being overlapped. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "strong cut-in" in place of the message display of "It's a big button", but a message display of "Kengo reach" is added again. It is also good.

  In addition, normally, the operation effective period which receives operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect will be performed after the operation effective period has elapsed. You may

  After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy player swordsman is displayed with the word “win”, and the first decoration In the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, the "decorative 2" to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" Is notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed below the second number-of-retentions display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . It should be noted that no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, but a message display of “big hit” may be added. If the hold icon or the change icon has disappeared, the display is returned at this timing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is finalized and displayed. The red variation icon h0 is erased at the timing of this finalized display. The red fluctuation icon h0 is a true advance notice. Also, the red ninja navigation character NJ is returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variation display started in FIG. 33 (1) -1 corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 33 (11) -8) ends. The red ninja navigation character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variable display ends and the final display is performed, the red ninja navigation character NJ returns to the default display mode.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the selection of the icon change notice display and the change in the form.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of icon change notice display is selected from the demo display, and in (0) -1 of FIG. Is finished, and the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Also, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1 is displayed in the default display mode.

  If a new symbol variation display is not started before a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the final display of the special symbol stop symbol is performed with the special symbol hold being 0, the first decorative symbol display A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, while the background of the symbol variation display is being performed, the combination of the symbol demo display in which the combination of the stopped decoration symbols continues to be displayed and the combination of the stopped decoration symbols disappear and the symbol variation display is performed. There is an animation demo display in which a dedicated animation is displayed by switching from the background screen. In addition, a dedicated background screen may be displayed even in the symbol demo display. Although the animation demonstration display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, the animation demonstration display may be displayed via the symbol demonstration display, or the symbol demonstration display An animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed, and in the lower part, it is informed that a menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. There is.

  In (0) -3 in FIG. 34, the chance button 136 is operated, and a menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the topmost effect customization icon, and the other icon is displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. . Further, in the option menu screen, a picture of operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In the state where the menu screen is displayed, when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -4, the cursor icon cs displayed so far in the effect customization icon moves down by one This time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. When the chance button 136 is pressed in a state in which the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a character selection screen. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the leader, and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode, and the character of the currently selected lord is displayed. , Selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF is moved, and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. In this state, when the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, a character selection decision screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -6. Of the three characters shown in, only the character of the ninja is displayed large, and the message display of the large "I leave it alone" is added. After that, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L once returns to the screen before the animation demonstration display is displayed, and is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. Is displayed with the white ninja navigation character NJ added with a message of “thank you”.

  In the selection of the character by the player, the type of the character can be selected, but the display mode of each character can not be selected, and the display mode of each character is the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed, and when the character is selected, the display mode different from the default display mode is initially displayed from the beginning It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and when the character in the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, the default display is performed. The character may be automatically changed to a character different from the character, and may be displayed from the beginning in the effect icon display area DIS in a manner different from the default display manner, or the display of the character selection decision screen is the default. When the character that was the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the default display mode It may in some cases automatically changes the character of the different aspects. In these cases, the display mode is determined internally by the lottery regarding the effect.

  The example shown second from the left in FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of icon change notice display is selected from the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure is also shown in (0) -1 of the second column from the left in the same figure. The variation display of the decorative symbols is finished when the number of reservations is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 to (11) -2 in the second row in FIG. 34 are the same as in (32) to (11) -2 in FIG. , And the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character BC of the default display mode is displayed. In this state, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined to be the character of the Bancho character as the navigation character, and a message display of "Yoshaa" is added to the navigation character BC of the Pancho.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -4, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. In this example, the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the change is possible until the first stop is performed in the change display of the decorative symbol, and the tutorial display is displayed until then. When the stop is made, the above tutorial display disappears. It should be noted that the character change of the navigation character by cross key operation during the change may be possible until the second stop is performed, or may be possible until it shifts to the reach state, or from the start of the variable display It may be possible for a fixed period of time, or may be possible until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either, In the same figure (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, is fluctuating. And in FIG. 34 (11) -7, the finalized display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 is a view showing an example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 34 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in the same figure, (11) -10 in FIG. 32 (0) -1 in the same figure The same applies to -2, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and all three display icons h11 to h13 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 34 (11) -10, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and a message display of “focus on attention” is added. Here, the change effect directed to the navigation character NJ of the ninja is started instead of the icon change effect directed to the hold icon or the variation icon.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, but at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being covered. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIIH. In FIG. 34 (11) -12, the navi character NJ of the ninja who was in the white display mode before the effect image EIH disappears and is covered with the effect image EIH is on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. And the display mode is changed to red. The mode of the effect image EIH may be the same (here, red) as the display mode of the navi character NJ after the change. The navigation character NJ changed to the red display mode is added with a message display such as "Atsushi".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and 11) At the second stop is performed at 11) -14, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped at the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the third figure at the same figure (11) -15. A stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost are shaking and fluctuating. And in FIG. 34 (11) -16, the finalized display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is not started.

  In (1) -1 of FIG. 34, the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is Completed. As a result, two suspension icons, the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12, are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode is the default (white) display mode regardless of whether the first hold icon h11 or the second hold icon h12 is set. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -2, which continues from FIG. 34 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started, and in the next FIG. Moving from DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In FIG. 35 (1) -4, the three hurled swords reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the reserved icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS The flash effect image is covered by EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two reserve icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0 is covered by the flash effect image EHI, and the respective icons h11, h12 and h0 become less visible than before being covered. ing. In addition, only one part of these three icons h11, h12 and h0 may be covered by the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). Note that the flash effect image EHI covers only the change icon display area CIS of the reserved icon display area HIS and the change icon display area CIS, and only the change icon h0 may be difficult to view. In FIG. 35 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and among the three icons h11, h12 and h0, only the variation icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size is also It is getting bigger. The size may be changed as it is and only the color may be changed, or the color may be the same and increased by the size. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a success animation. In FIG. 35 (1) -6, the navigation character NJ of the red ninja who had moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and "do it" on the right base icon bIr. Display of success message has been added.

  FIG. 35 (1) 7-10 to FIG. (4)-2 are the same as FIG. 33 (1)-2 to FIG. A group notice is given, then it is developed into a super reach, and a deka buttoned presentation is performed during a sword strike, and finally, a combination of a decorative pattern of a big hit "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" Is displayed. The navi character NJ of the ninja who was in the red display mode is returned to the white display mode at the timing of the final display.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 is a view showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reservations of the special drawing is 0, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. In the third column (0) -1 in FIG. 35 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in FIG. The same as with -4, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and all three display icons h11 to h13 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 35 (11) -2, the white ninja navigation character NJ is integrally displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display of “Focus on the eyes” is added. There is. Subsequently, in FIG. 35 (11) -3, the navy character NJ of the integral white ninja moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is less visible than before being covered. . The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear, and the navi characters NJ of the ninja who were in the integral white display mode before being covered with the effect images EIH are three in the same color, though they are the same. It has increased to the body. That is, the same number of navigation characters NJ as white ninjas are displayed as the number of reservations of the special view. The number of effect images EIH is also the same as the number of suspension of the special view.

  In the following FIG. 35 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ throws a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the effect display area 208d. It is going on. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, it is white). In FIG. 35 (11) -7, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the reserved icon display area HIS but also the variation icon display area CIS, and even the variation icon h0 may be difficult to view. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three reserved icons h11 to h13 and the variation icon h0.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a success animation. Also, in FIG. 35 (11) -8, at least a portion of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered by three or more multiple effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters Each of the NJs is less visible than before being covered. Note that each of the navy characters NJ of the three white ninjas may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or all may be covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappear, and the three white ninja navigation characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappear, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS An integral white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and on the right base icon bIr, a display of a success message of "I did it" is added. In addition, among the navy characters NJ of the three white ninjas, only one may be the navy characters NJ of the red ninja. Moreover, the position of the navigation character NJ of the red ninja may be at the right end according to the position of the held icon which has been changed, and by doing this, the icon to be changed in the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ The display mode after the change can be suggested (predicted) by the navigation character NJ.

  Also in this example, in the icon change presentation, the change presentation of the navigation character is also performed, and the icon presentation and the navigation presentation of the navigation character can be considered separately. In this case, the change of the navigation character The effect is as shown in FIG. 35 (11) -3 to FIG. 35 (11) -5, and the icon change effect is as shown in FIG. 35 (11) -6 to FIG. 35 (11) -9. Also, in this example, in FIG. 35 (11) -9, the navigation character NJ of three white ninjas is returned to the navigation character NJ of an integral white ninja, but the navigation characters of three white ninjas are returned. NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS as it is.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35, and another example of effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (11) -10 continued from FIG. 35 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a "(11) -11, the second stop is performed, and" decoration 2 "is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either, and the same figure continues. At (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, are fluctuating. And in FIG. 36 (11) -13, the finalized display of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is also performed.

  The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 36 is a view showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 36 (11) -4 ′ is an example different from FIG. 35 (11) -4, continuing from FIG. 35 (11) -3, and at least a portion of the navigation character NJ of the white ninja moved to the upper left The navigation character is covered with a plurality of effect images EIH and is less visible than before being covered. Note that only part of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH, or all of the navigation character may be covered by the effect image EIH. In (11) -5 'of FIG. 36, the navigation character in which all of the plurality of effect images EII disappear and the display mode is changed to red and the display size is increased is displayed. Here, although a plurality of modes (color and size) change simultaneously, the plurality of modes (color and size) may change at different timings. In addition, the navigation character NJ of the ninja may remain white and only the display size may be greatly changed. Also, the size of the display size corresponds to the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, and the larger the display size, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit.

  In the next FIG. 36 (11) -6 ', the large red navy navigation character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d. Note that the form of the shuriken may be the same as the display form of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red). In (11) -7 in FIG. 36, the three thwarves reach the reserved icon display area HIS of the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are also covered with the white flash effect image EHI, and the three suspension icons h11 to h13 are less visible than before being covered. The three reserve icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or all may be covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the navi character NJ of the ninja (here, red).

  In FIG. 36 (11) -8 ', the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three suspension icons h11 to h13, only the first suspension icon h11 displays the ninja navigation character NJ from the display mode of the default (white). It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Also, in FIG. 36 (11) -8, the large red navy ninja navigation character NJ is covered by a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that only a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be covered with the effect image EIH, or all of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -9 ', many effect images EIH disappear, and the large red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappears, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is the original The white ninja navigation character NJ returned to the size of is displayed, and on the right base icon bIr, the display of the success message "I did it" is added.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36 is a view showing an example of a notice animation using a navigation character. In the leftmost column (11) -1 to (1) -3 in FIG. 36, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2 It is the same as (11) -2 to (11) -2 in the fourth row in (11) -8 to FIG. 35 at the lower end of the third row in FIG. 35 except for the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the default (white) display mode are displayed. Also, in FIG. 36 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, with the message display of “Tell me attention”. .

  In FIG. 36 (1) -3, the navy character NJ of the white ninja moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 36 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display indicating that the possibility of a big hit is high is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left corner when the chance button 136 is pressed and the third eye of the dice comes out. Subsequently, in FIG. 36 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started . In addition, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 36 (1) -5 is added with a message display of “press” prompting the user to press the chance button 136. Then, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 36 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (1) -7, the image of the third eye of the dice is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white ninja navigation character NJ of The message display is added first, and then the message display of "superheat" is added (Fig. 36 (1) -8). In this example, you hit a mini game. In FIG. 36 (11) -9, the image of the third eye of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner is returned on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. . A message display of "superheat" is added to the navi character NJ of the ninja who has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. The animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 36 (1) -4 to FIG. 36 (1) -9 described above is not an animation that changes an icon, but a decorative pattern currently being performed. It is a notice animation about a big hit in a variable display. Here, by displaying the third eye image of the dice, it is predicted that the possibility of a big hit is high, and it is a preview animation by a mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 11), the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Before the Sabohan group notice is started, or at the same time as the Sabohan group notice is started, or after the Sabohan group notice is started, a change character of the navi character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The navi characters NJ of the ninja who were in the white display mode are changed to the red display mode. The change of the navi character may be performed when hit in the mini game or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, which has been the default display mode, also changes, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. Is changing to a combined display mode. The change of the display mode of the variation icon may be performed when the player plays in the mini game, or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. Further, in FIG. 36 (2) -2, on the right base icon bIr, a message display of “icon change” in red is added. Although the change timing of the display mode of the change icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navi character, it may be before the start of the change effect of the navi character, or even during the change effect of the navi character Good.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (2)-2, at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is overlapped by Sabohani. The navigation character may overlap with at least a portion of the sabothani without the sabothani overlapping. Moreover, although the message display of "icon change" overlaps with at least one part of Sabo Hani, conversely, Sabo Hani may overlap with at least one part of the message display of "Icon change". In addition, although the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed does not overlap the Sabo Hani, the Sabo Hani may overlap with at least a part of the variation icon h0, and conversely, the variation icon h0 may be at least a part of Sabo Hani. May overlap. In addition, if a sabothani group advance notice is started, the display of the decoration symbol is reduced and displayed under the 2nd number-on-hold display.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 36 (2) -3, a message display of "premier" of red is added to the navigation character NJ of the red ninja, and it is notified that the premiere effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -1, the super reach (Kenou reach) production is started earlier than the premiere production, and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostile swordsman are confronted is displayed. There is. In addition, a message display of “Ken-Age Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the enemy character swordsman is overlapped with the red ninja navigation character NJ, at least a part of the navigation character NJ may be overlapped with the enemy character swordsman. In addition, although at least a part of the change icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the enemy character swordsman, at least a part of the enemy character swordsman may be overlapped with the fluctuation icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -2, the premiere effect is started from the middle of the kana great reach effect. Here, the premiere effect is an effect in which the variation icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is enlarged and displayed, and an image in which a red letter V is combined with a pattern on which a character rides a motorcycle is displayed large at the center of the screen The image of the main character, Yoshimune, and the enemy of the swordsman match, the image overlaps and the display of the swordsman reach production is more difficult to see than before it is overlapped. With the premiere production, the jackpot is finalized or almost finalized.

  When the premium effect is finished, the image which has been largely displayed at the center of the screen is reduced and displayed again as the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 36 (3) -5). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy player, the sword, is displayed with the word "win", and the middle symbol in the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. “Decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At least a part of the re-displayed variation icon h0 is overlapped with the display of "decor 2" which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -1 continued from FIG. 36 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol which has been reduced and displayed under the second number-of-holds display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . It should be noted that no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, but a message display of “big hit” may be added. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a definite manner. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display. Also, the red ninja navigation character NJ is returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  In FIG. 36 (1) -4 to FIG. 36 (1) -9, while using the white ninja navigation character NJ, not the animation to change the icon but the announcement animation by the mini game is executed. Animations that change icons may also be played mini games that may or may not succeed. That is, if the mini game succeeds, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game fails, the white ninja navigation character NJ is the red ninja navigation character NJ The white ninja navigation character NJ remains the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  Here, to summarize the animation that can be executed, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is an animation that may change the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the advance notice mode (A An animation (B), which is an animation (for example, a preview animation etc.) that has nothing to do with the aspect change and is an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode as a result. can do. In addition, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is completely related to the animation (C animation) in which the change icon and the hold icon must be changed from the default mode to the advance mode (C animation). It can also be classified as an animation (D animation) that is not an animation (for example, an announcement animation etc.) and results in an animation that does not change from the default mode to the announcement mode. Furthermore, changing the display mode of the navigation character can also be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failing animation (Fth animation). In addition, even if it is the same preview animation, the preview animation (G G animation) that does not change the display mode of the navigation character, and the preview animation (H that does not change the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon) Can also be classified as Furthermore, there is also an animation (the first animation) in which the change icon or the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the advance notice mode without using the navigation character. As this first animation, for example, the animation shown in FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e), the animation shown in FIG. 22 (A) to FIG. 22 (E), FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. As in the animation shown in (E), an animation in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes corresponds.

  Here, the Gth animation and the Eth animation may be animations in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or a part (for example, the first part) The included part may be animation performed in the same manner. Also, the Gth animation may be an animation that does not change the change icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the advance notice mode.

  Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. They may be common, or the type, color, shape, or size may be common to displays (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ.

  Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Also, the Cth animation and the Dth animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which a navigation character is used in common, or in addition, background images or some scenes may be common. The type, the color, the shape, and the size may be the same for displays (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character.

  Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Also, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least the navigation character may be displayed in common. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be in common, and the type, color, shape and size of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the navigation character are common. It may be

  Also, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the Dth animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Furthermore, in the example of changing the holding icon in FIGS. 32 to 37, the changing icon may be changed instead of the holding icon, and in the example of changing the changing icon in FIGS. The hold icon may be changed.

  Moreover, although none of the examples shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 is an example of changing the icon etc. of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the icon of the mini item instead of the holding icon or the change icon There may be cases where various icons are changed.

In the above description,
"The game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h11, or a white (default) change icon h0, and an icon of a white meter rising item UpI]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (predictive warning mode) hold icon h11, or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon] ,
The display means displays a display of the first aspect [for example, an aspect of white (default)] (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the display of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ],
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game],
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to The icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG.
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 33 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, Icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6,
The certain display is a display selected from a plurality of types of displays by the player [eg, FIG. 34 (0) -5 to FIG. (0) -8].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the player by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon into the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first animation. It is animation which changes an icon into the second icon by all means.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

Also,
"The first aspect is a default aspect,
The first aspect is an aspect that is most likely to be displayed in the certain display than in the other aspects including the second aspect,
When the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [eg, FIG. 34 (0) -6 to FIG. (0) -8],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The certain display is a display that may be selectable even during a period in which decorative symbol variation display is performed [eg, FIG. 34 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -3],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, although it can always select in a period before becoming a reach state after decoration symbol variation display is started, it may be impossible to select in a period after becoming a reach state.

  Further, the certain display may be a display which can be selected even during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time over the entire period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be an always selectable display.

  The certain display may be a display which is always selected during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

Also,
“The certain display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied,
The certain condition is a condition such as [During the display of the demonstration display [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -2],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a plurality of conditions may be prepared as the certain condition. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, the condition that a certain big hit game is in progress (for example, while in the big hit with big change with probability change, while in the big hit with no big change, in round, during an interval between rounds) The condition may be that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has not reached the big hit game but has reached a certain number It may be the condition that.

  Also, only one condition may be prepared as the certain condition. One of the conditions may be the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, or the condition that the big hit game is in progress, or the cumulative number of times the decorative symbol variation display has been executed. It may be a condition that the number of times has been reached, or a condition that the number of times of execution of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number without performing a big hit game.

  Further, the demonstration display is a display that is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where there is no suspension of the special drawing, and the symbol whose stop is displayed. There is a video demo display in which an animation including a demo display and a game console title is displayed. In addition, a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the animation demonstration display.

  Note that the certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description,
"The game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h11, or a white (default) change icon h0, and an icon of a white meter rising item UpI]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (predictive warning mode) hold icon h11, or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon] ,
The display means displays a display of the first aspect [for example, an aspect of white (default)] (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] It is a means that can display animation,
The display means is a third animation for changing the first display to the second display [eg, character change animation shown in FIG. 33 (11) -4 to FIG. 11) -11 to (11) -12, the character change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -4 to FIG. 35 (11) -5, and FIG. 36 (11) -4 'to FIG. (11) is a means capable of displaying the character change animation shown in -5 ',
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game],
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to The icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG.
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 33 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, Icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6, icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG. 35 (11) -9, FIG. ~ Icon change animation shown in the figure (11)-9 '],
The second animation may be an animation that may start to be displayed after the display of the third animation is started [eg, icons shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -6 Change animation],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game console, it is possible to draw attention to the certain display.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon into the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first animation. It is animation which changes an icon into the second icon by all means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning besides the case of changing from the first display according to the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (display start) in the second mode.

  Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

  In addition, the second animation may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the third animation is displayed on a second display different from the second display of the second animation which has been started earlier. The first display may be changed.

  Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed. The first display may be started simultaneously with the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. It may be.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. Furthermore, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

Also,
“The third animation is a decoration symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [For example, the decoration symbol variation display shown in FIG. 33 (11) -1 to the same diagram (11) -13, FIG. (11) In the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display shown in (11) -1 to FIG. 36 (11) -13, and in FIG. 36 (11) -4 ′ to FIG. 36 (11) -9 ′ The display may start,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the third animation may be always started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Also,
“The third animation is different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. The display may be started in the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 34 (11) -9 to FIG. 34 (11) -16],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the display of the third animation may be started in the decorative symbol variation display prior to the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started. The scene to be changed to the second display and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative symbol variation display Good.

  The display of the third animation may be always started in the decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Also,
"The third animation is an animation in which a mini game with success or failure is performed, the mini game succeeds, and the first display changes to the second display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a fourth animation;
The fourth animation is an animation in which the mini game is played, the mini game fails, and the first display does not change to the second display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying the fourth animation without fail.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying the fifth animation,
The fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display,
The fifth animation is an animation relating to a preliminary announcement [eg, the animation shown in FIG. 36 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -9],
The fifth animation and the third animation are animations in which a certain item [eg, a point where the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used] is common.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon into the second icon.

  In addition, as an example of “some matters”, appearing characters, background images, some scenes, displays having the same color, shape and size, and the like can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which parts including the first part are performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the "notice" referred to herein may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, even if the jackpot is not directly connected to the jackpot, it may be a notice (for example, a timer announcement or the like) that the effect to be indirectly connected to the jackpot is executed. As "representation" here, SP reach presentation with high reliability of a big hit may be sufficient. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit.

  The display means may be means for displaying the fifth animation without fail.

In the above description,
"The game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h11, or a white (default) change icon h0, and an icon of a white meter rising item UpI]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (predictive warning mode) hold icon h11, or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon] ,
The display means displays a display of the first aspect [for example, an aspect of white (default)] (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a second display using the certain display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] It is a means that can display animation,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game],
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to The icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG.
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 33 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, Icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display,
The sixth animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon,
The sixth animation is an animation relating to a preview [eg, the animation shown in FIG. 36 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -9],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but may be an animation in which the first display does not change to the second display.

  Also, the "notice" referred to herein may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, even if the jackpot is not directly connected to the jackpot, it may be a notice (for example, a timer announcement or the like) that the effect to be indirectly connected to the jackpot is executed. As "representation" here, SP reach presentation with high reliability of a big hit may be sufficient. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a notice regarding a big hit.

  In addition, the sixth animation may be an animation about a tutorial, not an animation about an advance notice. For example, the animation may be animation that describes effects, or animation that describes operation methods (e.g., how to hit left or right).

  Also, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain matters are in common. That is, they are common in that at least the "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “first display”. May be in common.

  Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for sure to display a sixth animation using the first display.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display,
The seventh animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon,
The seventh animation is an animation about a notice,
The seventh animation is an animation that is easier to be displayed than the sixth animation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least the "second display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the “second display”. May be in common.

  Furthermore, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Also, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, a character or icon) displayed separately from the "a certain display". May be common.

  Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the first animation and the second animation may be animation in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be animation performed in a different manner in the middle.

  Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image or part of the scene may be common, or the type, color, shape or size of the display (for example, a character or icon) displayed separately from the "a certain display". May be common.

  Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations that are partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner and may be performed in a different manner in the middle.

  The display means may be means for displaying a seventh animation using the second display without fail.

In the above description,
"The game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h11, or a white (default) change icon h0, and an icon of a white meter rising item UpI]. And
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (predictive warning mode) hold icon h11, or a red variation icon h0, and further, a red meter up item UpIr icon] ,
The display means displays a display of the first aspect [for example, an aspect of white (default)] (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [for example, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ]. It is a means that can display the first animation used,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the display of the second aspect [for example, a red aspect] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ],
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, a period during stop display, during a demonstration or during a big hit game],
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 '' to The icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG.
The second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, icon change animation shown in FIG. 33 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -9, Icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 to FIG. 35 (1) -6,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display,
The eighth animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon is changed to the second icon [eg, the animation shown in FIG. 22 (a) to FIG. 22 (e), FIG. 22 (A) An animation shown in FIG. 22E or an animation shown in FIG. 22A to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, although the eighth animation is an animation in which the first icon displayed is always changed to the second icon, the first icon in which the eighth animation is displayed May be an animation with or without changing the icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for displaying a plurality of types of icons without fail. The display means may be means for displaying the first animation without fail, or may be means for displaying the second animation without exception. The first display may be a display that is always displayed in a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be means for sure to display an eighth animation not using the certain display.

Also,
"One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon,
One or more icons may be displayed as the second icon,
The second icon is an icon with a higher degree of reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of displayed first icons into the second icons, and the second animation is displayed In some cases, it is an animation in which a plurality of the first icons are changed to the second icons.

  One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon, and one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of icons is a third icon [for example, blue (predictive preview mode) hold icon h11, blue change icon h0, and icon of blue meter rising item UpIb] Yes,
One or more icons may be displayed as the third icon,
The third icon is an icon with a higher degree of reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon,
The second icon is an icon with a higher degree of reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the third icon,
The first animation may change the displayed first icon to the third icon [eg, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11)-6 'to FIG. Icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation in which the displayed first icon is changed to the third icon.

Also,
"The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a first unchanged animation using the first display,
The first invariable animation is an animation in which the first display is displayed but fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon [eg, FIG. Icon change failure animation shown in FIG. 11) to FIG. 11).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is An animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be means for displaying the first invariable animation using the first display without fail.

Also,
[The first unchangeable animation is halfway to the middle [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -5] is the same animation as the first animation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second unchanged animation using the second display, and the second unchanged animation displays the second display, The animation may fail to change the displayed first icon into the second icon. Still further, the second unchanged animation may be the same animation as the second animation halfway through.

  Or, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Moreover, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed. Even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be

Also, the failed animation may be an animation in which an effect display is displayed, and may be an animation in which the display mode has not changed although the effect display is displayed. That is, animations in which the first icon does not change to the second icon without displaying the effect display may be excluded. However, the failing animation may include an animation in which the first icon does not change to the second icon without displaying the effect display.
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds.
The first icon is a first hold icon [eg, a white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1 etc.],
The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon h1 in red (pre-reading advance notice mode) shown in FIG. 33 (11) -8 and the like]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means by which a change icon may be displayed,
The fluctuation icon is an icon relating to the display of the decorative symbol fluctuation being executed,
The first icon is a first change icon [for example, a white (default) change icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2 etc.,
The second icon is a second change icon [for example, a red change icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -5 and the like],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is finally a big hit than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation The symbol form may be easily displayed in certain cases,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the second animation is final rather than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed according to the first animation. The big hit design feature may be easy to be determined and displayed.

Also,
“The first display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 32 (0) -1 to FIG. (4) -2]. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays, or the variable display of the predetermined number of decorative symbols. Or even a display that may disappear temporarily.

  The second display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. In addition, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays, or the predetermined number of decorative symbol variation displays Even if it is between, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

  In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol variation display, or between the predetermined number of variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. Even, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

  In addition, the said 1st display may be a display always displayed straddling multiple continuous decorative symbol fluctuation display.

Also,
"For a certain period of time, the first display may be displayed,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0 [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -1, FIG. (0)-8].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period may be a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of reservations is 0. Good.

  Note that the first display may be always displayed in the certain period.

Also,
“The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which one or more of color, pattern, size, and shape are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Therefore, the color, the pattern, the size, and the shape may be different only by one, or all may be different, or the combination of two or three may be different. It is also good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, an operation means is provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display related to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the first display may be changed to the second display.

  In addition, before the display of the first animation is started, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state of being easily changed.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon of a display mode that suggests that it may change. The icon of may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be a first animation, a second animation, or any other animation.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon of a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change, The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be a first animation, a second animation, or any other animation.

  In addition, although the said display means is a means which can display the 2nd non-change animation using the said 2nd display, although the said 2nd display is displayed, the said 2nd non-change animation is a display. The animation may fail to change the first icon being displayed to the second icon.

  Here, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Moreover, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed. Even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. May be

  In addition, the second invariable animation may be the same animation as the second animation in the middle.

  Furthermore, the other specific example of the presentation performed in the pachinko machine 100 by this embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 38 to 57 are basically used only in the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 38 to 57, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in 38 to 57 have priority.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described using FIG. 38 (1). At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 and the common figure reservation number aa5 , The fourth pattern aa6 of the common figure is displayed. The special figure 1 reserve number aa1 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 1 by a number, the special figure 2 reserve number aa3 is a display representing the reserve number of the special figure 2 by a number, and the common drawing reserve number aa5 is a common drawing Is a display representing the number of reservations of In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided. The right side of the variation icon display area c is the hold icon display area, and in the example shown in FIG. 38A, the special view 1 hold icon a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special view 2 hold icon b1, b2, b3. Are displayed side by side so that they alternate in this order from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism is provided on the game board in which gaming balls are alternately winning at the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening. . In the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided. In the display area d, a tutorial display, a message display and the like are displayed, and in the case where there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “under preparation” is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 38 (1) to (38). 38 (1) to (38) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 38 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "department 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-pattern aspect, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 38 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 displayed in the reserve icon display area becomes the variation icon c1 and moves to the variation icon display area c The special view 1 reserve icon a2 to a4 and the special view 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 38 (3) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 38 (4) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 38 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation advance notice is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice may be started or may not be started at a predetermined probability.

  FIG. 38 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a character image of a brow (hereinafter, referred to as "browsing") g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 38 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (9) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to an eyebrow's character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyebrow) g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

  FIG. 38 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h 1 including the character image of “殿” is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (14) shows the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 38 (16) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of the temple g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (16), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display.

  FIG. 38 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 38 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 38 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 38 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 38 (24) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right.

  FIG. 38 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 38 (28) shows a state where the display of the character name h2 including the character image of "爺" is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 38 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 38 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 38 (33) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (33), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (34), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (35), a character string image of “Having weather for lunch” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed.

  FIG. 38 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation advance notice display is ended.

  FIG. 38 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c after the conversation advance notice display is ended. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter. In addition, reach presentation may not be started after the end of conversation advance notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has the first display (the first serif notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)) and the second display (the second display shown in FIG. 38 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes the display g1 displayed in FIG. 38 (19), the balloon display i1, the speech display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the bag g2, the balloon display i2, the speech display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 38 (36). A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in the present example, the first display is displayed after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (8).爺 g2 may be displayed prior to the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including the g 2 is displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 39 (1) to (38). 39 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (1) to 39 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 39 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 39 (7) to 39 (10) show a state where the hall g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 39 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the toe g1 is displayed from the beginning before the serif display of the toe is displayed in FIG. 39 (19), and other characters such as the toe g2 are not displayed. Thus, 爺 g2 may not be displayed prior to the display of the first display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 40 (1) to (38). 40 (1) to 40 (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 40 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 40 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation advance notice is continued, a princess character image g3 (hereinafter referred to as "hime") is displayed. The princess g3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 40 (24) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 40 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 40 (26) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right.爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  The states shown in FIGS. 40 (27)-(38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (27)-(38), so the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 41 (1) to (38). 41 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to 41 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 41 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 41 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 41 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 41 (9) shows a state where the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 41 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by giving a preliminary notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). In some cases, it is possible to show the player's intention and to improve the player's interest.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 42 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 42 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (27) shows a state in which the princess g3 has stopped.

  FIG. 42 (28) shows a state where display of the character name h3 including the character image of "Hime" is started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 42 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (31) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 42 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 42 (33) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 42 (33), the text image of "afternoon" is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (34) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In (42) of FIG. 42, a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (35) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (35), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 42 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), the description will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is the first display (the first serif notice display shown in FIG. 42 (19)) and the second display (the second display (FIG. 42 (36)). The notice can be displayed. The first display includes a hall g1 displayed in FIG. 42 (19), a balloon display i1, a speech display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3 displayed in FIG. 42 (36), the balloon display i3, the speech display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3. A first conversation notice is displayed on the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are preliminary display of the change. Further, in this example, after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIG. 42 (6) to (8), 爺 g2 is displayed in FIG. 42 (23) to (25), but 爺 g2 is displayed in FIG. It is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by giving a preliminary notice that displays the 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversational notice display, it is possible to make the character different when the conversational advance display is displayed, and poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 43 (1) to (38). 43 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (1) to 43 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 43 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 43 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 43 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 43 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to a temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 43 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during movement animation (during movement display) of the character, and movement display of three character images is displayed. Note that, in the present example, the message is displayed in the order of 爺 g2, the princess g3, and the temple g1, but the message may be displayed in the order of the princess g3, 爺 g2, and the temple g1. In addition, four or more character images may be displayed during movement display of the character image.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 44 (1) to (38). 44 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 44 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 44 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 44 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the temple g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), three characters go round in the order of character g1, g2, g3, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. Is displayed. Note that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make a round or a half round while displaying the movement animation of the character. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 44 (23) to (27), a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 45 (1) to (38). 44 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 45 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, a callee g1 is displayed. The hall g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (7) shows a state in which the temple g1 changes to 爺 g2 while the temple g1 moves to the left.爺 g2 is moving to the left. It is to be noted that the display g1 may be changed to display g2 when the entire display g1 shown in FIG. 45 (6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 45 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 45 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the eyebrow g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 45 (10) shows a state where the toe g1 is stopped after the toe g2 changes to the toe g1 while the toe g2 is moving to the left. Note that it may be changed to g1 after or when g2 stops.

  The states shown in FIGS. 45 (11)-(38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11)-(38), so the description thereof is omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to 45 (10), three characters are looped in the order of character g1, g2, g2, g3, and g1 during the movement animation display of the character. It will be displayed as The character may change in the reverse direction such as princess g 3, 爺 g 2, and hall g 1 after changing in the order of hall g 1, 爺 g 2, and princess g 3. In addition, during the movement animation display of the character, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the movement animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 45 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 46 (1) to (38). FIGS. 46 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed first. The eyebrow g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 46 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 46 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the temple g1 changes is displayed while the temple g1 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (10) shows a state in which the toe g1 has stopped after the expression of the toe g1 has changed. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the hall g1 changes after the hall g1 stops or simultaneously with the stop. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the speech g1 displayed in the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 46 (19) is longer than the display period of the g2. Thus, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation advance notice may be the longest.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 46 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (24) shows a state where an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 is moving to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 46 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 is moving to the right. Thus, an animation may be displayed in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 46 (26) shows a state where an animation in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes is displayed while the eyelid g2 is moving to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (27) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 has stopped. Note that an animation may be displayed in which the expression of the eyelid g2 changes after or when the eyelid g2 stops.

  The states shown in (28) to (38) in FIG. 46 are the same as the states shown in (38) to (38) in FIG. As in the present example, a display may be displayed in which the mode (for example, expression) of the character changes while the movement animation of the character is displayed.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 47 (1) to (40). FIGS. 47 (1) to (40) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The state shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 41 (36), so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 47 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 47 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 47 (4) shows a state in which the decoration symbol of the pseudo-series is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decoration symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo ream is performed. The pseudo ream is an effect of performing pseudo fluctuation as if variable display of a decorative symbol has been performed a plurality of times during one special figure fluctuation game, and is a notice effect of the fluctuation. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second of the variable display of the decoration symbol (the second time of pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 47 (5) shows a state in which the second run of the pseudo run is started. In addition, the movable body 700 moves upward and stops. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo run, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d, and it is informed that the second run of the pseudo run is being performed.

  FIG. 47 (6) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 47 (7) shows the state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 47 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is started to be displayed. The first conversation advance notice display is the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 47 (1). Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation announcement may be started, or the second conversation announcement may not be started at a predetermined probability. May be

  FIG. 47 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation announcement display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 47 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (13) shows a state in which the princess g3 has stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 47 (9)-(13) are shown in FIGS. 38 (6)-(10), 40 (6)-(10), 41 (6)-(10), FIG. 42 (6) to (10), FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), 44 (6) to (10), 45 (6) to (10), and 46 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h3 is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (16) shows the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 47 (19) shows a state in which the speech display which is a speech (line) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (19), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (20) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), the character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (21) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (22) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "mark of rain" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  FIG. 47 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed.

  FIG. 47 (24) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 47 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 47 (26) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 47 (27) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (28) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (29) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (30) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 47 (31) shows a state where display of the character name h2 including the character image of "爺" has been started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 47 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (33) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 47 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the eyelid g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the eye g2.

  FIG. 47 (36) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (36), the character image of "o" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (37) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (37), the character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (38) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (38), a character string image of "Half weather for lunch" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (39) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 is changing from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 is changing from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher for blue than for white. As described above, in the second conversation advance notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (40) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation advance notice display is ended. Although illustration of the following is omitted, in the present example, reach effect with “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation announcement display (first conversation announcement display) shown in FIG. 47 (1) is displayed, the second conversation announcement display (second message shown in FIG. 47 (39) is displayed. Conversation notice is displayed. In this manner, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure change game. Note that the jackpot reliability may be set to be higher as the number of times of conversation advance notice display is larger.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 48 (16) to 48 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h1. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (19) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (32), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 48 (33) to (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the speech display is displayed. The speech display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left in the balloon display h2. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (36) shows a state in which the speech display has stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 48 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the moving animation of the speech display is displayed. Thus, the moving animation of the speech display may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 (1) to 49 (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 49 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to 49 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 49 (7) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (8) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the left.

  FIG. 49 (9) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is changed to an eyebrow's character image (hereinafter referred to as an eyebrow) g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 49 (6) to 49 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2.

  FIG. 49 (11) shows a state where display of a character name display (hereinafter referred to as "character name display") h1 including a character image of "ten" is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (14) shows the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the hall g1 and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the hall g1.

  FIG. 49 (16) shows a state in which the speech display as the speech (line) of the display g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The word display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 49 (16), the character image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (17) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (18) shows a state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (18), a character string image of “morning weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (19) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as speech display. In this example, compared with FIG. 38 (19), a hallmark g 1, a character name display h 1, a balloon display h 1, and a serif display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 49 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed overlapping with a part (a part of the first display) of the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 49 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 49 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 49 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 49 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 49 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 49 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 49 (27) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is stopped and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1 and the speech display are stopped.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 49 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display, an animation in which the first display such as 殿 j1 moves is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (38), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 50 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation in which the character g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 50 (24) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with part of the display g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 50 (25) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 50 (26) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right, and the head g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display stop.

  FIG. 50 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped.

  In the states shown in (28) to (32) in FIG. 50, an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed as in the states shown in (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1 and the speech display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping with the first display such as jj1.

  FIGS. 50 (32) to 50 (35) show the state in which the speech display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 38 (32) to 38 (35).

  FIG. 50 (36) shows a state in which the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, as a speech display, a character image of "noon weather" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed. In this example, the speech display in the balloon display h2 and the speech display in the balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech display in the balloon display h1 and the speech display in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38), the description thereof is omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 of the conversation advance display is displayed overlapping the first display such as jj1.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 51 (1) to (38). 51 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 51 (6) to 51 (10) show a state in which the character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10). In this example, the display sizes of the g2 and g1 are displayed in larger sizes than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIGS. 51 (11) to 51 (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 51 (20) shows a state where a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation effective period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 51 (21) shows a state where the operation effective period has been started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation advance notice is continuously started. Note that if the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation effective period, the conversation advance notice may be displayed continuously, or even if the conversation advance notice is ended without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 51 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, simultaneously with the appearance of the eyebrow g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the display g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 51 (24) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right and the display size of the character display h1 and the character name display h1, the balloon display h1 and the speech display is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (25) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyelid g2 moves to the right, and the display size of the speech display is reduced, as well as the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 51 (26) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right and the display size of the speech display is reduced, as well as the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 51 (27) shows a state in which the animation in which the display size of the display g1 is stopped, the display size of the character display h1 and the speech display is reduced is stopped. The display sizes of the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (36).

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 51 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), the description will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the message g1 and the like in the conversation advance notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the message g2 and the like starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 51 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2, and in this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display The display size may be overlapped with part of h2.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (38). 52 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 52 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 52 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 52 (2) shows a state in which the timer advance notice display j has been started. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer announcement display j performs countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, predetermined effects (for example, operation of the movable body and predetermined announcement display) are performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of "attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

  FIGS. 52 (3) and 52 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 49 (3) and 49 (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

  FIG. 52 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started as in FIG. 49 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIG. 52 (6) to (19), the conversation advance notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 49 (6) to (19), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (19), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the characters g1 and g2 and the character name display h1, the balloon display i1 and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 52 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

  FIGS. 52 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

  FIG. 52 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued similarly to FIG. 49 (23). Further, in FIG. 49 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer advance display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIG. 52 (24) to (36), the conversation advance notice display is displayed as in FIG. 49 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown indication of the timer advance notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIG. 52 (24) to (36), the timer advance notice display j is displayed overlapping the character of 爺 g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 52 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 52 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. As described above, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer advance notice display j, other indications may be displayed (eg, a ball removal error indication, a door open error indication, another notice indication, a change effect indication of the hold icon) or the like. In addition, as shown in the timer advance notice display j, the length of the display period of the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (10) is as shown in FIG. 52 (19) to (36). The display h 1, the balloon display i 1, and the display period of the conversation notice display including the speech notice display are shorter than the display period.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 53 (1) to (38). FIGS. 53 (1) to (38) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 52 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIG. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 53 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 53 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the start of the display of the conversation advance notice display. The movable body k may reciprocate vertically and horizontally in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 between the start of the symbol variation display and the start of the reach effect.

  FIGS. 53 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Further, in FIGS. 52 (3) and 52 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

  FIG. 53 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  In FIGS. 53 (6)-(19), the conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 49 (6)-(19), and in this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character names At least a part of the h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible from the player.

  FIGS. 53 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 53 (20) and 53 (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

  FIG. 53 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (22).

  FIG. 53 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). In FIGS. 53 (24)-(36), the conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 49 (24)-(36), and in this example, the movable body k displays characters g1 and g2 and character names At least a part of h1 and h2, the balloon display i1 and i2, and the speech display become invisible to the player.

  FIG. 53 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 54 (1) to (38). 54 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In FIG. 54 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation advance notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation advance notice display in this example is omitted.

  FIG. 54 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 54 (2) shows a state in which the design indication m is displayed by the light guide plate disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, a light guide plate is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by light emission of the light guide plate. The pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to (37). For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (36), the pattern display m is displayed overlapping with the first display such as the g1 and the like and the second display such as the g2 and the like.

  FIG. 54 (38) shows a state in which reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation advance notice display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 55 (1) to (38). 55 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since FIGS. 55 (1) to 55 (5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the frame of the square are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 55 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding the eyelid g2 is displayed in white. Note that the conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 except that the character is displayed within a square frame.

  FIG. 55 (7) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (8) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (9) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is changed to the eyebrow g1 while the eyebrow g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (10) shows a state in which the lamp g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 56 (6) to 56 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including a person g1 and a person g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue and white. In addition, the order of the change of this color can be set arbitrarily. Note that this color change is performed during the character movement animation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (11) to (21), the hall g1 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the point that the inside of the frame is white, the state shown in FIG. The description is omitted because it is the same as the state shown in).

  FIG. 55 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 55 (23) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the present example, 爺 g2 is displayed when the conversation advance notice is continued. The eyebrow g2 appears from the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 55 (24) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (25) shows a state in which the eyebrow g2 moves to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (26) shows a state where the eyebrow g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (27) shows a state where the eyelid g2 has stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding 表示 g2 is displayed in blue.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (28) to (36), the eyelid g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and except for the point that the inside of the frame is blue, FIG. Since it is the same as the state shown to), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 55 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation advance notice is displayed in a frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. A big hit reliability is set by the color in the said frame.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a20). 56 (a1) to (a20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 56 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 56 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (a6), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h1 move to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 56 (a7) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. In addition, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a8) shows a state where the eyelid g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a9) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is changed to the eyelid g1 while the eyelid g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 or the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  56 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (a12), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h2 move to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a15) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 56 (a16) shows a state in which the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a17) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 56 (a18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation advance notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  56 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and 38 (38). As in this example, during the movement animation of the character, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a speech display from the beginning of the display.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 56 (b1) to 56 (b20). 56 (b1) to (b20) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 56 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 56 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (b6), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h1 move to the left. The character name display differs from the character in that the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b6), the left square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The left square image is white, and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b7) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b7), a square image on the left, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the right are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b 8) shows a state in which the eyelid g 2, the character name display h 1 and the balloon display i 1 are moved to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 56 (b9) shows a state where the eyelid g2 is changed to the eyelid g1 while the eyelid g2 is moving to the left. Hall g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 56 (b10) shows a state in which the hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 have stopped. In addition, the frame g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame in the frame. Thus, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue and green in descending order of the jackpot reliability.

  56 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation advance notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is started simultaneously. In FIG. 56 (b12), the eyebrow g2 and the character name display h2 move to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Also, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue and green respectively. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b14), the square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The right square image is green and the middle square image is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b15) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b7), a square image on the right, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left are displayed. The right square image is white, the middle square image is green, and the left square image is blue. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b16) shows a state where the eyelid g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The inside of the balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b16), the right square image is blue, the middle square image is white, and the left square image is green. These square images change in display color while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b17) shows a state in which the eyelid g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right. At the time point shown in FIG. 56 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

  FIG. 56 (b18) shows a state in which the bag g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame in the frame. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. The display colors are white, blue and green in the descending order of the big hit reliability.

  56 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are candidate displays of display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after stopping. As in this example, candidates for display colors in a frame enclosed by the character after being stopped may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 57 (a1) to 57 (a5). 57 (a1) to (a5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (a1) to 57 (a5) show movement animations of characters shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10) and the like.

  FIG. 57 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started.爺 g2 appeared and moved to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. During the movement of 2 g2 to the left, the mark g1 is displayed. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping. In addition, for example, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. A part of オ ー バ ー g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1. In addition, for example, in the case of 表示 g2, the transmittance is displayed at 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, the character may increase during the character movement animation. In this example, the characters are increased by one but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Also, one character may be displayed overlapping the entire other character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 57 (b1) to 57 (b5). 57 (b1) to 57 (b5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (b1)-(b5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 38 (6)-(10) and the like.

  FIG. 57 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The mark g1 is displayed on the left of the mark g2, and a part of the mark g2 is displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 57 (b2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 57 (b3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A portion of the hall g1 is displayed overlapping the eye g2.

  FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 are moving to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed overlapping to the g1.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternately change between one character and another character.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 57 (c1) to 57 (c5). FIGS. 57 (c1) to 57 (c5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (c1) to 57 (c5) show character movement animations shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to 38 (10) and the like.

  FIG. 57 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (c2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

  FIG. 57 (c3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (c4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the movement animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to (d1) to (d5) in FIG. 57D (d1) to (d5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (d1) to 57 (d5) show the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10) and the like.

  FIG. 57 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Hall g1 and 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (d2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess G4 is displayed in place of Princess G1 and ninja g5 is displayed in place of Princess g3. The characters may be entirely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 57 (d3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

  FIG. 57 (d4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has ended. Little Princess g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, and another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, and then the characters are sequentially erased, and the last One character may remain in the. Also, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

  FIG. 57 (e) shows a table used when determining a conversation advance notice to be executed in the effect control process. For example, the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 38 is “conversation notice 1”, and the speech advance notice shown in FIG. 39 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute any conversation notice from among a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of conversational announcements such as “conversational announcement 1” and “conversational announcement 2”. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display the speech notice display during the conversation notice display of the present example, and can also display the speech notice display of the present example and the speech notice display in combination.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the table for determining a conversation effect of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. After displaying any one of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the first balloon display, it is possible to display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the second balloon display. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is selected from among one of the conversation announcements when one of a plurality of effects omitted from illustration in “***” of the table for determining a conversation effect of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. After displaying a balloon display obtained by combining a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays in FIGS. 38 to 57 as a first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 38 to 57 as a second balloon display It is possible to display a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of the balloon display are combined. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, 3 or more as a conversation notice of 1 when one of a plurality of effects omitted in the illustration of "***" in the table for determining the conversation effect of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. The balloon display of can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of the plural effects which are not illustrated in the “***” of the conversation production determination table in Figure 57 (e) is selected, the pattern fluctuation display of 1 time It is possible to display two or more conversation announcements in a period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when the balloon display is being displayed or the conversation announcement is being performed, the display condition is satisfied when the execution condition of the other effect display or the error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the movable body rendering operation is satisfied. And the operation can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a speech warning display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute an advance notice effect during preparation and a timer advance notice effect. For example, during the preparation of the notice of the conversation notice or within the same symbol variation display as the notice of the conversation notice, the notice effect during preparation or the timer notice effect may be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the meter increase effect and the item application effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during display of the conversation advance notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as in the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k), the display size is different from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (e) etc. (small display size, large display size) The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to (f), in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the moving distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the moving distance of the balloon display f2. And may display a conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is ended at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed overlapping the other display so as to display the conversation notice The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation advance notice in the form of effect display shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to (f), at the start of display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed, and FIGS. As shown in (t), when the balloon display f1 and f2 end display, the balloon display starts and ends so that the balloon animation f1 and f2 move toward the right. The direction of movement of the balloon display may be different at the time of. The pachinko machine 100 may change the moving direction at the time of the display start and the display end of at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a pseudo-series effect. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed during display of the conversation advance notice display, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation advance notice display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.
(B1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 (36)),
The first display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is "sunny mark"),
The first display is a display including a first character (for example, g1).
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the weather for lunch is "cloud mark"),
The second display is a display including a second character (eg, 爺 g2),
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The second character may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by anticipating that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. In some cases, the player's interest can be improved.
(B2)
The gaming machine described in B1 above,
A third character (eg, princess g3) may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, by giving a preliminary notice of displaying a character not appearing on the first display, it is possible to make the character when the first display is displayed different and to poke the player's will In some cases, it is possible to improve the player's interest.
(B3)
The gaming machine described in B2 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 ()),
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is "rain mark"),
The third display is a display including the third character (eg, princess g3),
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 47 (9)).
A game stand characterized by
By making the third character appear not in the second display but in the third display, it is possible to catch the player's mind, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
(B4)
The gaming machine described in B3 above,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first conversation announcement display (for example, conversation announcement shown in FIG. 47 (1)),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second conversation announcement display (for example, conversation announcement shown in FIG. 47 (39)),
The first conversational notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation advance notice display is a display including the second display,
The second conversation advance notice display is a display including the third display.
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.
(B5)
The gaming machine described in B4 above,
The second conversation notice may be displayed after the first conversation notice is displayed during a period in which a certain symbol variation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, by causing the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display to appear in the second conversation notice display, it is possible to catch the player's will, and the player's interest is displayed. May be able to improve.
(B6)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B5, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation),
The first animation display is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player is expected to expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There is a possibility.
(B7)
The gaming machine described in B6 above,
The first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, it may be possible for the player to be entertained by reasoning about which character the first display is displayed.
(B8)
The gaming machine according to B6 or B7 above,
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, when the first display is displayed by the second character, it may be possible to make the player think so as to be entertained.
(B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B6 to B8, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (e.g., a character movement animation),
The second animation display is displayed prior to the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of a character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The second animation display is a display not including the first character.
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming stand having the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to cause the character appearing in the first display to appear and the player can play the game without waking up.
(B10)
The gaming machine described in B9 above,
The number of characters in the second animation display is less than the number of characters in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's expectation by the player by reducing the character candidates in the second display.
(B11)
The gaming machine according to B9 or B10 above,
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first displayed character in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by
By reducing the character candidates in the second display, it may be possible to increase the accuracy of the player's expectation of the character and entertain the player.
(B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B9 to B11, wherein
The display period of the first animation display is shorter than the display period of the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B12, wherein
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white),
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue),
The reliability in the first color is a reliability different from the reliability in the second color,
The display including the second color may be displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, by announcing the reliability of the second display, it is possible to expect the reliability when the second display is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are times when you can.
(B14)
The gaming machine described in B13 above,
The confidence in the second color is greater than the confidence in the first color,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, it may be possible to make the player expect that the second display is displayed by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later.
(B15)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B14, wherein
The first line is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first dialog. There is a possibility.
(B16)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B15, wherein
The first display is a display including a first name (e.g., "ten"),
The first name is the name of the first character,
The first name is displayed prior to the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player is expected to expect the first character to appear by the first name. There is a possibility.
(B17)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B16, wherein
Equipped with operation means (eg, chance button 136) operable by the player;
The second display is displayed when the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(B18)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B17, wherein
The second display is displayed after the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(B19)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B18, wherein
A movable body (e.g., a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B19, wherein
A display may overlap with the display of at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(B21)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(B22)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above B1 to B20, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000, 2000),
A game stand characterized by

  The first display may be overlapped with another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second display by largely overlapping the first display during the second animation, and to ensure the relevance to the first display while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.

  The area in which the first line is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area in which the first line is overlapped by the second display. In this case, it is possible to make the second animation pay attention to the second dialogue by largely overlapping the first dialogue during the second animation, and secure the relevance to the first dialogue while the second display is displayed. There are times when you can.

  There may be cases where the lines of the speech advance notice do not match.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and a character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and the order may be circled in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially started to be displayed in the first animation, and each character may perform animation in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and a character may change in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be simultaneously displayed in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or more in the first animation.

  After the second display is displayed, transition to reach effect corresponding to the second character may be made.

  A conversation notice display is performed for each of the pseudo variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo variation display, and a second conversation in the second pseudo variation display after the first pseudo variation display. An advance notice may be displayed.

  The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice may overlap the movable, and a part of the second conversation notice may overlap the movable.

  A portion of the first conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement and a portion of the second conversation announcement may overlap the timer announcement.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 58 to 82. FIG. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 to 82 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 58 to 82, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in the other drawings, The codes shown in 58 to 82 have priority.

<Type of item>
Next, types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a generic term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the item according to the present embodiment is largely divided into two types: custom item and non-custom item. It can be different. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. The non-custom item is an item that can not be modified (customized) in the display, voice, function, various probabilities, and the like of the pachinko machine 100, but the player is given a predetermined profit.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give the item to the player when an item giving condition set for each item is satisfied. When the custom item is given, the player performs the setting operation of the given custom item using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 67 (q) etc.) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. , Voice, functions, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to their own preferences. Also, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain predetermined benefits (eg, benefits for the player such as a notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58, for example, the item grant condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the user's preference. In addition, when the item grant condition of item D (hold pedestal custom 1), item E (hold pedestal custom 2) or item F (hold pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, a pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) at 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed below the hold icon) according to the user's preference.

  In addition, when the item giving condition of “heat” is satisfied and the item is given, the player is notified by the notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)”. Can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a hit or a high possibility of a hit). In addition, when the item grant condition of "superheat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is "super heat (very high expectation)" is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information such as the winning result of the special feature change game is a big hit, or that the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, the meter increase presentation and the item assignment presentation will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges A meter having a scale) is displayed, and one sphere is inserted into the entrance hole 227 for increasing the meter, and the gauge of the meter is turned off (decreased) one by one each time it enters (details will be described later).

    By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine whether the number of balls entering the meter increase entrance 227 or the gauge of the meter is full (predetermined value for the meter increase entrance 227). It becomes possible to grasp whether a number (in this example, ten balls) has entered. In addition, the aspect of meter increase presentation is not limited to this example, For example, even if one sphere lights at every entrance into the entrance for meter increase 227 and enters, one gauge of the meter is lit (increased). Good.

  Further, the item giving effect is an effect to be executed in relation to the giving of the item, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number of opening ports 227 for meter increase (this example) Then, it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied when 10 spheres have entered), and using the decorative symbol display device 208, an indication is given that an item is given, the type of the item concerned, etc. Perform (details will be described later). By executing such an item giving effect, the player can grasp that the item has been given, the type of the item, and the like. In addition, the item giving condition and the aspect of the item giving effect are not limited to this example, for example, the number and type of already acquired items may be displayed, or the item is special (rare item May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  The first embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. The gaming state shown in FIG. 59 (a) is a state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. Also, in this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, and the number of special figure 2 variation games is 3 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 6 by the display of six reserve icons PI. Is displayed, nine gauges are extinguished, and one gauge GG is lit. With the meter increase effect, nine spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (one more sphere It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it is lit as shown in FIG. 59 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all ten gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" is performed instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 59 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 59 (e) to FIG. (G). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 59 (h), information about an item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, the description of item A) (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, when the information on the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item giving effect, the button is displayed for the period shown in FIG. Make a presentation.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item application effect by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display regarding the item application effect or the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is made to overlap at least a part of the display of the display and the decoration of the design. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not disturbed, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the item By temporarily reducing the visibility of the presentation effect, the presentation effect may be able to be enhanced.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG capable of performing a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set an acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and an appearance of a chance button 136 effective for accepting an operation are simulated. The image of the button and the character image prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, PUSH), and the appearance of the left and right keys whose reception of the operation is effective among the up, down, left and right direction keys (not shown) An operation valid period display TG including a button image BG2 and a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 59 (l) in a state where the option of “Yes” is temporarily selected during such button effects, as shown in FIG. 59 (m) By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the “Yes” selection has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  In the state shown in FIG. 59 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In item presentation effects after resumption, FIG. 59 (n) to FIG. 59 (p) are triggered when a specific selection (in this example, selection to set acquired items) is made from a plurality of options in button production. After displaying an animation that moves from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the image including the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of "during item A setting" instead of the character display CD1, it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition during the SP (super) reach change (the gauge of the meter becomes full). In the second embodiment, over the period shown in FIG. 60 (a) to FIG. 60 (b), the variation game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation, and the subsequent FIG. In addition to the SP reach fluctuation, the SP reach effect is executed over the period shown in FIG.

  During one such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights up as shown in FIG. 60 (e). After executing meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect modes of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those in Example 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item granting is performed by displaying the indication concerning the item giving effect in front of the display concerning the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIG. 60H to FIG. At least a part of the display relating to the rendering is overlapped with the display relating to the SP reach rendering and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item giving effect is not impeded, so that the information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the SP reach effect and the meter can be improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  Further, at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed by displaying the variation display of the decoration symbol in front of the display regarding the item giving effect over the period shown in FIG. 60 (k) to the same figure (o). Is overlapped with at least a part of the display regarding the item giving effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variable display of the decorative symbol is not impeded, it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game and also temporarily recognize the visibility of the item giving effect. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the velocity.

  Furthermore, the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display relating to the SP reach effect or the item application effect over the period shown in the subsequent FIGS. 60 (l) to (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol overlap at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item imparting effect. With such a configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the visibility of the button effect will not be disturbed, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variation game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to perform, there may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect or the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 3 is an example which starts an item provision effect based on that item provision conditions were satisfied (due that the gauge of a meter became full) during non-pattern fluctuation (during stop display of a symbol). The gaming state shown in FIG. 61 (a) is a state in which the variation game of the special drawing is not executed (during non-symbol variation). In this example, there is no special figure fluctuation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations for special figure 1 fluctuation game is 0, the number for special figure 2 fluctuation game is 0, It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such non-design fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, it lights as shown in FIG. 61 (c). After executing the meter increase effect that all 10 gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the character display CD2 of "full" instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since the effect modes of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those of the above-described embodiment 1 except that the SP reach change is being performed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the item provision is performed by displaying the display related to the item provision effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIG. 61 (j) to FIG. 61 (m). At least a portion of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol is There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item giving effect is started during the symbol change based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the non-pattern change (during stop display of the symbol). This is an example of During the non-design fluctuation shown in FIG. 62 (a), as shown in FIG. 62 (b), one ball enters the entrance for 227 for increasing the meter, and in the following FIG. 62 (c), it lights up A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during non-pattern variation shown in FIG. 62 (c), as shown in FIG. 62 (d), based on the ball entering the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) In the subsequent FIG. 62 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 62 (g), it is lit 1 After executing the meter increase effect that all ten gauges go out by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), the character display CD2 of "full" is performed instead of the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item giving condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in the following FIG. 62 (e) is the state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIG. 62 (i) to FIG. 62 (k). An animated display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 62 (l), information about items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), the item image IG including the character display of "Heat" is displayed. In this item image IG, an item giving condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure fluctuation game is “hot (high expectation)” (the special figure fluctuation game has a winning result of It indicates that it is a hit, or that the possibility of a hit is high.

  In the present example, at least a part of the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed at least one of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol by displaying the display related to the item imparting effect before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. I make it overlap in the department. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is improved. There is a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing it.

  In the state shown in FIG. 62 (n), the item giving effect is ended and the SP reach is started. As described above, if the display related to the item giving effect is deleted before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not disturbed, so the progress of the fluctuation game is accurately made to the player. It may be possible to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of reservations is full. This is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 63 (a) is the state (during symbol variation) in which the variation game of the special figure is being executed. In this example, there is a special figure variation game being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, the number of special figure 2 variation games is 4 It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of figure fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) is 7 by the display of seven reserve icons PI. Is displayed, and 6 gauges are turned off and 4 gauges GG are turned on. 6 spheres have entered the entrance hole 227 for meter increase (the 4 spheres are It is reported that the gauge will be full if it enters. Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), it is lit 4 as shown in FIG. 63 (c). A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 63 (c), as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) and continues. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the lower display area of the screen, the number of reserved special game variations (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) increases from 7 to 8 and becomes full by the display of eight reserve icons PI Is shown.

  In this example, the meter increase effect is shifted to the increase mode when the number of reserved special game variation games (special figure 1 variation game and special figure 2 variation game) becomes full (8 in this example). Configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 63 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the following three lights are turned on. Perform meter increase effect to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (i), when one ball further enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 63 (j), the one gauge which has been lit is extinguished. By doing this, a meter increase effect is realized in which all 10 gauges go out, and the right to erase another gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore the same in FIG. While attaching a code | symbol, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this example, the example shows transition to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during symbol fluctuation while the number of reservations is full. It may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition of is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter can be carried over to the next game, but it is configured not to carry over The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the sixth embodiment in time series.

    In the sixth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving two types of custom items). The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, and then FIG. 64 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of item names (in this example, item A and item B) IN1 and IN2 and descriptions of items (in this example, descriptions of item A and item B (content in the figure) Is omitted)) Display IT1 and IT2. In addition, three or more types of items may be provided in the item provision effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 64 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button effect according to the present example, a selection display SG capable of specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and reception of the operation are effective. Among the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (in this example, PUSH) prompting the pressing operation of the chance button 136, the operation acceptance is effective among the up, down, left, and right direction keys not shown. And an operation effective period display TG including a meter display showing a period in which acceptance of the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right key) is effective. .

  As shown in FIG. 64 (l), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 64 (l) while the option of “item A” is temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (m) In addition, by highlighting the option of “item A”, it is informed that the selection of “item A” has been confirmed (that item A has been selected to be set among acquired item A and item B). Do.

  In the state shown in FIG. 64 (n), the button effect is ended and the item giving effect is resumed. In the item giving effect after resumption, FIG. 64 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, the item A is selected from the acquired item A and item B). (N) to (p), an animation is displayed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed while being moved from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display region After that, instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", by performing the character display CD3 of "during item A set", it is shown that the player sets the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the seventh embodiment in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (this example is given in the item giving effect) Is an example of giving custom items and non-custom items). The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are applied in the item application effect, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, then FIG. 65 (i) As shown, as information related to two types of items, the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description of the item (in this example, the description of item A (content is omitted)) display of IT1 Display the item image IG including the display of the character of "Heat". The non-custom item to be assigned in the item assignment effect may be another non-custom item (for example, change in hold, model explanation 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The following state shown in FIG. 65 (j) is a state in which a button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. The subsequent item giving effect and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 65 and the description thereof is omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen on the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in time series, and FIG. 68 is a menu screen for selecting various menus It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a luminance adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 66 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen whose display is started when, for example, a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol variation, and in the present example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment Display the top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen capable of selecting various menus is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in the present example, the right key) or the third operation means (in the present example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or the brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) or the fifth while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When the operation of the operation means (in this example, the down key) is received, the display of a luminance adjustment screen such as the various lamps 418 and the decorative symbol display device 208 etc. capable of adjusting the luminance is started.

  In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step and the meter display is suggested to indicate that the volume is increased by one. If the operation of the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is decreased by one step Run. When the operation of the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display is performed to indicate that the brightness is increased by one step. When the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the down key) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one step is executed Do.

  Furthermore, when it is detected that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed while displaying the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demonstration screen is started, and the symbol variation display is performed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 66 (b) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to the present example is composed of four menus of effect customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen, and when each menu is selected, the effect customization screen and the mobile terminal It is configured to transition to a linked service screen, an initialization confirmation screen, and a demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67, since the lapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-symbol variation shown in FIG. 67 (a), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is received as shown in FIG. 67 (c) while the demonstration screen is displayed, the operation of FIG. 67 (d) is started. The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted, so that FIG. 67 (f) is displayed. As shown, while the brightness is lowered by one step, the meter display indicating that the brightness is decreased by one is executed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the fourth operation means (in this example, the upper key 161c). Since the operation of (a) is accepted, as shown in FIG. 67 (h), the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display indicating that the brightness is increased by one step is executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted while this brightness adjustment screen is displayed, so that the brightness adjustment screen is replaced. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (j) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (k), while the display of the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted, so that the display shown in FIG. As such, the meter display is executed to indicate that the volume has been lowered by one step and the volume has been decreased by one step.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) has been detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (l) is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 67 (m) is started. Since the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted during display of this demonstration screen as shown in FIG. 67 (n), the menu screen shown in FIG. 67 (o) The display of has started.

  Subsequently, in the state where the menu of effect customization is temporarily selected on this menu screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (p), the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. , The display of the effect customization screen has been started. Also, as shown in FIG. 67 (r), while the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 67 (q) is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. The display of moving the light display to the next selectable item (in this example, item P) is performed, and with the item P temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. 67 (t), the first operation is performed. Since the operation corresponding to the means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character display of "setting item P" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208 By doing, it is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal linked service screen>
FIG. 66 (c) is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal-linked service screen according to the present embodiment is configured of six menus of trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the portable terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display of the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1) is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, after the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-1) is started, then the new registration is selected on the trial play screen The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-2) is started.

  When a menu for password input is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b 2), passwords as shown in FIG. 68 (b 2-1) and FIG. 68 (b 2-1-1) The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, the display of a screen notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of a screen notifying the completion of the password input as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-3) is started.

  Further, when the data storage menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b3), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-1) is started, and this confirmation screen is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2) is started, and “Exit” is selected while this two-dimensional code display screen is displayed. In this case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2-1) is started.

  In addition, when the menu of data clear is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b4), the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1) is started, and this confirmation screen When “Yes” is selected in, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b5-1) is started. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 69 (a) is a state in which a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-pattern variation. Also, in this example, there are no special figure fluctuation games being held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special drawing 1 fluctuation games is 0, and the number of special drawing 2 fluctuation games is 0 , It is shown numerically that the number of reservations of the common drawing fluctuation game is 0. Also, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by not displaying the reserve icon PI, the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation games (special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game) is 0 As shown in the figure, with 9 meters off and 1 gauge GG turned on, 9 balls have entered the entrance 227 for increasing the meter due to the meter increase effect (the other ball enters) If it does, it reports that the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, by performing the character display CD1 of "Item not set", it is shown that the player has not set a custom item.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), as shown in FIG. 69 (c), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 69 (b) while such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. After performing the meter increase effect that all the ten gauges go out by turning off the one gauge that has been lit, as shown in Fig. 69 (d), "full" instead of the meter display By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is informed that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and therefore the same as in FIG. While the reference numeral is attached, the explanation thereof is omitted, but the display related to the item giving effect is in front of the display concerning the demonstration screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIG. 69 (e) to FIG. 69 (n). By making it display in, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen), the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Operation related to the button effect (in this example, setting of the item acquired by the player than the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment)) Operation) to be received with priority.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the operation relating to the button effect (this example Then, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the player has received an operation for setting the acquired item, but the timing shown in FIG. 69 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demonstration screen (top menu screen) When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when the) is displayed, the operation related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen) The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation related to (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or luminance adjustment) is accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, an item imparting effect is started based on satisfaction of the item imparting condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 70 and Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen over the period shown in FIG. 70 (e) to FIG. 70 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display on the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 70 (n) (the timing when the menu effect is not displayed and the menu effect is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed on the assumption that the operation on the menu screen (in this example, the operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal interlocking service) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, The corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the user has received a menu selection operation such as a mobile terminal interlocking service.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the tenth embodiment in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, an item imparting effect is started based on satisfaction of the item imparting condition (display of the gauge of the meter being full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. This is an example of The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment over the periods shown in FIG. 71 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect overlaps at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment, the rendering effect may be able to be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in the present example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the player) The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item is received, but the timing shown in FIG. 71 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received, the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for performing the volume adjustment has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment in time series.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the establishment of the item provision condition (that the gauge of the meter is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 68 is displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. While the description is omitted, in the present example, the display related to the item imparting effect is displayed in front of the display relating to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIG. 72 (g) to FIG. By displaying at least a part of the display related to the item giving rendering, at least a part of the two-dimensional code is made to overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. By temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) Configured.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received an operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 72 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation by the chance button 136 is received at timing (1), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ((2) In this example, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation (an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment in time series.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item using a production customization screen after having done. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed in front of the display on the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIG. 73 (e) to FIG. 73 (o). Then, at least a portion of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the effect customizing screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item giving effect is not disturbed, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been provided and information on the given item. Temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen may improve the effect.

  Further, in this example, although the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l), the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, so An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set in the effect customization screen) It is composed of

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customizing screen), the operation relating to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the item acquired by the person is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 73 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set in the effect customization screen) is received. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example In the effect customization screen, the corresponding processing may be performed on the assumption that the operation of determining the item to be set is accepted.

  Further, in this example, with the option “Yes” being temporarily selected during the button effect, as shown in FIG. 73 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 73 (m) Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item immediately is not performed, and as shown in FIG. 73 (q) to (u), the menu screen is displayed again. When the portable terminal interlocking service screen is selected in and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (v), the item acquired in the item giving effect (in this example, the item A) can be set It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. It is an example which sets an item immediately by operation in button production after having done.

  The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those of the above-described Example 12, and therefore the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 74 and their descriptions are omitted. j) to (k), when the selection operation of the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. 74 (l) in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), by highlighting the “Yes” option, it is informed that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). If an item is acquired while the presentation customization screen is displayed, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the presentation customization screen as shown in FIG. 74 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item giving effect is started based on that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. After that, the point to set the item using the effect customization screen is the same as the embodiment 12 described using FIG. 73, but in this example, the effect customization screen is in front of the display regarding the item giving effect By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item application effect (in this example, all the gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, since the visibility of the effect customization effect is not impeded, information on the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item imparting effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing the Note that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured not to overlap at least a part of the display related to the item application effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in time series.

  The present Example 15 starts item provision presentation based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (display of the gauge of the meter becomes full) while the effect customization screen described using FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 is displayed. This is an example in which the item provision effect is continued even if the symbol variation display is started while the effect customization screen is being displayed. The meter increase effect, the item application effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the twelfth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The explanation is omitted.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 76 (l), the ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special view starting opening 230) during the item giving effect shown in FIG. 76 (k). In the following FIG. 76 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item giving effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not inhibited.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 16>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a meter increase effect and an item addition effect according to a sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

  The embodiment 16 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 59 in that the item application effect is started based on the establishment of the item application condition (the gauge of the meter becomes full) during the symbol change. Although it is the same as 1, in this example, the item is displayed across two changes of the change and the next change.

  Specifically, after the variation ends during execution of the item giving effect shown in FIG. 77 (k) and stop display of the symbol is performed, as shown in FIG. 77 (l), the suspension of the special view 2 is performed. New fluctuation game is started based on. Then, the button effect is continued also in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item giving condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 77 (m), the button effect is produced based on the pressing operation of the chance button 136 being accepted. , The item giving effect is resumed, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. As in this example, if it is possible to display items across a plurality of symbol variations, the item giving effect is not interrupted with stopping or starting symbol variations, and the player's willingness to play the game May be able to last. In addition, the symbol variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient, and it is not necessary to be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an increase in meter effect and an item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The embodiment 17 is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 59 in that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol change. Same as 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the ball's entry into the meter increase entrance 227 during execution of the item assignment effect, and the meter increase effect is executed when the ball entry is detected. ing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (k), during the execution of the item assignment effect shown in FIG. 77 (j), the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 is detected. As shown in), during the display of the item by the item giving effect, the meter increase effect to advance the gauge of the meter is started. If it is possible to increase the meter while the item is displayed as in this example, it may be possible to further increase the player's willingness to play the game. In addition to enabling the increase of the meter during the display of the item, the establishment of the item grant condition may be possible (the gauge of the meter may be full), In this case, the right to give the item may be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / example 18>
A meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the mini game is executed based on the establishment of the item provision condition during symbol variation (the gauge of the meter becomes full), and the item provision effect is started after the mini game is over. Do. FIG. 79 (e) shows the state where the mini game is started. In this example, the display area in which the gauge of the meter is displayed is enlarged, and it is configured to execute the lottery in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the lottery according to the present embodiment may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation, the player's selection operation The result may be predetermined regardless of. In addition, the "x" sign of the result of Amidaki is off, the image imitating a capsule is the acquisition of an item, the letter of E means that the item of E is acquired, and the letter of E is reached Is configured to give notice of the items to be earned. In addition, when the design and color of the image imitating a capsule are different from normal, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be a plurality of types of mini games, and the type of items may be The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Ami-dakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and the item acquired by the player is displayed. With the configuration as in this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored of the period from the satisfaction of the item grant condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modified example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item application effect according to the modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for increasing meter 227” is used as a trigger for the effect of increasing the meter, but the present invention is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of the ball may be used as a trigger for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to (b), the meter increases when the ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) during non-pattern variation. The effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 80 (c) to FIG. 80 (e), the ball entered the starting opening (in the present example, the first special view starting opening 230) during the symbol change. In the case, a meter increase effect may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 of the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 of the second display mode based on the result of the change game pre-reading. In this case, the meter increase effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 80 (i) to FIG. 80 (l), the meter increase effect may be performed when the pseudo link is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 80 (m) to (o), even when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. Good, as shown in FIG. 80 (p), meter increase effect may be executed when reach is executed, or SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (q) The meter increase effect may be performed, or as shown in FIG. 80 (r), the meter increase effect may be performed when the advance notice display (in this example, the display of the character image of the princess) is performed. .

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 2 in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the operation regarding volume adjustment is performed (in this embodiment, even if the display regarding volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display regarding button effects). An operation relating to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by the player) is preferentially received over an operation for adjusting the volume.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 81 (d) during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. As shown in e), after executing the meter increase effect of turning off all the 10 gauges by turning off one of the gauges that were on, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), on the display of the meter By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank” instead, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enter the entrance hole 227 for meter increase, and the item provision condition is satisfied. To inform

  A state shown in the following FIG. 81 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, when the item giving condition is satisfied, the image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is gradually provided over the periods shown in FIGS. 81 (g) to (i). An animation display is made to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while enlarging the display, and as shown in FIG. 81 (j), information concerning items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After the animation display is performed, as shown in FIG. 81 (k), the display of the item name (in this example, item A) IN and the description IT of the item as information on the item (in this example, description of item A) (The contents are omitted)).

  In this example, at least a part of the display of the volume control screen is displayed by displaying at least a part of the display of the volume control screen by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display of the volume control screen. Some overlap. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impeded, information on volume adjustment can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily set. In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by reducing it.

  Further, in this example, the display related to volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 81 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) When the operation of is received, the display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” is executed during the button effect without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, display for switching the temporary selection of “Yes” and “No” during the button effect is performed without executing the processing of lowering the volume by one step.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 81 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted in a state where the option “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button effect, the button effect is ended, and then FIG. s) After performing animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a stepwise manner over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD 1 of “item not set”, the character display CD 3 of “during item A setting” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / modification 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a meter increase effect and an item application effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entering the sphere into the entrance for meter increase 227” is regarded as the condition for the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this and “the entrance to the inlet for meter increase 227 is not limited to this. A condition other than the entry of a sphere may be set as the satisfaction condition of item assignment. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c), the cumulative number of balls entering the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls obtained in the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example) , And an item may be given if it exceeds 10000 spheres, or as shown in FIG. 82 (d) to FIG. 82 (h), when a specific operation is accepted by the operation means (in this example, An item may be assigned when the operation is accepted in the order of the key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). , Means for displaying effects setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 73, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 71, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67), and the effect setting display means one or more A display including settings (for example, setting of items shown in FIG. 73, setting of volume shown in FIG. 70, setting of luminance shown in FIG. 67), and the effect being displayed during display of the effect setting display A display including the setting of 1 (for example, the setting of the item A shown in FIG. 71 and FIG. 73) separately from the setting display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, the item shown in FIG. Indicates that it has been granted Show (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) can be displayed on the display means,
It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first display including the setting of 1 can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed while the effect setting display is being displayed, Even during display, the player may be able to enjoy it.

  In addition, count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 59 (a) etc.) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided. For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 59 (c) etc., and a character display CD 2 of “full tank” shown in FIG. 59 (d) etc. When it becomes, the said 1st display may be displayed on the said display means, and the display by the said count display means may be a display which can be changed in the period of a non-pattern variation display.

  With such a configuration, since the display of the count display means changes during non-pattern variation display, it may be possible to play a game without getting bored of the player. In addition, the player may not wake up even if the suspension of the floating game is lost.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is a notice May be displayed (for example, the display of an item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 62 (m) or the like).

  If such a configuration is used, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 79) is executed. May be

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to enjoy the period until the first display is displayed.

  In addition, an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 59 (l) and the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) while displaying the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying a button effect shown in FIG. 59 (j) etc., and the first operation display means an effective period display of the operation means (eg, FIG. 59 (j) etc. It may be a display including the operation effective period display TG shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, the player can operate the operation means to participate even while the first display is displayed, and the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

  With such a configuration, the first display may be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, when the first display is displayed on the display means, settings (for example, settings of items shown in FIG. 73) selectable in the effect setting display may be increased.

  With such a configuration, the player's choice can be increased, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 82 (o) to (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter) When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting opening or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player sets the item A) separately from the effect setting display in the display. And a setting (for example, an item A) corresponding to the first display can be displayed on the display means, and the display corresponding to the acquisition may be displayed on the display means. It may be displayable on the display means.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and for example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In any case, the item may not be deleted. Also, while the custom display and the item are being displayed, even if the variation of the symbol starts, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. In addition, even if the meter is difficult to see (or not visible) during the display of the custom display, the item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-design variations.

  Moreover, the meter which stored a part in non-design fluctuation may make an item which shows reliability appear after being full during symbol fluctuation. Further, an item (heat, intense heat, etc.) indicating the reliability may be made easier to appear at the time of symbol fluctuation than at the time of non-pattern fluctuation, or may not be appeared at the time of non-pattern fluctuation. Moreover, you may display a button effective meter (operation effective period display) during non-design fluctuation. Also, the item may be displayed by canceling the demonstration screen (or without cancellation), or the item may be displayed by canceling (or without canceling) the menu display. The display of the two-dimensional code may be canceled (or without cancellation) to display the item.

  Also, the meter may be stored at an opportunity other than ball passing. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the increase amount of the meter is increased than that in the normal state. Further, in this case, the system may be configured to shift to the increase mode at the end of the hold full or the power support. Also, the item may appear after the mini game with the meter full. In addition, even during SP reach, an effect may be performed in which an item appears. Also, the period of the button effect of reach and the period of the button effect of customization may or may not overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. Further, the items to appear may be changed depending on the game state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item is made to appear during the display of the customization screen, the display of “?” In the customization screen may be changed (the item is additionally displayed), or when the customization screen is displayed again without being changed. In the customization screen, the display of "?" May be changed. In addition, the appearance of the item may be notified, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may be made to easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. Further, the item may be displayed across a plurality of changes, the meter may be stored while the item is displayed, or the meter may be configured to be full at one type of trigger.

  In addition, display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or more single color or full color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7 segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) display device, the leaf display device, the plasma display, or the projector, or the meter display may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, , When the ball enters the entrance for increasing meter 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display 208 and the meter display of the other display devices increase by the same increment), one for the decorative symbol display 208 and the other display device It is good also as a count display means which performs meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel And a stop button for stopping rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the symbol and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Determining means for determining whether or not the game is performed, and payout control means for performing game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 83 to 136. FIG. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 83 to 136 are basically used only for the description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 83 to 136, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, The codes shown in 83 to 136 have priority.

  Next, the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described using FIG. 83 to FIG.

  FIG. 83 shows an example of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode. In FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emits light, it is expressed in light black color, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is expressed in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 83 (b) following FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which each of the light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are at the initial position.

  FIG. 83 (c) following FIG. 83 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is in the initial position. There is. When the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the common drawing reserve number aa5, the part of the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the button advance notice h110 , And a part of the ball extraction error display h111, the operation expiration date display h112, and the preview display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that the movable body 1 may overlap with displays other than these as the movable body 1 is positioned approximately at the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 83 (d) following FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 30 degrees from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 83 (e) following FIG. 83 (d) shows a state where the movable body 1 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates approximately 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates counterclockwise approximately 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and a ball pull error display The other part or the like of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. In addition, there may be a case where the movable body 1 overlaps with the display other than these by the movable body 1 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, any of these displays There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 83 (f) following FIG. 83 (e), after moving the movable body 1 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off It shows the state.

  As described above, in the present effect example, only the movable body 1 located on the front side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position falls to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.

  FIG. 84 shows the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 84 (b) following FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 84 (c) following FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is moved from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position There is. When the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a fourth pattern aa4 of the special figure 2, a button preview It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a drop-in-ball error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that when the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and any one of these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 84 (d) following FIG. 84 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 70 degrees clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 84 (e) following FIG. 84 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button preview h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these when the movable body 2 is deformed at a position substantially in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and any of these displays may be used. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  In FIG. 84 (f) following FIG. 84 (e), after moving the movable body 2 back to the shape before deformation, it moved to the initial position and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 were turned off It shows the state.

  As described above, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When the present effect example is performed, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed in a final display than in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 is performed. In the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 is performed, the jackpot symbol may eventually be more likely to be finalized and displayed than when it is displayed.

  FIG. 85 shows the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light with various light emission patterns in accordance with effects. FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 do not emit light. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. An area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the display area of the fluctuation icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 1 reserve icon display area, and the special view 1 reserve icon display area has a reserve icon ab1 in the character mode of the merchant and reserve icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the merchant character mode is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special view 2 reserve icon display area, and the special view 2 reserve icon display area displays the reserve icon ac 1 in the default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed. In the frontmost layer, a ball extraction error display h111 by the text "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer in which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer in which the unballed error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date representing the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of the character "Toen" character and "chance when reaching reach" are displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) following FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which each light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 85 (c) following FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start to move from the initial position and at the same time located approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, a second special figure 4 pattern aa4, common drawing reserve number aa5, part of common drawing 4 pattern aa6, part of button advance notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 Overlap with some of the In addition, when the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may overlap with displays other than these, and these displays may be displayed. There may be cases where the display of any one of them does not overlap. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are made the same. However, the movement end timing may be different.

  FIG. 85 (d) following FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 degrees clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable parts 14 move downward, and a pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, the timing of the start of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  FIG. 85 (e), which follows FIG. 85 (d), shows a state in which the movable elements 1 and 2 are located approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is simultaneously terminated. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 14 moves downward, and the pair of movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button preview h110, and the ball removal are newly added. Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with displays other than these by the movable bodies 1 and 2 being deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be a case where one of the displays in the display does not overlap. In addition, the timing of completion | finish of deformation | transformation operation | movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may differ.

  FIG. 85 (f) continues to FIG. 85 (e). At the same time after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, the movement to the initial position starts and the movement ends simultaneously. , And 2 show the state in which the respective light emitting means are simultaneously turned off. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before deformation | transformation may be started by separate timing, and may be complete | finished by separate timing. Further, even if the timing of the start of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the shape of the movable body 2 before the deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The start timing of the operation to return to the previous shape may be the same or the end timing may be different. In addition, there may be cases where the timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ, or the timing of the start of the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may differ. It is also good. In addition, even if the moving start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the movement end timing may be the same in some cases, or the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be The movement start timing may be the same or the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  Thus, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 positioned at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the state of the initial position, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 This is an example in which an operation of simultaneously deforming is performed. The present effect example may be performed as a prefetch notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed. It is better that the jackpot symbol is finally determined and displayed more easily when the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed than when the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 94, a movable body 90 and a rendering example using the movable body 90 will be described.

  The movable body 90 is described with reference to FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 for rotating the movable body 90b, a rotary shaft d1, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion It has 90c3.

  In the LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 are provided in alignment in an arrangement of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows 1 column, 3 rows 1 column, 2 rows 6 columns , And the light emitting diode is not provided in the third row and the sixth column). A light emitting diode b1 to b4 is provided on the LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and a light emitting diode c1 is provided on the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c along the outer periphery of the arc portion To c4 are provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be all light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different colors), or a part may be a single color light emitting diode and another part may be a full color LED , All may be configured with full color LED. Further, as the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a, light sources other than the light emitting diodes may be used.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g) show stepwise the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on or the like. In FIGS. 87 to 93, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where it is turned on is shown in light black. Further, in FIGS. 87 to 93, the cover parts 90a3, 90b3 and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. The movable body 90 can be vertically moved by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. The cable connected to the movable body 90 may be disposed behind the arm so as not to be visible to the player. In addition, the character string "under preparation" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Continuing to FIG. 87 (a), FIG. 87 (b) shows that all of the movable bodies 90 are moved and located approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c. The light emitting diode is shown in a lit state. In addition, the display of the character string “under preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 are rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c are visible.

  FIG. 87 (d) following FIG. 87 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 87 (e) continued from FIG. 87 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (f) following FIG. 87 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b, 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (n) show an example of effects using the movable body 90 in stages.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 88 (b), which is continued from FIG. 88 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 88 (c) following FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 88 (d) following FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 88 (e) continued from FIG. 88 (d), in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d).

  FIG. 88 (f) following FIG. 88 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 88 (d).

  FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 88 (h) following FIG. 88 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  As for FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h), only the movable body 90b provided in the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 degrees clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 88 (k) continued from FIG. 88 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 88 (l) continued from FIG. 88 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90c becomes visible. The light of all the provided light emitting diodes is visible.

  FIG. 88 (m) following FIG. 88 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 88 (l), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 88 (l). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, each of movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 88 (i) to 88 (l).

  FIG. 88 (n) following FIG. 88 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 is performed.

  An example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a) to 89 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 89 (b), which is continued from FIG. 89 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 89 (c) following FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (d) following FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 89 (e) following FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished and each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously moving downward. There is. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 89 (f) following FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (g) following FIG. 89 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 89 (h), which is continued from FIG. 89 (g), all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 with the movable body 90 moved from the initial position and positioned approximately in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be lighted, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c). And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 89 (i) continued from FIG. 89 (h), a portion of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90b is obtained by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  89 (j) following FIG. 89 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the lights of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  89 (k) continues on FIG. 89 (j), in which part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is obtained by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) is visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 89 (l) following FIG. 89 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a Is visible.

  FIG. 89 (m) following FIG. 89 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to its original position after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 have been extinguished. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. Also, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original position so as to return the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 89 (i) to 89 (l).

  89 (n) following FIG. 89 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  One example of the effect using the modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (n) show the effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in stages. In the present modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are extinguished. A decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 90 (b), which is continued from FIG. 90 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, and the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 90 (c) following FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 60 degrees clockwise. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be viewed.

  FIG. 90 (d) following FIG. 90 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 90 (e) continued from FIG. 90 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. It shows the state. The movable body 90b rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise from the attitude of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the attitude of FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (f) following FIG. 90 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (g) following FIG. 90 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 90 (h) following FIG. 90 (g), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position to be located substantially in the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90. The diode has shown the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be lighted, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moved. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 90 (i) continued from FIG. 90 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotating about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 90 (j) following FIG. 90 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90b rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 90 (k) continued from FIG. 90 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 rotates clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 90 (l) continued from FIG. 90 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, as the movable body 90c rotates, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (m) following FIG. 90 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are extinguished. ing. The movable body 90b rotates 90 ° clockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 90 (d), and the movable body 90c rotates 90 ° counterclockwise from the attitude shown in FIG. 90 (d). Note that all of the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously return to the original posture, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is in the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, there may be a case where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 90 (i) to 90 (l).

  FIG. 90 (n) following FIG. 90 (m) shows a state in which the movable object 90 has moved to the initial position and reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is at the initial position It may be started after the move to

  As described above, the present effect example is the effect used as the notice of the change, but may be used as the effect of the advance notice. When the present effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a final manner as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  In FIG. 91 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, decorative symbol variation display is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (b) following FIG. 91 (a), the finalized display of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the hold icon a2 of the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the variation icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (c) subsequent to FIG. 91 (b), a decorative symbol variation display due to the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the advance notice mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string "Press the button!", The button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed, and the notice effect of the button operation is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the fluctuation icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string of "press a button!", A button advance notice h110, and an operation expiration date h112 It is overlapped.

  In FIG. 91 (d) following FIG. 91 (c), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a by the player operating the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, and the sun's An image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern, a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (e) following FIG. 91 (d), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c by the player operating the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, and the reach effect is displayed Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decoration pattern and a part of the variation icon ad1 of the character mode of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (f) following FIG. 91 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the SP reach effect display is started by displaying the character string of "I'm playing!" And the decorative symbol display device is started. At the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced size. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the Tono character display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (g) following FIG. 91 (f), the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display 208 The combination of symbols is reduced and temporary stop display is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is an effect display in which the character scene of "win", the character of the lord and the enemy character is ended and the character of the lord has won. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the effect display won by the character of the hall is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  As for FIG. 91 (h) following FIG. 91 (g), the stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (i), which is a continuation of FIG. 91 (h), a big hit game effect display of the 1R's for the 15R special big hit game is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol "Decoration 7" which is a stop symbol of a big hit is displayed, and a character string of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right. A string of "80 balls" indicating the sum of the numbers and a string of "big hit counts: 1" indicating the number of big hits at the lower right are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R's big hit game effect indication is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (j) following FIG. 91 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the 15R special big hit game is over and the character string of “Dito” is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a part of the “Dito” string is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (k) following FIG. 91 (j), the state is shifted to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "right strike me!" And a symbol indicating that right strike is performed, a variation icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display and a part of the character string "Please hit right!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (l) following FIG. 91 (k), the power supply state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of "door open error", a character string of "ball full error", a fluctuation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reservation icon ac2 of the prefetching notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full error", a part of fluctuation icon ad5 and a special figure 2 reserve icon A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  As shown in the present effect example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and game states. The movable body 90 may overlap all the displays shown above, or the movable body 90 may not overlap the displayed displays.

  An example of effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the advance effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed by the player pressing the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136 of the advance operation for button operation. It shows. Even when the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. . The series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a pre-reading notice. Further, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily determined and displayed as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) are not performed. It may be done. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily determined and displayed as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) are not performed. In the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed compared to the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) are performed. In the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) are performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where a series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) are performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  A modification of the appearance of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located rearward of the game board 125 having a game nail.

  FIG. 93 (a) is an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30a at the initial position. The structural body 30 a has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a portion of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a portion of the movable body 90b, and a portion of the movable body 90c are visible through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 93 (b) is an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30b at the initial position. The structural body 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically elongated rectangular notch at a substantially central portion. The structure 30 b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a of the movable body 90, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c are provided via the notch of the structure 30b. It is visible. In addition, a part of one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. A part of the second movable body may be visible and the other one may not be visible.

  FIG. 93 (c) is an example where the movable body 90 is located at the rear of the structure 30c at the initial position. The structural body 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, since the movable body 90 is overlapped with the structure 30 c, the movable body 90 can not be viewed by the player. By disposing the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structural body 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structural body 30c may be made more easily visible during non-display than in display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  With reference to FIG. 94, a modification of the position and movement operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described.

  FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down in front of the liquid crystal display device a 208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a 208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b 208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the lateral direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94C is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The drawing on the left side in FIG. 94 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 are positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is positioned behind the movable liquid crystal display device c 208 and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle part of FIG. 94 (c) shows the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moved downward. The drawing on the right side in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display c208 after the movable liquid crystal display c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is positioned in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c 208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described using FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. The structure 247 used in the effect example of FIG. 95 to FIG. 105 is a structure in which the shape of the front is substantially circular and the design of the family crest is applied to the surface, and vertical movement is possible. Also, in FIG. 95 to FIG. 104, the left figure shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left figure. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is a schematic for determining whether a predetermined character display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani or a display su1 of the sun) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be seen by the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the drawing, the line of sight by which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ○, and the line of sight by which the player can not visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example is determined by setting a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 to a predetermined eye angle (e.g., a general sitting height (e.g., a seating height of 70 cm to 100 cm) The angle of the line of sight in the normal gaming attitude of the player) may be designed to be calculated so as not to be visible. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 95 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 95 (b) continued from FIG. 95 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the character display SB of the sabothani character is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247; It is displayed to appear from the bottom. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani A part of the display SB can be viewed. In the description of the player's eyes in the present example and in the following examples, the term “substantially front” defines the angle within the range of ± about 10 ° as the front when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper means that the angle of the eye is + about 20 ° or more as the substantially oblique upper, and the substantially oblique lower means the eye angle of −20 ° or less as the substantially oblique lower, but the present disclosure Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, the position of the line of sight should be higher than that of the substantially front with substantially diagonal upper, and the position of the line of sight should be lower than that with the substantially front with substantially diagonal lower.

  In FIG. 95 (c), which is continued from FIG. 95 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the sabothani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 95 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 95 (d) following FIG. 95 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character display of Sabohani You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, this example is an example in which movement display is performed from a position at which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to a position at which the character display SB is not overlapped. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when one of the effects shown in FIGS. 96 to 104 is performed. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 is not moved and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, leftward, rightward and rotation. The player who is generally seen from the front may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani by performing one or a plurality of movements, and may be overlapped with the structure 247. At least any one or more of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or rotational movement of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed while moving and displaying the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at the position. In some cases, it may be possible for a player who is looking substantially from the front to be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of SaboHani.

  FIG. 96 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 96 (b), which is continued from FIG. 96 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 96 (c) following FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 96 (d) following FIG. 96 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at a substantially diagonal top has the character display of Sabohani You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 96 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 96 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  Thus, the present example again overlaps the structure 247 after performing the movement display from the position at which the sabothani character display SB used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. In this example, the movement display is performed at the selected position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed.

  FIG. 97 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 and the structure 50t in stages. The structure 50t is an opaque thin plate-like structure, and the title of the game console is displayed on the surface. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  97 (b) continues on FIG. 97 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the decorative symbol variation display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 97 (c) following FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 97 (d) following FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the sabothani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 97 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 97 (d), shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (d), the player looking at the structure 50t from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabohani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonally lower is the character of the Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In this way, this example is overlapped to the structure 50t after the movement display is performed from the position where the character character SB of Sabohani used for anticipating the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped. This is an example of moving display at a position. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 98 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 98 (b), which follows FIG. 98 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display. There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 98 (c) following FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped.

  FIG. 98 (d) following FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of Sabohan's character display SB is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 98 (e) following FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  As described above, in this example, the position that is not overlapped with the structure 247 after the movement display is performed from the position where it is not overlapped with the structure 247 to the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for warning of the change is overlapped. Is an example of moving display. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 99 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 99 (b) following FIG. 99 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of the sabothani appears from the lower left of the screen while displaying the decorative symbol variation display There is. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. In addition, the character display SB of Sabohani in this example is larger than the character display SB of Sabohani shown in FIG.

  FIG. 99 (c) following FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right part of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of Sabo Hani's character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 99 (d) following FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where the structure 247 is overlapped. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the substantially oblique upper side is the character of Sabohani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 99 (e) following FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the character display SB of Sabohani further moves to the right is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The whole of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where the structure 247 does not overlap.

  Thus, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is not overlapped to the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not to be overlapped with the structure 247 later, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an effect example which is always visible from the player in a substantially front view. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 100 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 100 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 100 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of a decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 100 (b) following FIG. 100 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 100 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 100 (c) following FIG. 100 (b) is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 so that the entire display su1 of the sun appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 100 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the display su1 of the sun and the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the sun display su1 and at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB.

  In FIG. 100 (d) continued from FIG. 100 (c), in the decoration symbol display device 208, an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws up the display su1 of the sun is displayed, and the display su1 of the sun moves upward. Showing an animation display to be displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special view 1 reservation icon a3.

  In FIG. 100 (e) continued from FIG. 100 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sun display su1 is upward while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  Thus, in the present example, only the display su1 of the sun is displayed after the display 2 of the character display SB of Sabohan and the display su1 of the sun, which are used to announce the change, are overlapped with the structure 247. This is an example in which movement display is performed at a position not overlapping with. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 101 (b), which is continued from FIG. 101 (a), the whole of the sabothan character display SB and the sun at a position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire display su1 is displayed as it appears from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, but the player looking from substantially diagonally above Is able to visually recognize at least a portion of the Sabohan character display SB and at least a portion of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 101 (c) following FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun move upward on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character display SB of Sabohan and a display su1 of the sun are displayed approximately at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration pattern.

  FIG. 101 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 101 (c), shows a state in which an animated display in which only the display su1 of the sun moves downward is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon a3. In the state of FIG. 101 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the display su1 of the sun, and the player looking at the substantially diagonal top shows the sun of the display su1. The whole is visible.

  In FIG. 101 (e), which is continued from FIG. 101 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, the display su1 of the sun is further downward. The animation display moving to is shown. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247. The player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not see the display su1 of the sun, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top can see at least a part of the display su1 of the sun .

  Thus, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the notice of the change are displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun In this example, movement display is performed at a position where su1 is not overlapped with the structure 247, and thereafter movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 is overlapped with the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 102 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 102 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to radially protrude from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as the advance notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

  In FIG. 102 (b) continued from FIG. 102 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the decorative symbol variation display is approximately the upper half of the character display SB of the sabothani at a position overlapping the structure 247. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to move upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the effect image ef1 of the player who can not visually recognize the character display SB of the sabothani, The player who is watching is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohan and a part of the effect image ef1.

  In FIG. 102 (c) continued from FIG. 102 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of the safari is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving up so as to appear from the bottom. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 102 (d) following FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A portion of the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special view 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can see a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and a player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character display of Sabohani You can see the whole of SB.

  FIG. 102 (e), which follows FIG. 102 (d), shows a state in which the character display SB of the safari and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB and effect image ef1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the change is overlapped to the structure 247 to the position not overlapped, but the character display SB of Sabohani is used. Is an example in which the effect image ef1 attached to the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position not overlapped by the structure 247 before it is displayed at a position overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 103 shows three example effects using the structure 247. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is positioned in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 103 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the temple and the balloon display h114 of the character string “when chance is found!” It is displayed to overlap in part. The balloon display h114 of the character string of “If you find a character!” Is a display for predicting that the character display SB of Sabohani appears, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

  In FIG. 103 (b), which is continued from FIG. 103 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it is overlapped with the structure 247 while displaying the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Further, in the balloon display h114, a character string "during character appearance!" Is displayed. The character string of “character appearing!” May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabo Hani, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, while the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  In FIG. 103 (c), which is continued from FIG. 103 (b), a character display SB of a safohani displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208 is enlarged. In the balloon display h114, a character string "during character expansion!" Is displayed. May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from the front is able to visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  As described above, in this example, before displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for the advance notice of the change at the position where the SABOHANI character display SB is overlapped to the structure 247, a display for previewing that the SABOHANI character display SB is displayed After the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it is overlapped to the structure 247, a display is made to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position to be overlapped to the structure 247 is performed. In this example, the character display SB of Sabohani displayed on the screen is enlarged, and a display is provided to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the size of the character display SB of Sabohani to be enlarged is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily displayed finally.

  The drawing on the left side of FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 103 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the sabo hani 2 serving as the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the sabo hani 1 and the character display SB2 of the sabo hani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a portion of the character display SB1 of the Sabo Hani 1 and at least a portion of the character display SB2 of the Sabo Hani 2.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. is there. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of the advance notices displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 is larger, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  The drawing on the left side of FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In (a) of FIG. 103, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 as the advance notice of the variation is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247. A character display SB2 of Sabohani 2, which is a preliminary display of the change, is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 103 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from the substantially front can not visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, but The player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the SaboHani 1, and the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of SaboHani.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohan 1 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapped with the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohan 2 used for the advance notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapped with the body 50t. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good. In addition, as the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapped by the plurality of structures is large, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 104 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 in stages. The drawing on the left side of FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common figure reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. The right side of the variation icon display area is the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b4 are alternately directed from left to right in this order It is displayed. Further, FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 104 (b) continued from FIG. 104 (a), the entire character display SB of Sabohani at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is displayed to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 104 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of the Sabo Hani, but the player looking at the substantially diagonal top has the character of the Sabo Hani At least a part of the display SB can be viewed.

  FIG. 104 (c) following FIG. 104 (b) shows a state where an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohan's character display SB is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  In FIG. 104 (d), which is continued from FIG. 104 (c), the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned at a position where it overlaps with the character display SB of the Sabothani displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 104 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from the front substantially can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani, but a player looking at the substantially oblique lower view of the character display SB of Sabohani At least a part is visible.

  Thus, in this example, after displaying the SABOHANI character display SB used for anticipating the change at a position overlapped with the structure 247, the character movement SB is displayed at a position not overlapped with the structure 247, and then the structure is performed. In this example, the body 247 is moved, and the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247. Also, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than the case where one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. It is also good. In this example, the movement of the structure 247 is carried out behind the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani, which is the advance display, but it is always displayed on the character display SB of Sabohani according to the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohan may be delayed.

  FIG. 105 shows an example of effect using the structure 247. FIG. 105 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap with the structure 247. FIG. Sabohan's character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 105 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. The player visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can not visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani although a part of the effect image ef1 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the player viewing the structure 247 obliquely from the upper left to the lower right views a portion of the effect image ef1 and the substantially entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player visually recognized from the front. In addition, the effect of this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol is finally configured to be easily displayed more clearly than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed. It is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115, an example of effect using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 106 to 115 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon, but the locus and movement of the holding icon and the fluctuation icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

  FIG. 106 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 106 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and 106 (i) after FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g) and FIG. 106 (j) after FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 106 (a)-(i). FIG. 106 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 106 (b) following FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  106 (c) continues to FIG. 106 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 106 (d) following FIG. 106 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 106 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 106 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  106 (f) continues to FIG. 106 (e), while the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 reservation icon a3 is a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be The notice display m1 may be a notice display for giving a notice that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display that the SP reach effect is carried out.

  106 (g) continued from FIG. 106 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  106 (h) continues to FIG. 106 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 106 (i) following FIG. 106 (h) shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving image returning to the position before moving is finished as the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reservation icon a3. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 106 (j) and (k).

  106 (j) following FIG. 106 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 106 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base where the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  106 (k) continued from FIG. 106 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement It shows the condition that has been

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. It is. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 107 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 107 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 107 (h) to 107 (j) after FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (g) and FIGS. 107 (k) to 107 (k) to 107 (a) to 107 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 107 (a)-(j). FIG. 107 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 107 (b) following FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 107 (c), which is continued from FIG. 107 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 suspension icon a3, the special view 2 suspension icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 107 (d), which follows FIG. 107 (c), shows the state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 107 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 107 (f) continued from FIG. 107 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while the temporary symbol display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Recently, a vertically-long rectangular holding icon (hereinafter referred to as “the holding icon while going out” is displayed on the pedestal displaying the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 as the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 with the character string “on the go” "" Is displayed. In addition, it may replace with a pending icon while going out, and may use a default shaped pending icon with a lighter color.

  In FIG. 107 (g) continued from FIG. 107 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  107 (h) continues to FIG. 107 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 5 is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  107 (i) following FIG. 107 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the base before moving is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3 and the base is displayed on the base The hold icon in the same manner as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon while out of the office.

  In FIG. 107 (j), which is continued from FIG. 107 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon during leaving is erased.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 2 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 107 (k)-(m).

  As for FIG. 107 (k) following FIG. 107 (a)-(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 107 (g) is finished and the notice display m1 is erased Be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, the on-hold icon re-appearing animation in which the on-hold icon of the aspect (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps the on-going on-hold icon and reappears is displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 107 (l) continued from FIG. 107 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the hold icon is erased while out of the office.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. Is an example of provisionally displaying a pending icon of another aspect in place of the pending icon being moved. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

FIG. 108 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 108 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 108 (h) and 108 (i) after FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (g) and FIG. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 108 (a)-(i). FIG. 108 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 108 (b) following FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 108 (c), which is continued from FIG. 108 (b), in the decoration symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 reserve icon a3, the special view 2 reserve icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 108 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 108 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 108 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 108 (f) continued from FIG. 108 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a suspension icon temporary movement animation in which the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily moved to the pedestal for which the special view 1 suspension icon a 3 is displayed is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, and is used as a notice of the change. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 108 (g) continued from FIG. 108 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. Moreover, in the special figure 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b 3 is temporarily displayed on the base on which the special figure 1 reserve icon a 3 was displayed most recently. Is displayed on. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (h) of FIG. 108 (h) following FIG. 108 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (pedestal) where Special icon 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 208ab, the reserve icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserve icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  108 (i) continues to FIG. 108 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 is displayed as the special view 1 suspension icon a3, and the moving animation to return to the position before the movement is finished, The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. In addition, the suspension icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 108 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 108 (j) following FIG. 108 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 108 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears The special icon 1 suspension icon a 3 reappears on the base where the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 is temporarily displayed. The suspension icon re-appearing animation and the special view 2 suspension icon b 3 move toward the original pedestal. The temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation is displayed so as to overlap with the special view 2 hold icon b 3, but the special view 2 hold icon b 3 is a hold icon appearing in the hold icon reappearing animation It may be displayed to overlap. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is erased, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Also, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of the deletion of the notice display m1, or the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the deletion of the notice display m1. The reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the warning display m1 is erased.

  In FIG. 108 (k) following FIG. 108 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 ends, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement Then, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is ended, and the special view 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the move.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary indication during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol. In the example below, the pending icon on the right is temporarily displayed in place of the pending icon being moved, and when the pending icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed pending icon returns to the original position. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 109 shows two examples of the effect example using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 109 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and 106 (i) after FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g) and FIG. 106 (j) after FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using Fig.109 (a)-(i). Fig. 109 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 109 (a) shows a state where decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 109 (b) following FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 109 (c), which is continued from FIG. 109 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 reserve icon a3, the special view 2 reserve icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 109 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 109 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 109 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 109 (f), which is continued from FIG. 109 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while the temporary symbol display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of a cassette.

  In FIG. 109 (g) continued from FIG. 109 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 109 (h) following FIG. 109 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 109 (i), which follows FIG. 109 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the moving animation ends. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of the present effect example will be described using FIGS. 109 (j) and (k).

  In FIG. 109 (j) following FIG. 109 (a) to (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 109 (g) is finished, and the notice display m1 disappears And a special icon 1 reappearing animation in which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 reappears is displayed on the base on which the special view 1 reserving icon a 3 was displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, and the character string "under preparation" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  In FIG. 109 (k) continued from FIG. 109 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearing animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 is ended, and the special view 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before movement. It shows the condition that has been

  As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol fluctuation display is re-varied is performed when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the temporary notice display while the temporary stop display of the missing symbol is displayed. There is no example.

  FIG. 110 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 110 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 110 (a) shows a state where decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 110 (c), which is continued from FIG. 110 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3, the special view 2 hold icon b3 of the default mode. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 110 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 110 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 110 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 110 (f), which is continued from FIG. 110 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 110 (g) continued from FIG. 110 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (h) of FIG. 110 (h) following FIG. 110 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 110 (i), which follows FIG. 110 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special icon 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  FIG. 110 (j) following FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 110 (k) continued from FIG. 110 (j), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 110 (l) following FIG. 110 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 110 (m) following FIG. 110 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-movement animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 110 (n) shows a state in which the re-movement animation to return to the position before movement is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 following FIG. 110 (m) There is.

  As described above, in this example, while the temporary stop display of the out pattern is displayed, the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle pattern of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again and again. It is an example to do. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the holding icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 111 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 111 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 111 (b) following FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (c), which is continued from FIG. 111 (b), is a special pattern 2 reserved icon b3 of the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special image 1 reserved icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 111 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 111 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 111 (f), which is continued from FIG. 111 (e), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is a special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  In FIG. 111 (g) continued from FIG. 111 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (h) following FIG. 111 (g), the moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 111 (i), which follows FIG. 111 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  FIG. 111 (j), which is subsequent to FIG. 111 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (k) continued from FIG. 111 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed, the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special view 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 111 (l) continued from FIG. 111 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In FIG. 111 (m) following FIG. 111 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-moving animation of the notice display m1 for returning to the position (base) where the special view 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed The temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is complete | finished and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed again is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 111 (n) shows a state in which the re-movement animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished as the notice display m1 as the special view 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 111 (m) There is.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the pseudo continuous notice is performed multiple times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. If there is not enough hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 112 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 112 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 112 (b) following FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (c) continued from FIG. 112 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (d) following FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 112 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (f) continued from FIG. 112 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the special view 1 reservation icon a3 is a special view 1 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used to produce the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display that suggests that the pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be

  FIG. 112 (g) continued from FIG. 112 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  112 (h) continues to FIG. 112 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (base) at which the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 'is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is re-displayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, the text “under preparation” is still displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1 or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the preliminary display m1.

  FIG. 112 (i), which follows FIG. 112 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  In FIG. 112 (j) continued from FIG. 112 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "reach!" Is displayed.

  As described above, in this example, when the predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started It is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 113 shows the effect example using the variation icon in stages.

  Fig. 113 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 113 (b) following FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (c) continued from FIG. 113 (b) in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the default view special view 2 hold icon b3. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Drawing 113 (e) following Drawing 113 (d) shows a state where temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" was displayed in decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (f) continues from FIG. 113 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the fluctuation icon ad1 is from the fluctuation icon display area 280 It shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out and moving as the advance notice m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 are the same display mode. Further, on the pedestal of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the fluctuation icon is not displayed. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display that suggests that a pseudo continuous notice is to be made, or a display used as a prefetch notice. May be

  FIG. 113 (g) continued from FIG. 113 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m2 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  113 (h) continues to FIG. 113 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. -The temporary stop display of "decoration 5" is complete | finished, and the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo change is being performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decoration symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the movement animation of the advance notice m2.

  FIG. 113 (i), which follows FIG. 113 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 ends as the notice display m2 as the fluctuation icon ad1. .

As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuating due to the variation icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the advance notice during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed The symbol may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. It should be noted that not only the variation icon of the default mode but also a variation icon of an aspect other than the default mode may be used as the preview display m2 of this example. It shows.

  Fig. 114 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special view 1 reserved icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 114 (c), which is continued from FIG. 114 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special view 1 reserve icon a3, the special view 2 reserve icon b3 of the default mode is displayed. It shows a state in which the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (d) following FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 114 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 114 (f), which is continued from FIG. 114 (e), the special symbol 1 reserve icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the advance notice m1 is a display used as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 114 (g) continued from FIG. 114 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 4" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 5" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  114 (h) following FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (base) at which the special view 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5 is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (i), which follows FIG. 114 (h), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 suspension icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed, and the moving icon of the holding icon moves the holding icon to the left and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the changing icon display area 208 and the moving animation of the holding icon changes .

  FIG. 114 (k) following FIG. 114 (j) shows a state where temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 114 (l) continued from FIG. 114 (k), the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is special figure 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 114 (m) following FIG. 114 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop indication of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3”, the notice display m1 indicates the middle symbol display area A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 2" displayed temporarily stopped at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decorative 2" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 3" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  114 (n) continues to FIG. 114 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the notice display m1 back to the position (pedestal) where the special view 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. It shows a state in which the stop display of the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (o), which follows FIG. 114 (n), shows a state in which, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the advance animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 1 reserved icon a3 and the movement animation ends. .

  FIG. 114 (p) following FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol change display is displayed, and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the left and the move icon of the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. There is.

  FIG. 114 (q) following FIG. 114 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 114 (r) continued from FIG. 114 (q), the special symbol 1 reserved icon a3 is special image 1 while displaying the temporary stop display of “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8” in the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation of jumping out from the pending icon display area 280ab and moving as the advance notice m1 is displayed. The advance notice display m1 and the special view 1 hold icon a3 are the same display mode, and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  In FIG. 114 (s) continued from FIG. 114 (r), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 8", the notice display m1 is a middle symbol display area It shows a state in which a collision animation that collides with "decoration 7" which is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, or "decoration 8" displayed temporarily in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with the left, middle, right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and may collide with all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily.

  In (d) of FIG. 114 (s), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of the notice display m1 of returning to the position (pedestal) where special icon 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed. The temporary stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3 "is complete | finished, and the state in which the decoration symbol variation display is displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 114 (u) continued from FIG. 114 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is finished with the notice display m1 as the special view 1 reserved icon a3; Reach production of is performed.

  As described above, this example is an example of developing a reach effect by continuously notifying that a predetermined holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary display during temporary stop display of the missing symbol. is there. The first and second notices appearing in this example are used as pre-reading notices, and the third notices appearing are used as notices of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 115 shows an example of effects using the hold icon in stages.

  Fig. 115 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 and b2 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. Further, the special view 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of the character of the lord. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of the character of your character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 115 (b) following FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the form of the character of the window is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 115 (c), which is continued from FIG. 115 (b), a special figure 2 in which a special character 1 is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 115 (d), which follows FIG. 115 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special view 2 hold icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (e), which is subsequent to FIG. 115 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 115 (f) continued from FIG. 115 (e), the special figure 2 reservation icon b2 is a special figure while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 and 2 pending icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out from special drawing 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2 and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out from the special view 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. All of the notice displays c1 to c3, the special view 2 suspension icon b2 and b3, and the special view 1 suspension icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the holding icon is not displayed on the base on which the special drawing 2 holding icon b2, b3 and the special drawing 1 holding icon a3 of the special drawing 1 and 2 holding icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 115 (g) following FIG. 115 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 changes. It shows a state where it has changed to the advance notice c3 '. The notice displays c1 'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and a display mode in which a large-displayed character of the lord is fighting with a Japanese sword removed. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5", the notice display c1 'fights against "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped on the left symbol display area 208a, The battle animation is a battle animation in which the notice display c2 'fights with "decoration 4", which is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3', which is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, is displayed temporarily. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 115 (h) following FIG. 115 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3 'changes to c3. The notice display c3 displayed the special view 2 hold icon b3 at the position at which the notice display c2 displayed the special view 1 hold icon a3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2. The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is ended, and a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed is shown.

  In FIG. 115 (i) continued from FIG. 115 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before movement as the special view 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special view 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special view 2 reservation icon b3 is ended as the movement before the movement. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

  As described above, in the present example, when the plurality of reserved icons collide with the plurality of decoration symbols as the plurality of advance notices during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the decoration symbol variation display is re-fluctuating and reach effect is started. Is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally easily determined and displayed compared to the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or when the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 106 to FIG. 114 is performed. When the number of pending icons used as the advance notice display of this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the advance notice display.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIGS. 116 to 136. FIG.

  FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (c) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 116 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the hall is displayed at the approximate center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 116 (b) continued from FIG. 116 (a), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the brow character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) is displayed so that a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple will appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from the left to the right is displayed Shows the status displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon and the design of the sunny mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed) Then, after stopping display at the approximate center of the screen, it is possible to display the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark in order from the top of the character string, or even if all the character strings and the patterns of the sunny mark are displayed at once. Good. The same configuration may be applied to other balloon display.

  In FIG. 117 (d) continued from FIG. 117 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 117 (e) continued from FIG. 117 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1 may be overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may be overlapped with the balloon display f2 .

  FIG. 117 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation of moving upward is performed due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon animation f1 is moved upward and the balloon animation f2 is moved leftward at the same time.

  In FIG. 117 (f) following FIG. 117 (e), a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved toward the left and a moving animation is performed, and the balloon f1 is moved upward. The moving animation is performed, and the state displayed at the upper center of the screen is shown.

  FIG. 117 (g) continued from FIG. 117 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 117 (h) following FIG. 117 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap with the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and height are different. There may be cases where there may be a difference, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  In FIG. 117 (h), with the appearance of the balloon display f3, the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward by moving animation, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen Is shown. In this example, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right are simultaneously performed.

  In FIG. 117 (i) continued from FIG. 117 (h), a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right and a moving animation is performed, and the balloon f2 is moved upward. The moving animation is performed and displayed at the approximate upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows a state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, after the frame, the balloon display f2 of the wolf character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may delete the balloon display f3 after deleting the balloon display f2, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. At the same time, the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the n-th time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number It may be erased before the start of) or may be erased before displaying the temporary stop indication. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out gradually in the same place, or in the same manner as the balloon display f1 of the Tono character After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction of each appearance. The same may be applied to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed. In the balloon display described in the present example and the following drawings, patterns of each configuration (weather mark (fine mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) of the balloon display, display of character strings, frame, display of character name, character In each of the face images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or all may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character may crack may be displayed. The entire balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates and the animation display in which the display of the character string blinks and the animation display in which the character blinks. In addition, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and the animation display in which the character palpates may be displayed while the number of characters in the display of the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display may be repeated to rotate and return to the original posture, one animation display to return to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original may be moved after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one gloss display moving or changing may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display of the respective configurations of the balloon display may overlap with a part of another animation of each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 118 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 118 (b) following FIG. 118 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple is displayed from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 118 (c) continued from FIG. 118 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed. Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 118 (d) continued from FIG. 118 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 118 (e) continued from FIG. 118 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112 are erased. , A moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e), the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (g) continued from FIG. 118 (f), the balloon display f2 by the brow character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 118 (h) following FIG. 118 (g) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved animation moving to the left and displayed in the approximate center of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (i) continued from FIG. 118 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 118 (j) following FIG. 118 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. 11 shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (k) continued from FIG. 118 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is displayed.

  In FIG. 118 (l) following FIG. 118 (k), the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 118 (l) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, with a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves toward the right.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 119 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 119 (b) following FIG. 119 (a) is displayed so that a balloon display f1 by the character of the temple will appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is overlapped with the common drawing reserve number aa5 and the common pattern 4th design aa6.

  In FIG. 119 (c) continued from FIG. 119 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right is displayed Shows the status displayed.

  In FIG. 119 (d) continued from FIG. 119 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 119 (e) following FIG. 119 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f2 by the 爺 character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f2 is a display given priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 119 (f) following FIG. 119 (e) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the screen moves toward the left is performed and stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen . The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the hall character and the character image of "don" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 119 (g) continued from FIG. 119 (f), after the moving animation moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 is finished, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started. In FIG. 119 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the clear mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion Approximately the upper half of can be seen. Note that at a certain timing between FIG. 119 (f) and FIG. 119 (g), the balloon of the balloon display f1 is in a state in which a part of the pattern of the clear mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 119 (h) continued from FIG. 119 (g), the moving animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 119 (i) continued from FIG. 119 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 119 (j) following FIG. 119 (i), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, in the present example, the balloon display f3 is a display given priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 119 (k) following FIG. 119 (j) shows a state where the balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved to the right and the movement animation is performed, and the screen is stopped and displayed substantially at the center . The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position at which the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the text of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 and the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the brow character and the character image of "爺" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 119 (l) following FIG. 119 (k) shows a state in which moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In FIG. 119 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the text of "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and the part of the frame of the design of the cloud mark and the balloon part Approximately the upper half of can be seen. In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 119 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the moving animation moving upward above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen It is done.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 120 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 120 (n) to 120 (q) are performed after FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (m) and FIGS. 120 (r) to 120 (r) to FIG. The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Fig. 120 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 120 (b) following FIG. 120 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 120 (c) continued from FIG. 120 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 120 (d) continued from FIG. 120 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 120 (g) continued from FIG. 120 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (h) following FIG. 120 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (i) continued from FIG. 120 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  In FIG. 120 (j) continued from FIG. 120 (i), a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (k) following FIG. 120 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of "Honey" displayed at a position overlapped with the Sabo Hani character image and the Sabo Hani character image, and a character string and pattern of "When reached" are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 120 (l) following FIG. 120 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The display is stopped at the position where the balloon part f4 appeared from the lower part of the screen has appeared, and the movement on the balloon display f3 is also interrupted and displayed once. In addition, the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (m) following FIG. 120 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f2. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120 (n) following FIG. 120 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed, and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which a character image of "Shippu" and a character string and a pattern of "Heating fever" displayed on the face image of the Gale character and the face image of the Gale character are displayed. It is an indication that includes. Further, the height of the blowout portion of the blowout display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the blowout portion of the blowout display f1 and the like.

  In FIG. 120 (o) following FIG. 120 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (p) following FIG. 120 (o), scroll display of balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 120 (q) following FIG. 120 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 120 (r) following FIG. 120 (a) to (m), a balloon display f5 is displayed from the left end of the screen so that the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed in FIG. It shows a state in which a moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect that the balloon displays f1 to f4 are scrolled upward in order is displayed, the effect that the balloon displays f2 to f5 are scrolled to the right is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (s) following FIG. 120 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously come out from the right end of the screen .

  FIG. 120 (t) following FIG. 120 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or ended and the stop display of the balloon display f5 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire balloon display f5 is displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effect f5 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG. FIG. 121 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 121 (k) and 121 (l) are performed after FIGS. 121 (a) to (j), and FIG. 121 (m) after 121 (a) to (j). The example of the pattern 2 which performs presentation of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Fig. 121 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 121 (b) following FIG. 121 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 121 (d) continued from FIG. 121 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (e) continued from FIG. 121 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 121 (f) following FIG. 121 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 121 (g) continued from FIG. 121 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (h) following FIG. 121 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 121 (i) following FIG. 121 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  121 (j) continues to FIG. 121 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 and an operation expiration date display h112 is displayed, indicating that a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 121 (k) following FIG. 121 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

  FIG. 121 (l) following FIG. 121 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Thereafter, there may be a case in which reach effect is started while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are erased, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
In FIG. 121 (m) continued from FIGS. 121 (a) to (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112 are displayed. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 121 (n) following FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the top of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. After this, the balloon displays f1 'and f2 may be erased and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect or the reach effect may be started, or the animation in which the holding icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Good.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed. When the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed, or this example When the example of pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  122 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special drawing 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  122 (b) continues from FIG. 122 (a) so that a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  122 (c) continues to FIG. 122 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 122 (d) continued from FIG. 122 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 122 (e) following FIG. 122 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 'was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  122 (g) in FIG. 122 (g) temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1' and the balloon display f2 A button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at the position where the action is made, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 122 (h) following FIG. 122 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen at the same time as the moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f2 is configured not to be displayed but to be erased above the position at which the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Also, by displaying the balloon display f1 'in priority to the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving in a scroll display behind the balloon display f1, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured such that the overlapping parts of 'are not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the character of the eyebrow of the balloon display f2 and the character image of the eyebrow are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', they are scrolled to the upper end position of the screen. As described above, in this example, when a balloon display having a high hit probability appears, the callout having a high reliability is left on the screen by prioritizing and deleting the balloon having the low hit reliability. It is configured.

  In FIG. 122 (i) continued from FIG. 122 (h), while the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed, a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed The state f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 'and f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  Fig.123 (a)-(i) have shown the example of a presentation which used the balloon display in steps.

  Fig. 123 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 123 (b) following FIG. 123 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 123 (c) continued from FIG. 123 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 123 (d) continued from FIG. 123 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 123 (e) following FIG. 123 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the キ ャ ラ ク タ character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In this example, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 is moved upward to perform a moving animation. Therefore, the balloon display f2 is approximately below the balloon display f1. Displayed to overlap in half.

  In FIG. 123 (f) following FIG. 123 (e), in the state where the substantially lower half of the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, a moving animation of moving upward together is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 123 (g) continued from FIG. 123 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted and a chance is made to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 123 (h) following FIG. 123 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of "balloon display f2" The balloon part of the balloon display 2 by overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part (the character string of "Today's weather" or the frame part of the cloud mark or the balloon part ) Is configured to overlap with part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of “Today's weather” and the pattern of the rain mark and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters overlap in the balloon portion. There may be cases where the balloon part may overlap with the face image of the character, or there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon part.

  123 (i) following FIG. 123 (h) is a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 are moved upward, and the upper end of the balloon f1 and the lower end of the balloon f3 fit on the screen Shows a state in which the moving animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. Thereafter, the balloon effects f1 to f3 may be erased and reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be possible. Further, in the present example, the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays are configured to be uniform, but the overlapping states of the respective balloon displays may be configured not to be even. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap, and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 124 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 124 (c) continued from FIG. 124 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 124 (d) continued from FIG. 124 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 124 (e) following FIG. 124 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and part of each configuration of the balloon display (the weather pattern, characters, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be reduced to be different for each configuration.

  In FIG. 124 (f) following FIG. 124 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 124 (g) continued from FIG. 124 (f). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted to give a chance to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 124 (h) following FIG. 124 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f3 by a princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before being moved upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The degree of reduction of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the degree of reduction of the balloon display f1. In addition, one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced more or less than the other, or the configuration to be reduced between the one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 124 (i) following FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or ended and the stop display is performed. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (k) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 125 (b) following FIG. 125 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 125 (c) continued from FIG. 125 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 125 (d) continued from FIG. 125 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 125 (e) following FIG. 125 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "pseudo reunion chance!" Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  In FIG. 125 (f) following FIG. 125 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 125 (g) continued from FIG. 125 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ′, and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1 ′ The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 125 (h) following FIG. 125 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1 'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'is enlarged, and as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is floated instead. . In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon in which a character image of "Tono" displayed on the face image of the Tono character and a face image of the Tono character and a character string and a pattern of "SP reach confirmation" are displayed. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased according to the change of the new balloon display f1 ′, but for example, it is moved in any of the left-right direction to be erased It may be overlapped, may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a which has changed without moving, and may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 125 (i) continued from FIG. 125 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 125 (j) continued from FIG. 125 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 125 (k) following FIG. 125 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The character string "SP reach confirmation" is deleted and the character string "all rotation reach confirmation" is displayed. The character string “all rotation reach determination” is displayed as if it protrudes from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "all rotation reach confirmation" is a character image of a decorative symbol or a hallmark, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special figure 1 holding number aa1 or a special figure 1 fourth pattern aa2 or a special drawing 2 holding number aa3 or a special figure There may be a case where the display of the second pattern aa4 of 2 and the common drawing reserve number aa5, the fourth pattern aa6 of the common drawing, the display of the character string of the tutorial display area tu1 or the display other than these may overlap.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 126 (b) following FIG. 126 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a character display m3 of a princess is displayed from the left end of the screen. Princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th design aa2 of special drawing 1, the special drawing 2 reservation number aa3, the 4th design aa4 of special drawing 2, the common drawing reservation number aa5, the 4th design aa6 of the common drawing There is.

  In FIG. 126 (c) following FIG. 126 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 126 (d) following FIG. 126 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1, Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character of the character of the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of the character It is displayed to be. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  In FIG. 126 (e) following FIG. 126 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part f2 It is displayed to overlap.

  In FIG. 126 (f) following FIG. 126 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, an animation in which the princess character m3 moves to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the middle character part of the balloon part f2 of the balloon display f2 It is displayed to be.

  126 (g) continued from FIG. 126 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the character part of the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern part of the sunny mark and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap with the character part of the right part and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button advance notice h110 and a part of the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 126 (h) following FIG. 126 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, animation that moves the character m3 of the princess to the right is displayed, and the character m3 of the princess is the image of the cloudy mark on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f2 and the rain on the right of the balloon of the balloon display f3 It is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the image of the mark and a part of the face image of the brow character.

  In FIG. 126 (i), which follows FIG. 126 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and is erased so as to come out from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the nephew character. Thereafter, the balloon effects f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 127 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  127 (b) continues from FIG. 127 (a) so that a balloon display f1 by a character of Doun appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1, 2 suspension icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. The frame portion of the balloon display f1 is difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  127 (c) continues to FIG. 127 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

In FIG. 127 (d) continued from FIG. 127 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. FIG. 127 (e) shows that the player performs the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. FIG. By pressing the button, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date indication h112 are erased, and the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the brow character appears from the lower part of the screen It is displayed to be. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark are difficult to visually recognize by the structure 247.

  In (f) of FIG. 127 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 127 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and the patterns of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 127 (g) continued from FIG. 127 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporarily interrupting the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the sunny mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 127 (h) continued from FIG. 127 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the design of the cloudy mark, and a portion of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

  In FIG. 127 (i) following FIG. 127 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. By the structure 247, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position Alternatively, the balloon display may be configured to move, or may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 128 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 128 (b) following FIG. 128 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the light emission display of the smiling character is performed on the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the clear mark.

  In FIG. 128 (d) continued from FIG. 128 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button advance display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In (f) of FIG. 128 (e), which is a continuation of FIG. 128 (e), a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, a character string portion, a clear mark, and a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark.

  In FIG. 128 (g) continued from FIG. 128 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, the clear mark, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 128 (h), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button advance notice h110 and the operation expiration date h112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button advance notice h110, and the operation expiration date h112.

  In FIG. 128 (i) following FIG. 128 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. By the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and part of the pattern of the rain mark.

  In this example, when light emission display is performed by the light emission panel positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 129 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 129 (b) following FIG. 129 (a), a balloon display f1 by a character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 129 (c) continued from FIG. 129 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 129 (d) continued from FIG. 129 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord, and all of the characters of the lord. I'm wrapping.

  In FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the dark blue character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a character image of "爺" displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of 爺, a character string of "weather at noon" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the character of the character of the character, part of the character of the character "don", and part of the frame portion of the character balloon display f2. .

  In FIG. 129 (f) following FIG. 129 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the lord character, the whole of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the wolf character It overlaps with part of the image.

  In FIG. 129 (g) continued from FIG. 129 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. The button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed on the screen, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a substantially entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the brow character, and the button preview h110 overlaps with all of the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 129 (h) following FIG. 129 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of "hime" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a pattern of the rain mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that In addition, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the first display, the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "hime" There is.

  In FIG. 129 (i) continued from FIG. 129 (h), a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed stopped at the approximate center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f2 was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the first display is performed substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, a part of the face image of the wolf character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, the rain mark A part of the pattern of the part, a part of the face image of the princess character, and the whole of the character image of "hime" are overlapped.

  In this example, when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon display is configured to move, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decoration pattern, the fourth pattern, the mini decoration pattern, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, the tutorial display, the pseudo link display, the reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive calls display, number of acquired balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of the light amount adjustment display, the button press display, the error display, the ball removal display, the door open display, and the abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (h) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 130 (b) following FIG. 130 (a), a balloon display f1 'by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed on. In the balloon display f1 ', the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the lord character and the face image of the character of the lord character, and the character string and pattern of "simulative chance!" It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 130 (c) continued from FIG. 130 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a balloon display f1 'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 reserve icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab.

  In FIG. 130 (d) continued from FIG. 130 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 '. It shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the person to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 'by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1' moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of a character of 爺 and a character image of a character of キ ャ ラ ク タ, a character string of “hold change” and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  In FIG. 130 (f) following FIG. 130 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is performed, and a movement in which the balloon display f2' appeared from the lower part of the screen moves upward The animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2' is in the state of being stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1' was stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 130 (g) following FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special view 1, 2 suspension icon display area 280ab There is.

  In FIG. 130 (h) following FIG. 130 (g), the design of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 'is replaced with the special view 1 reserve icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a4. It is done. After this, the balloon display f1 ′, f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. It is also good.

  The effect of this example is an example in which a continuous advance notice is given by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the advance notice. Moreover, in this example, the design of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved to be displayed as a hold icon, but the variation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part The notice icon to be used may be moved to the inside of the balloon and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon may be displayed so as to be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step. Further, in FIG. 131 to FIG. 133, the sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a 208, special drawing 1 number aa1 of holding, special pattern 4 aa2 of special drawing 1, special drawing 2 number aa3 of holding, special pattern 2 fourth pattern aa4, general drawing number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 131 (b), which is continued from FIG. 131 (a), is a balloon display from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed to appear, a balloon comes out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a 208 (a part at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) Another part of the display f1 is displayed to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather is" and a pattern of a sunny mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a character image of the character The character image of “don” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 131 (c) continued from FIG. 131 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the balloon display f1 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously directed upward. The moving animation to move is displayed, and it is shown in a stopped state at the approximate center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a 208.

  In FIG. 131 (d) continued from FIG. 131 (c), the button symbol display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 131 (e) continued from FIG. 131 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While the time limit display h112 is deleted, a part of the balloon display f2 by the beard character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (a portion at the same height as the boundary between the special icon 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) It is displayed to be. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image and a face of an eyebrow character The character image of “爺” displayed above the face image of the character of “” and a part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 131 (f) following FIG. 131 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f1 is moved upward to move animation is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and it is stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  In FIG. 131 (g) continued from FIG. 131 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 and an operation expiration date h112 are displayed at a position where a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 overlap. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (h) continued from FIG. 131 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The time limit display h112 is erased, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b 208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which a character string of "afternoon weather" and a pattern of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess The character image of “Hime” displayed above the face image of the character of, and part of the balloon correspond.

  In FIG. 131 (i) continued from FIG. 131 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen is performed. A moving animation is performed in which a part of the character moves upward, a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position at which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which a part of the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f2 and the movement speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is moved upward, and the moving animation is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f3 is A moving animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  132 (a) to 132 (i) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows sub-liquid crystal a208, special figure 1 with hold number aa1, special figure 1 with a fourth pattern aa2, special figure 2 with hold number aa3, special figure 2 with fourth figure aa4, common figure hold number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 132 (b) continues from FIG. 132 (a), and the balloon display by the character of the statue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) The f1 is displayed as it appears. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 132 (c) continued from FIG. 132 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 132 (d) continued from FIG. 132 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. While a balloon display f2 by a wolf character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  In FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation is performed in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is on the top The moving animation to move toward is performed, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is displayed in a stopped state substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 has been stopped and displayed. Further, although the movement speed of the balloon display f1 and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 continued to FIG. 132 (f), in FIG. 132 (g), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 The button preview display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the overlapping positions, indicating a state in which a preview effect that urges the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 132 (h) continued from FIG. 132 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, a button advance notice h110 and an operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 already erased is displayed so as to be shrunk in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 132 (i), which is continued from FIG. 132 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 An animation is performed to move downward, and a balloon display is displayed so as to be stored under the sub liquid crystal b 208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b 208. When the sub liquid crystal b 208 is full of balloon display, it may be deleted from the old balloon display, or a new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. Half balloon display may be erased.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorative It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (m) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  Fig. 133 (a) shows the special liquid crystal a 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 4 symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, the common drawing reservation number aa5, The 4th design aa6 of a common figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Fig. 133 (b) continues from Fig. 133 (a) from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b 208 (the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) A balloon display f1 is displayed to appear. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that

  FIG. 133 (c) following FIG. 133 (b) shows a state in which, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed.

  Fig. 133 (d) following Fig. 133 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4" is stopped on the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d), the next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In (f) of FIG. 133 (e), which is continued from FIG. 133 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is upward Movement animation to move is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 133 (g) continued from FIG. 133 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 133 (h) continued from FIG. 133 (g), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 133 (i), which is subsequent to FIG. 133 (h), shows a state in which the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the stop of "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9". In FIG. 133 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b 208, and the balloon display f3 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. .

  In FIG. 133 (j) following FIG. 133 (i), the next change is started, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon display f1 to f3 in the sub liquid crystal b208 Is taking place continuously.

  In FIG. 133 (k) continued from FIG. 133 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f6 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 has a character image of "Chibi princess" displayed on the face image of Chibi princess character and Chibi princess character's face image and "Evening weather" and "reach kana?" It is a display including the balloon part where the design of the clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice of the reach being performed in the change.

  In FIG. 133 (l) continued from FIG. 133 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, and the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen. At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or ended.

  FIG. 133 (m), which follows FIG. 133 (l), shows a state where reach effect of “decor 4” is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, this example is an example in which the balloon display is continuously displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  FIG. 134 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in stages. 134 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 134 (i)-(k) after FIGS. 134 (a)-(h) and FIG. 134 (i ') after FIGS. 134 (a)-(h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs rendition of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, the example of the pattern 1 of this example of an effect is demonstrated using FIG. 134 (a)-(k).

  134 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special image 2, in the area at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  134 (b) continues from FIG. 134 (a) so that the balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. It shows the displayed state.

  In FIG. 134 (d) continued from FIG. 134 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indication h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more same balloon displays may be continuous.

  In FIG. 134 (f) following FIG. 134 (e), a moving animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is performed. As described above, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scrolled upward.

  134 (g) continued from FIG. 134 (f). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the two balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the chance button 136 is simulated at a position overlapping both the balloon displays f1. The button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 134 (h) following FIG. 134 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button advance notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and it is immediately before the both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a balloon display f1b is displayed from the bottom of the screen so as to appear. In the balloon display f1b, the character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character of Tono and the character image of "don" displayed on the image of the character of the character It is a display that includes a balloon part in which a character string and a pattern are displayed that are visible and that are visible and stupid. In addition, the blowout part of the blowout display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 134 (j) following FIG. 134 (i) shows a state where scroll display of balloon display f1b is being performed.

  FIG. 134 (k) following FIG. 134 (j) shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present production example will be described using FIGS. 134 (i ′) to (l ′).

  134 (i ') following FIG. 134 (a)-(h) has shown the state in which the scroll display of the blowing part f1 b has stopped temporarily. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

  134 (j ') following FIG. 134 (i') is a display for displaying a button advance notice h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiry date of the chance button 136 by a gauge on the decoration symbol display device 208 It shows a state in which h112 is displayed.

  In FIG. 134 (k ') continued from FIG. 134 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the stopped balloon f1b is resumed. Ru.

  FIG. 134 (l ') following FIG. 134 (k') shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1 b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1 b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In addition, every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, the button advance notice effect may be performed, or the button advance notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the strings of "When all on the person, it looks like a foolish wisdom, and what is below is something that looks like a foolish one." May be scrolled and not all may be scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, an example of effect of balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g) show the effect example using the balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth pattern aa4, in the area of the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing reservation number aa5 and the fourth design aa6 of the common drawing are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying a variable icon display, and in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed. The right next to the variation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserve icon b1 to b3 alternate from this left to right in this order It is displayed facing. A tutorial display area tu1 is next to the right of the special view 1, 2 reserve icon display area 280ab, and a character string "under preparation" is displayed. The tutorial display area tu1 may display the contents of the currently performed presentation or the contents of the currently not performed presentation. Further, FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 135 (b) following FIG. 135 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed . In the balloon display f1, a character image of "don" displayed on the face image of the character of the character and the character image of "don't care" displayed on the image of the character of the character and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed Is a display that includes a balloon part that The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  In FIG. 135 (c) following FIG. 135 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, balloon displays f2 and f3 are simultaneously displayed from the right end of the screen, and an animation moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Also, animations of moving up to the left at the same speed with the upper and lower balloon displays f1 are started.

  In FIG. 135 (d) continued from FIG. 135 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 135 (e) continued from FIG. 135 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed.

  In FIG. 135 (f) following FIG. 135 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed, and emerge from the left end in the order of appearance It is a state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all balloon displays move at the same speed in the same direction is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves at different speeds in different directions may be performed. Further, the balloon display used for the notice of the change and the advance notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice and the advance notice of the change, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  In FIG. 135 (g) continued from FIG. 135 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed is performed, and comes out from the left end in the order of appearance Shows the state after being erased. After this, there may be a case where SP reach effect or all rotation reach effect may be started, or there may be an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 simultaneously started are simultaneously displayed, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may be ended, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may be faster in moving speed than the other. In addition, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are simultaneously displayed, the display may end simultaneously, but one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may have a moving speed faster than the other.

  The effect of the present example may be used as a preview advance notice, or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured that final big hit design is easier to be finally displayed than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In the case of being displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easier to be determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 136 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described using FIG.

  FIG. 136 (a) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f2 can not be viewed simultaneously.

  FIG. 136 (b) shows an example of effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed in the state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously view the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed on the balloon display f2.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

(E1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and (d)).
The light emission mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and (d)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(E2)
The game console described in e1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(E3)
The gaming machine described in e1 or e2,
The first light emitting means may be means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

(E4)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e3, wherein
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(E5)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e4, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(E6)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(E7)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, refer to FIG. 86),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(E8)
The game console described in e7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(E9)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3) (for example, refer to FIG. 86 (b)).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(E10)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(E11)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e10, wherein
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by

(E12)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

(E13)
A game console according to any one of e1 to e12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by

(E14)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(E15)
The game console according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(F1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),
The first light emitting means is a means covered by the first cover (for example, the cover 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
The second light emitting unit is a unit covered by the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2)
It is a game stand described in f1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(F3)
The gaming machine described in f1 or f2,
The first light emitting means may be means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

(F4)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f3, wherein
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(F5)
The game console according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(F6)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(F7)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, refer to FIG. 86),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(F8)
It is the gaming machine described in f7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(F9)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, cover portion 90b3) (for example, refer to FIG. 86 (b)).
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(F10)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(F11)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f10, wherein
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by

(F12)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

(F13)
A game console according to any one of f1 to f12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by

(F14)
The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(F15)
The gaming machine according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(G1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 1);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is means capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation for moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 83 (c)).
The second movable means is means capable of performing a second operation (for example, an operation to move downward) (see, for example, FIG. 84C).
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 83 (a)).
The position of the second movable means having performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means having performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 85C).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(G2)
The game console described in g1,
The moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation is the same direction as the moving direction of the second movable means in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85C).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even while the second operation is being performed.

(G3)
The gaming machine described in g1 or g2,
When at least a portion of the first movable means and a portion of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction, another portion of the second movable means is visible from the front.
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4)
A game console according to any one of g1 to g3,
Display means (eg, decorative symbol display device 208),
The position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means which has performed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5)
The game console described in g4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "Please drop the ball") (for example, see FIG. 85 (b)).
At least a portion of the first error indication may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 85 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

  It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6)
The game console described in g5,
The first error display refers to a ball removal display (see, for example, FIG. 85 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it may be possible to change the appearance of the ball removal display.

(G7)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(G8)
The gaming machine according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The moving direction of the first movable means in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward or downward, and the first operation may be falling, and the component in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction It may be an orientation including at least one of the following components or the vertical component.
-Both the first operation and the second operation may be performed simultaneously, one may be performed and the other may be performed, or only one or the other may be performed.
-Both the first and second movable means may simultaneously return to the initial position after both the first movement and the second movement are performed, and one after the other returns back. It is also good.
-One of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate while the other moves while returning to the initial position.
-The LED of the second movable means may emit light during the first operation, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-The LED of the first movable means may perform the light emission effect during the second operation, and may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even when the first movable means is positioned in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform the light emission effect, and the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means may be performed Good.

(H1)
A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, refer to FIG. 86);
A game console equipped with
The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86).
The first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86)
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)),
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 93 (a)) ,
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and in some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(H2)
It is the game stand described in h1, and
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(H3)
The gaming machine described in h1 or h2,
The first light emitting means may be means that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A game stand characterized by

(H4)
It is a game console according to any one of h1 to h3,
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(H5)
It is a game console according to any one of h1 to h4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state through at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(H6)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b));
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(H7)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein
The second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, refer to FIG. 86),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(H8)
The game console described in h7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)).
A game stand characterized by

(H9)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein
The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover 90a3),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover (see, for example, FIG. 87 (a));
A game stand characterized by

(H10)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

(H11)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h10,
The second state is a state in which the first movable means is not in operation (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by

(H12)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h11, wherein
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)).
The first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),
A game stand characterized by

(H13)
A game console according to any one of h1 to h12, wherein
Equipped with a game board (eg, game board 125) having a game nail,
The first movable means is a means operable behind the gaming board (see, for example, FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by

(H14)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(H15)
The gaming machine according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The light emission aspect of the first light emission means may be the same light emission aspect in both the first state and the second state, and the light emission aspect of the second light emission means may be the first state and the second state The light emission mode may be the same in both states.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means may be a light emission mode different in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The light emission mode of the second light emission means may be a light emission mode different from the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emission.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by separate covers.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the second movable means.
The second movable means may be located rearward of the first movable means.
The second light emitting means may be means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, or both may be single color LEDs, one may be single color LEDs and the other may be full color LEDs, one is It may be a high brightness LED and the other an ordinary LED.
A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display after the display moves.
A transmissive liquid crystal display may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-It may be provided with a transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count advance counting.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to the digestion of the holding icon indicating the movement of the movable object.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating the movement of the movable object.
-The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice, or may be performed as a prefetch notice Good.

(I1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A structure (eg, structure 247);
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani) at a first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (for example, see FIG. 95 (c)).
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 95)
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may be overlapped with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 95C).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of changing the direction of watching the game stand to play a game, and to improve the player's interest.

(I2)
It is the game stand described in i1,
The structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 104)
The first indication displayed at the first position is an indication which is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the structure.
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I3)
The game console described in i1 or i2,
The display means is a movable display means.
The first display displayed at the first position is a display which is not overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I4)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (e.g., a central portion of a display area);
The first display displayed at the second position is a display not overlapping the structure (see, for example, FIG. 95 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I5)
The game console described in i4,
The first indication may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 95).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the first display can be changed, and in some cases, the player's interest can be improved.

(I6)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 95).
A game stand characterized by

  The appearance of the advance notice may be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I7)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(I8)
A game console according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display. It may be a character display or an error display.
The first indication displayed in the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the movement of the display means.
The structure may comprise display means, may comprise an LED substrate and may be movable.
The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the transmissive liquid crystal display.
The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be performed behind the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.
(Drawing)
Example of moving from the first position where the warning indication is overlapped to the structure to the second position not overlapping, the second position not overlapping from the first position where the warning indication is overlapped to the structure Of moving to the first position again after moving to the second position, and the third to be overlapped to the other structure after moving from the first position where the notice is overlapped to the structure to the second position not overlapping. Move to the position ・ Example of moving to the fifth position not overlapped after moving to the first position overlapped from the fourth position where the warning display is not overlapped to the structure ・ Example where the warning display is always partially seen ・An example in which a notice display is displayed at a first position where it is overlapped with the structure, and another notice display moves to a second position where it does not overlap, and the notice display is The other notice display is moved to the first position. The notice display moves from the first position where it is overlapped to the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display is first. Examples of visual notice ・ Example of giving notice of notice notice before displaying notice notice at the first position overlapped by a structure, Example of notice notice showing enlarged ・ Display notice notice at the second position , Or the display of the second position is hidden by moving the structure or moving the display means (j1)
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
While displaying the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first animation” (for example, moving animation of the advance notice m1) may be displayed,
After the display of the first animation, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous fluctuation) may be performed in the decorative symbol fluctuation display (for example, see FIG. 106).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2)
It is the game stand described in j1, and
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a change icon.
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of the hold icon and the change icon.

(J3)
It is a game console described in j1 or j2, and
The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 115 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j3, wherein
The first animation is an animation including moving display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) to (i)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j4, wherein
The first animation is an animation including reduced display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j5, wherein
The first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 106 (j) and (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7)
It is the gaming machine described in j6,
The increase display in one of the icons may be displayed multiple times (see, for example, FIG. 110).
A game stand characterized by

  Sometimes you can enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(J8)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j7, wherein
The first effect display is a pseudo continuous change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 106 (h)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j8, wherein
The first effect display is a reach change display in the decorative symbol change display (see, for example, FIG. 112 (j)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein
The first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j10, wherein
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, the special view 1, 2 reserved icon display area 208ab) (for example, refer to FIG. 107 (f)).
During at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon in which a character string “in preparation” is displayed) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, Fig. 107 (g)),
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's attention may be drawn to the display of the icon display area.

(J12)
The gaming machine according to any one of j1 to j11, wherein
While displaying the decorative symbol variation display, an animation (hereinafter referred to as "second animation") by two or more of the icons may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 115 (f)).
The first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the second animation (see, for example, FIG. 115 (h)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons.

(J13)
A game console according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
-The icons may move so that nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, and other icons are moved and displayed (packed) May be
-When the icon is moved to the original icon display area and then displayed again (return display), the increase display may be performed, or may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or other icon displays It may be displayed to dismiss.
-The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, may be erased (destructed), or may be shifted from the fluctuation display to the variable display, or temporarily stop the special symbol in the middle symbol It is also good.
The first effect display may not be performed after the first animation.
A plurality of first animations may be performed during one decorative symbol variation display.
A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon between a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be performed more easily in the case of the full hold than in the non-full case, and vice versa.
-A notice may be displayed indicating that the first animation is to be performed.
A count advance notice (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the change icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(Drawing)
FIGS. 106 to 115 are examples in which the holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol while the swing symbol of the out-of-the-round symbol fluctuates, and the decorative symbol variation display is re-fluctuated (simulated).
FIG. 107 shows an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on the holding base while the holding icon is moving. FIG. 108 is an example in which when the hold icon is moving, the back hold icon is packed and returns to the original position when coming back.
FIG. 109 is an example of a caste effect that does not develop even if the hold icon is hit.
FIG. 110 is an example in which the same pending icon performs the first animation multiple times in one change.
FIG. 111 is an example in which different pending icons perform the first animation in one change.
FIG. 112 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 113 is an example in which the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 114 is an example in which the same held icon collides with multiple changes and develops into reach.
FIG. 115 is an example in which a plurality of suspension icons simultaneously reach the decorative pattern to reach.

(K1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, refer to FIG. 117 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
At least a portion of the first display area may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, it is possible to concentrate on the game and improve the player's interest.

(K2)
The game console described in k1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation upward)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3)
The game console described in k2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4)
The game console described in k2 or k3,
After the display of another moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. The display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (b) and (c)),
In the first moving animation and the third moving animation, the moving direction of the first balloon display may be different (see, for example, FIG. 117).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the moving direction different depending on the moving animation.

(K5)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k4, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display and at least a portion of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k5, wherein
At least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k6, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 134 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(K8)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k7, wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

(K9)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(K10)
A game console according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

(Drawing)
FIG. 116 is an example of a conversation notice.
-Fig. 117 shows an example of the conversation notice-horizontal movement of the appearance animation, vertical movement when the new speech balloon appears (vertical animation of the new speech balloon and animation of the old speech balloon simultaneously).
FIG. 118 is an example of conversation notice. The animation moving laterally, the animation when the new speech balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (a variation of timing, an animation of a new speech balloon after an animation of an old speech balloon).
FIG. 119 shows an example of a conversation notice. An animated character moves horizontally, and an animation when a new speech balloon appears is an example of moving vertically (a variation of timing, an animation of an old speech balloon after an animation of a new speech balloon).
FIG. 120 is an example of the speech advance notice, an example of the vertical movement of the appearing animation, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from the normal half and double.
FIG. 121 shows an example of a conversation announcement, an example in which a lost character returns, and an example in which the content changes when the character returns.
FIG. 122 is an example of a speech advance notice. An example in which a specific balloon (for example, a balloon with a high degree of expectation) is not deleted.
FIG. 123 is an example of the speech advance notice.
FIG. 124 is an example of a speech notice. An example of an old speech balloon being reduced.
FIG. 125 shows an example of conversation announcement, an example in which a balloon of the same character continues continuously, an example in which a balloon is expanded, and an example in which the content of a balloon is out of a balloon.
-Fig. 126 is an example of a speech advance notice-An example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
-Fig. 127 is an example of conversation announcement-An example in which the balloon moves with the movable body operating.
-Fig. 128 is an example of conversation announcement-An example in which the balloon moves in a state where the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
FIG. 129 is an example of the speech balloon moving with the first display being displayed.
FIG. 130 is an example of a conversation notice. A balloon is an example of a prefetch notice (a hold icon is changed to a look-ahead icon).
FIG. 131 is an example of an announcement of conversation and an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on different display means.
FIG. 132 is an example of the speech advance notice, in which the speech balloon is moved to another display means.
FIG. 133 shows an example of the speech advance notice, and an example in which the balloon is displayed over a plurality of changes.

(L1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, refer to FIG. 117 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
While the second balloon display is displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  By displaying the first balloon display in another display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, the player can easily grasp the relevance of the two balloon displays, so that it is possible to concentrate on the game and make the player's interest It can be improved.

(L2)
It is the game stand described in l1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as “first moving animation” (for example, moving animation upward)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d ), (E)),
After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3)
It is the gaming machine described in l1 or l2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving to the left)).
After the second movement animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 117 (f)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's interest may be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l3,
At least a portion of the first balloon display and at least a portion of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases in which the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l4,
At least a portion of the first balloon display may overlap at least a portion of the second balloon display (see, for example, FIG. 117 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There may be a case where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(L6)
A game console according to any one of l1 to l5, wherein
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of the lord),
The character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 134 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  The balloon display of the same character may be displayed continuously to increase the player's sense of expectation.

(L7)
A game console according to any one of l1 to l6, wherein
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

  There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

(L8)
A game console according to any one of l1 to l7, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, refer to FIG. 120 (q)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, see FIG. 120 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 120 (q)).
A game stand characterized by

  In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced by making the width of the balloon display different.

(L9)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(L10)
It is a game console according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

Note that
The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, an open ball display).
In the balloon display, a part may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may occur simultaneously or sequentially.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.
-It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played reversely or appearing animation after the erase animation is performed).
-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold or rainbow, and the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
-When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain, and the other balloon display (the balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may disappear preferentially.
The balloon display may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or the characters of the balloon display may be displayed out of the frame of the balloon display.
The balloon display may disappear without the operation of the operation means.
The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
-You may give advance notice with balloon display.
-A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, or a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or from one of the display means and the second display means The balloon display may move to display, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

  Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.

  Note that each event (each effect) can be a combination of part or all of a certain event (some effect) and part or all of another event (other effect).

  Each event (each effect) may be performed in series or in parallel.

  Each event (each effect) may only be performed in series.

  Each event (each effect) may only be performed in parallel.

  Here, execution in series means that an event (some effect) ends and another event (an other effect) starts, and execution in parallel means an event (or ) And other events (other effects) at the same time, the start timing and end timing of a certain event (some effects), and the start timing of other events (other effects) A combination of the and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

  Also, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or in series only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by state .

  The certain state may be a state in which transition is made by a player operation, or a state in which transition is made without a player operation (for example, transition is made without a player operation after a player operation If you do, it may be the final trigger or the first trigger.)

  Here, "to shift without using the player's operation" may shift based on a lottery, or may be shifted to correspond to the control state, or a combination of both. It may be

  Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the player's advantage, or may be a lottery not related to the player.

  Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the degree of advantage for the player, or a state not related to the degree of advantage for the player (for example, control state 1 and control state 2) And the degree of advantage to the player may or may not be different.

  Specifically describing the state in which the degree of advantage for the player is different, if there is a difference between the control state 1 and the control state 2 that the user is staying in the control state N, then the user is in fact staying. There are cases where the degree of advantage does not differ, and there may be differences in the degree of advantage in the state after the stay, which may be either.

  The image used in the description of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation, and of course, it may be another image, for example, an image of a tombstone (male character) It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).

  In addition, even if the image for explaining a certain effect and the image for explaining another effect are the same image, the image for explaining another effect is replaced with another image, and Other renditions can also be performed in parallel and / or in series.

  In addition, in the case where an image for explaining a certain effect and an image for explaining another effect are the same image, it is possible to carry out alternatively instead of enabling parallel and / or serial execution. It is also good.

  In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach effect production) and the place is the same (for example, both the hold display areas).

  Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, it may be performed in series in the first half and the second half of the super reach, or even in the same place, it may be parallel in different places. You may run in series or in the first half of the Super Reach in the same place.

  Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (representation means).

  A certain means (rendering means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plurality devices).

  Each event (each effect) performed in each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed in one device (an effect device).

  Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

  As devices (rendering devices), display devices such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable objects 700, 702, etc. The movable body of

  In addition, there may be a case where one device (rendering device) is described as an example for each event (each effect). For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (rendering device) capable of notifying Is possible.

  Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

  Moreover, when it is configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

  Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely illustrated, and even if only one of the events (each effect) has a configuration, the other may have its configuration. Or the combination may be possible, or the combination may be possible after deleting a configuration provided only on one side.

  Also, the combination may be denied depending on the difference in configuration.

  FIGS. 137 to 158 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 137 to 158, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 137 to 158, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the transparent light guide plate IL described above is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the family crest 224E is disposed, but other effect movable bodies 224 are provided. A POV display or the like may be arranged.

  FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of an example of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are displayed. Each h13 is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) is the non-power support state (non-shorting state) Therefore, it is because it is in a state where winning of the special figure 2 start opening 232 is difficult because the electric chew is difficult to open.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the special view 2 hold The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -4), the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the reach state is reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which weak sabothani group preliminary notice is performed in which the number of sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the strong sabohani group preliminary notice It is done. Although the weak sabothani group warning is more reliable than the case where the sabohani group warning is not given, it is less reliable than the strong sabothani group warning is given. In addition, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is also notified that it will develop into a super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of an enemy character face each other. . At this time, in the vicinity of the navi character YM, the characters “Kenou reach” are displayed, and the type of super reach is notified.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It is notified that the advance notice by the effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "normal button effect") is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “press” are displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4), with the decorative symbol display device 208, Along with the up image, a cut-in image is displayed that includes a balloon image in which the word "match" is placed in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not decorated around the character of "match" in the balloon, and the big hit is more than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is suggested that the reliability of Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the word "chance", and a feeling of expectation for a big hit is given.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -5), the family crest 224E is lifted, and the upper end portion overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves up and down to judge whether it will be a big hit or not It is shown that the pre-productions are being performed. In the present embodiment, the effect by the effect movable body using the family crest product 224E is performed as the turning effect before the judge, but the turning effect display before the judge is performed by the display effect by the decorative symbol display device 208 It is also good.

  However, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character loses to the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect directing operation by the family crest 224E is finished, and the family crest 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thus, in this example of production, as a result of the effect button 136 being operated in the button effect by the effect button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and then the effect movable body (family crest item 224E) It is shown that a combination of a decorative symbol of out is displayed without performing a judgment effect of the big hit decision by.

  FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -3) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4), it is not the display of the cut-in image It is shown that a new button effect is started. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and in the button effect in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), the rendering button 136 It is another button effect started with an event of being operated. The super projecting button image 136aS is a button image represented in a mode in which the character button "is pressed" is added to the lower side together with the brow character schematically representing an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward. is there. Further, at this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters “superheat” are displayed, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is high. That is, when this super projecting button effect is performed, it is suggested that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than the normal button effect. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the presentation button 136 protrudes, the presentation button 136 may vibrate, or may vibrate and rotate. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that character strings are different between the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the normal button effect and the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the super projecting button effect. In addition, the wording that directly instructs “press” on effect button 136 may be another word, for example, in the first button effect, the character display of “press” is displayed and then executed. In the second button effect, the character display of "super press" may be displayed, the character display of "hard push" may be displayed, and the character display of "one blow" may be displayed. In addition, when the super projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, in this example of effect, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is a position different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, and the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display operation of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, but the first button button When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of the 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown. As the judge effect, there is prepared a jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot is determined, and an out-of-judge effect indicating that the jackpot is to be released. Note that the off-judge effect may be an effect that is determined to be an off-state, or may be an effect that may result in a big hit due to a reverse effect. That is, in this example of the effects, it can be said that the judgment effect is an effect that indicates whether a big hit will be made. In this big hit finalized judgment effect, the family crest 224E rises to a position overlapping with the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light to display an image resembling a face of a tombstone An effect that appears superimposed on the display device 208 is performed. Thereby, it is notified that it is a big hit decision. In addition, this judgment production is not limited to what is started by the button operation in the button production, and may be executed, for example, after the pre-judgment role turning production. In addition, the judgment effect may be performed following the other types of effects listed in the present embodiment, or the judgment effect may be suddenly started without any advance notice. Also, the judgment effect is performed before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed, but may be started at a timing other than before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed, for example, a decorative symbol change display It may be executed at the timing immediately after the start of. In addition, the judgment effect may be performed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, for example, by executing during the big hit game, it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game will be a definite change state It may be made to do, and it may be made to alert that a reservation continuation chan occurs.

  Then, after the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, when there is an operation of the effect button 136 in the first button effect, the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and a new button effect (super projecting button effect) in which the effect button 136 is projected. Is started, and pressing the projecting effect button 136 in this button effect performs a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed and becomes a big hit It is shown.

  Further, in this example, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the second button is operated in the first button effect than when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It is shown that the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the effect is started.

  FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (3) -2) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -2). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is in progress, and it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -4), a state is shown during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation valid period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the word "chance", and a feeling of expectation for a big hit is given.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -6), a pre-judge role turning effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect directing operation by the family crest 224E is finished, and the family crest 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thus, in this production example, when the operation effective period passes without the production button 136 being operated in the button production by the production button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and then the production is movable It is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols of the outset is displayed without the determination of the jackpot determination by the body (family crest item 224E) being performed.

  FIG. 138 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of another effect pattern of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 138 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -4) are the same as FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  After the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, when the operation effective period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -5), no effect is displayed. Super reach will continue without being noticed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -6), a pre-judge role turning effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed. "Decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed at the center, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect directing operation by the family crest 224E is finished, and the family crest 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “losing 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the operation response effect by the effect button 136 is not executed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the button effect by the effect button 136. And after that, the combination of the decorative symbol of the outset is displayed, without performing the judgment of the big hit decision by a production movable body (household character 224E).

  FIG. 139 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 139 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (A (3) -3) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -4), it is not the display of the cut-in image It is shown that a new button effect is started. This button effect is a deca-button effect in which the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, and that the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIG. 139 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 139 (A (3) -3). It is another button effect started with the trigger. The large button image 136aL is a button image that is larger in size than the button image 136a in the default mode and is displayed over the entire display screen. When this deca-button effect is performed, it suggests that it is likely to be a big hit (i.e., a big-hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than the normal button effect. In the present embodiment, the super projecting button effect is more likely to be a big hit than the deca button effect, but the deca button effect is more likely to be a big hit. You may do so. In addition, when the deca-button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at a position overlapping the approximate center of the deca-button image 136aL, which may make it easier to pay attention to the remaining time display meter MT. . The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -6) It is shown to start.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of the crown is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” and “decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, a new button effect (decabutton effect) in which the deca-button image 136aL is displayed is started. When the is operated, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) is operated, and then a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is displayed and it is shown that it becomes the big hit.

  FIG. 139 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of another effect pattern of button effects performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 139 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (B (3) -3) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4), it is not the display of the cut-in image It is shown that the lever effect is started. That is, it is shown that an effect of requesting an operation of an operation means (effect lever 136V) different from the effect button 136 is performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "superheat" are displayed, which suggests that the degree of reliability is high. That is, this lever effect is a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 139 (B (3) -3). It is an effect using another operation means that is started with the event. The lever image 136Va is an image simulating the effect lever 136V. If this lever effect is performed, it is suggested that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than the normal button effect. In the present embodiment, when the lever effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than when the super protrusion button effect is performed, but when the super protrusion button effect is performed is a large hit It may be easy to become. When the lever button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -6) It is shown to start.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of the crown is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed, and the lever effect using another operation means is newly started. When the effect lever 136V is operated, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed to be a big hit.

  FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the button effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. (A (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) In the effect pattern, an effect pattern to be performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. Note that FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) are the same as FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -2). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is in progress, and it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -4), there is shown a state immediately before the operation effective period elapses during the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -5), the effect of super reach continues without any effect being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -6), a pre-judge role turning effect is performed.

  In this production example, since it is a production pattern for which a judgment production is scheduled to be carried out, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -7), a judgment production for a big hit is made after the production before the judge is carried out. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -8) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation effective period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but the effect movable body (family crest product 224E It is shown that there is a case in which a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed to be a big hit. In the case of this effect example, when there is an operation of the effect button 136 during the operation effective period of the first button effect, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) The super projecting button effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIG. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) In the effect pattern, another effect pattern is shown which is performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect. Note that FIG. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (3) -4) are the same as FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5), when the operation effective period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136 after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character of "match" is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the image of the close-up of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of (for example, nine) face faces are arranged around the character of "match" in the balloon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed, and it is informed that the strong cut-in image CI1a having a high reliability of the big hit than the weak cut-in is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -6), a pre-judge role turning effect is performed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Tsu" are displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  In this production example, since it is a production pattern for which a judgment production is scheduled to be carried out, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -7), a judgment production for a big hit is made after the production before the judge production is carried out. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -8) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation effective period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but in place of this, the cut-in image is An effect to be displayed is performed. After that, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) is operated is performed, and thereafter, a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed, and it may be shown that there may be a big hit. In the case of this effect example, when there is an operation of the effect button 136 during the operation effective period of the first button effect, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) The super projecting button effect shown in FIG. In this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the production button 136 being operated in the first button production, but the weak cut-in image CI1b May be displayed.

  FIG. 141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIG. 141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. (A (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) In the effect pattern, another effect pattern is shown which is performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect. Note that FIG. 141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (A (3) -4) are the same as FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -5), when the operation effective period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136 after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts. It is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again and the button effect is started again. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect. At this time, the button image 136a which is the default mode is continuously displayed, and further, the character "One more chance" is displayed above the display screen, and it is informed that the second button effect is started. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character, the characters "always press" are displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is strongly promoted. Thereafter, the second operation valid period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -6), as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -7), the state of the judgment effect of the big hit determination being started It is shown. Thereby, it is notified that it is a big hit decision.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -8) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hits of the“ decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thus, in this production example, when the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button production and the operation effective period passes, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again, and the button production is started again It is shown. That is, it is shown that the second button effect may be started when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in the second button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed and it becomes a big hit It is shown.

  FIG. 141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -1). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -1), after being developed into a super reach (Kenou reach), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a protrusion button effect in which a protrusion button image 136aP1 is displayed instead of the button image 136a of the default display mode is started. The projecting button image 136aP1 is a schematic representation of an aspect in which the effect button 136 projects upward, but unlike the super projecting button image 136aS, it is an aspect in which no indigo character is added. When this projecting button effect is performed, it is suggested that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than the normal button effect. In addition, the super protruding button effect is more likely to be a big hit when the protruding button effect is performed than the case where the protruding button effect is performed, but is made easier to be a big hit when the protruding button effect is performed. Or the jackpot reliability may be the same. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "press" are displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the projecting button effect is performed by the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is different from the case where the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed or the case where the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, When the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started, but after the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started The protrusion button effect may be started, or the protrusion button effect may be started after the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -4), a new button effect is started The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and in the projecting button effect in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 141 (B (3) -3). It is another button effect started when triggered by the operation of. Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pressed once, the effect button 136 is projected upward again, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. In this example, if the effect button 136 is protruded in the protrusion button effect as the first button effect, the effect button 136 does not vibrate, and the effect button 136 in the super protrusion button effect as the second button effect The effect button 136 may be vibrated in the case where the button protrudes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, which suggests that the jackpot has a high reliability.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display operation of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, but the first button button When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of the 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, in the first button effect, not the button image 136 as the default mode but the protruding button image 136aP1 of the mode in which the effect button protrudes is displayed and the protrusion in which the effect button 136 protrudes When a button effect is performed, and the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed during execution of the projecting button effect, a new button effect (super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the rendering button 136 is projected again ) Is started, and pressing the projecting effect button 136 in this button effect performs a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed and becomes a big hit The situation is shown.

  FIG. 142 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 142 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -1), after being developed into a super reach (sword reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a super protruding button effect is started in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed instead of the button image 136a of the default display mode. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "press" are displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the super projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the super protrusion button effect is started and the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, but the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started Thereafter, the super projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the super projecting button effect is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -4), a new button effect is started The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button in the super projecting button effect in FIG. 142 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 142 (A (3) -3). It is another button effect started with the operation of the key 136. That is, it is shown that the super projecting button effect is performed again as the second button effect in response to the operation of the operation button in the super projecting button effect as the first button effect. At this time, although the effect button 136 has been pressed once, the effect button 136 is projected upward again, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, which suggests that the jackpot has a high reliability. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the super projection button effect rather than the case where the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the projection button effect and the super projection button effect is started. If the button effect is performed again, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed in the final display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the super projecting button effect. The jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the protrusion button effect to start the super protrusion button effect than when the protrusion button effect is performed again. The case where the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the super projecting button effect and the super projecting button effect is performed again, and Performance button 136 during the execution of the output button effect is operated in the case of super-protruding button effect is started, it may be a reliability of jackpot are the same.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display operation of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, but the first button button When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of the 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “concert 2-decor 2-sub 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, in the first button effect, not the button effect by the button image 136 which is the default mode but the super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button 136aS is displayed is performed, and this super projecting button If there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 during execution of the effect, a new super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected again is started, and the effect button projected in this button effect is started When the user pushes the key 136, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed to show that the big hit will be made.

  FIG. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -1). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -1), after being developed into a super reach (sword reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly projecting button effect is started in which the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a of the default display mode. Although this weakly projecting button image 136aP2 schematically represents an aspect in which the effect button 136 is projected upward, the size is smaller than the projecting button image 136aP1. When the weakly projecting button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect, but it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the protruding button effect is performed. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "press" are displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the weakly projecting button effect is performed by the display of the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In the case where the weakly projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, in this example of effect, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is the same position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, but may be displayed at a different position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the weak protrusion button effect is started and the display of the weak protrusion button image 136aP2 is started, but the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started After that, the weakly projecting button effect may be started, or after the weakly projecting button effect is started and the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 is started to be displayed, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is depressed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and in the weak projecting button effect in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 142 (B (3) -3) It is another button effect started with the operation of the key 136. Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pressed once, the effect button 136 is projected upward again, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, which suggests that the jackpot has a high reliability.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display operation of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, but the first button button When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of the 136aS is started. In the present embodiment, the weak protrusion button effect does not vibrate the effect button 136, and the super protrusion button effect vibrates the effect button 136, but the weak protrusion button effect also vibrates the effect button 136 It may be performed or vibration of the effect button 136 may not be performed in the super projecting button effect.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 of the aspect in which the effect button is projected is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected, not the button image 136 which is the default aspect. A weakly projecting button effect is performed, and when the depressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed during the execution of the weakly projecting button effect, a new button effect (super image in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 is projected again When the projecting button effect) is started and the projecting effect button 136 is depressed in this button effect, the judgment effect that the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed It is shown that it becomes a big hit.

  FIG. 143 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 143 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (A (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -1). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -1), after being developed into a super reach (sword reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device At 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly projecting button effect is started in which the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a of the default display mode. In the weakly projecting button effect in this rendering example, the blue effect EFB in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 emits light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in blue. In the point, the mode is different from the weakly projecting button effect shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2). At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "press" are displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4), a new button effect is started The situation is shown. This button effect is a protrusion button effect in which the protrusion button image 136aP1 is displayed, and in the weak protrusion button effect in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 143 (A (3) -3), the effect button 136 It is another button effect started with an event of being operated. In the projecting button effect in this rendering example, the red effect EFR in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the projecting button image 136aP1 is illuminated in red is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. The aspect is different from the projecting button effect shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2). Further, at this time, although the effect button 136 has been pressed once, the effect button 136 is projected upward again, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, which suggests that the jackpot has a high reliability.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started, but the first button effect When the effect button 136 is operated in, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the protrusion button effect may be started, or the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after being done.

  After that, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “happiness 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, not the button image 136 which is the default mode but the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 in which the effect button projects and light is emitted with the blue effect is displayed. A weakly projecting button effect in which the button 136 is projected is performed, and when there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 during the execution of the weakly projecting button effect, a projecting button image 136aP1 which emits light with a red effect is displayed and the effect button 136 When a new button effect (projecting button effect) is projected again and a protruding effect button 136 is depressed in this button effect, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates, and then a big hit The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed and it is shown that it becomes a big hit.

  FIG. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Examples of effects shown in FIG. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. (B (4) -2) It is an effect pattern different from the effect pattern, and the button effect is not started even at the timing when the first button effect is started, and the effect pattern in which the button effect is started after being delayed for a predetermined time is shown There is. Note that FIG. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (B (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -1). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -1), after being developed into a super reach (sword reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2), the first button is displayed. It is shown that the button effect is not started even when the effect is started. Further, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which produces an uncomfortable feeling that the first button effect is not started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -3), if the first button effect is started, the operation effective period is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the “button is” and a question A mark is displayed, suggesting that the first button presentation has not been started.

  Thereafter, the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -4). This button effect is a super protruding button effect in which the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed, and the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started, but after that, the button effect (super It is shown that the projecting button effect may be started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Kitter" are displayed, and it is shown that the user is waiting for the button effect to be started. In this effect example, the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect starts, and is delayed for a predetermined time to start the button effect, so that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In addition, when the button effect is delayed and started as in this effect example, the super projecting button effect may be always started. In this case, it may be a big hit.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -6), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hits of the“ decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and the button effect (super projecting button effect) is performed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (delayed). When this button effect is started and a projecting effect button 136 is depressed, a judgment effect that the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of a big hit decorative symbol is displayed and it becomes a big hit It is shown.

  FIG. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, when the button operation is performed in the first button effect and the second button effect is started, an animation in which the aspect of the button image gradually changes is performed. Note that FIG. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , And the button animation is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -6), the button image 136a is displayed after an animation is displayed in a gradually projecting manner, and then the button image 136a is projected. A state of transformation into a button image 136aP1 is shown. At this time, a red effect EFR in a mode of emitting red light is displayed around the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT also shows a state in which the gauge portion turns red and the remaining amount of the gauge increases, and becomes full at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6). . This produces an effect that the second button effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -7), the projecting button effect as the second button effect is started. This projecting button effect is another button effect which is started when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3). is there. In the projecting button effect in this rendering example, the red effect EFR in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface portion of the projecting button image 136aP1 emits light in red is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state of being protruded, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “press” are displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect to start button animation, and the effect button 136 is protruded at the timing when the button animation ends and the second button effect as the button effect starts. Although the operation is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 may be started at the timing when the button animation starts, or the protrusion of the effect button 136 after the protrusion button effect as the second button effect is started The operation may be started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -8), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -9), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -10) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the button animation is started and the button image changes, and when the change of the button image is completed, the second button effect (protruding button It is shown how the production is started. Then, when the projecting effect button 136 is depressed in the projecting button effect as the second button effect, the judgment effect that the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed It is shown that it becomes a big hit. In addition, the button animation mentioned above is not limited to what is performed only in this presentation example, You may perform also in another presentation example.

  In the present embodiment, two button states, the normal button state, which is the default state, and the button protruding state are described as the button mode. For example, as illustrated in (a) of FIG. While the state is the default state, the effect button 136 as shown in (b) of FIG. (B) may be vibrated as another state, or the state of (B) in FIG. The effect button 136 as shown in (c) may vibrate and may be further rotated. That is, when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (a) of FIG. 144 (B) is the first state, the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) can also be referred to as a second state, or in the case where the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) of (B) can also be referred to as a second state.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 145 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are shown. Each is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 It is because it is a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special view 2 Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device 212 The symbol variation display in is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -3), a state is shown in which the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed by being reduced at the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed, which suggests that some effect is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4), it is shown that the "dice slot game" which is one of the mini games is started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “mini game” are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "shake the dice with a button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation effective period to display the dice It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (pattern) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, it is shown that the notice effect corresponding to the combination of the dice is started. Specifically, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4), when the combination of the outcome of the dice of “4-5-6” is displayed, the preview notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes Is started, and when the combination of the outcome of the "5-5-5" dice is displayed, stocking of a button icon that announces that the button effect will be started is performed, and the "1-1-1" When the combination of the result of the dice is displayed, it becomes a notification that it is a notice of intense heat. In addition, combinations of other dice may be displayed, and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -5), the variable display of three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice in the variable display. Also, the characters “three consecutive strokes” are displayed above the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the lapse of the operation effective period. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “start” are displayed to notify that the mini game has been started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -6), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -7), the variation display in the left row The symbol of the dice is stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three-stroke” to “two-stroke” and urges the effect button 136 to be operated two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -8), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -9), variation display is being performed in the middle row The symbol of the dice is stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", and urges one more operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -10), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -11), the variation display is in the right column. The symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -12), the characters “button stock confirmed!” Are displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN is “× 1” on the right side of the navigation character YM. A letter and a letter of "standby" are displayed, and it is notified that the button effect is started at least once.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -13), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -1) Reach condition is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which a weak sabothani group advance notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “Activate!” Are displayed, and it is informed that the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -3) to FIG. ((3) -4), a button effect start animation of moving to the center of the display screen while the button icon BTN is enlarged is displayed. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -5), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “press” are displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the weak cut-in image CI1b Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the word "chance", and a feeling of expectation for a big hit is given.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -8), the crest 224E moves up, and the upper end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps and moves up and down to become a big hit before the judge A turn around feature is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy player, and the defeated screen is displayed, and the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The “decoration 3” which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the pre-judgment effect directing operation by the family crest 224E is finished, and the family crest 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" It is shown. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, a button icon for anticipating that the button effect will be performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon is digested It is shown that the button effect is performed.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating the step effects of another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. In the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 146 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the three special views 1 are shown. Each is displayed in the default display mode (round no pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start opening 232 It is because it is a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special view 2 Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  Further, in this effect example, the character of "x 1" and the character of "standby" are displayed together with the button icon BTN on the right side of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button effect is started at least once. Ru. That is, stocking of the button icon BTN is performed before the previous symbol variation display, and it is shown that a pre-reading notice is given.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the first special view display device 212 The symbol variation display in is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -3), a state is shown in which the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed by being reduced at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4), it is shown that the "dice slot game" which is one of the mini games is started. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "shake the dice with a button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation effective period to display the dice It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (pattern) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, it is shown that the notice effect corresponding to the combination of the dice is started. Specifically, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4), when the combination of the outcome of the dice of “4-5-6” is displayed, the preview notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes Is started, and when the combination of the outcome of the "5-5-5" dice is displayed, stocking of a button icon that announces that the button effect will be started is performed, and the "1-1-1" When the combination of the result of the dice is displayed, it becomes a notification that it is a notice of intense heat. In addition, combinations of other dice may be displayed, and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice in the variable display. Also, the characters “three consecutive strokes” are displayed above the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the lapse of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -6), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -7), the variation display in the left row The symbol of the dice is stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three-stroke” to “two-stroke” and urges the effect button 136 to be operated two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -8), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -9), the variation display in the middle row The symbol of the dice is stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", and urges one more operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -10), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -11), the variation display is in the right column. The symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -12), the characters “Button stock confirmed!” Are displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM is 1 It is also notified that the display of the character “x1” indicating the stocking is changed to “x2” and that the button effect is started at least twice.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -13), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -1) Reach condition is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the weak sagohani group advance notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character of the main character and the sword superior of the enemy character face each other is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2), a character of “Activated!” Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and “× 2” indicating the stock number of the button icon BTN. The character display of “changes to“ × 1 ”, and it is informed that one button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -3) to FIG. 146 ((3) -4), a button effect start animation in which the button icon BTN moves to the center of the display screen while being enlarged is displayed. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -5), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, the character of "press" is displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -7), a new button effect is displayed instead of the display of the cut-in image. Is shown to start. This button effect is a deca-button effect in which the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, and that the effect button 136 has been operated in the button effect in FIG. 146 ((3) -5) to FIG. 146 (A (3) -6). It is another button effect started as an opportunity. At this time, the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136 changes, for example, the light emitted in blue in the first button effect is red when the second button effect is started. It emits light.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -8), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -9), the judgment effect of the big hit determination is started Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -10) On the device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the hostile swordsman, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, near the navigation character YM, the character "x 1" and the character "standby" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". ing. At this time, the effect EF1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM so as to cover the entire button icon BTN, and it is shown that the effect of erasing the button icon BTN is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hits of the“ decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. In this embodiment, when stock of the button icon BTN is left when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the stock is deleted but the stock of the button icon BTN is displayed without being deleted. It is also good. Further, as described above, the timing at which the button icon BTN is erased is not limited to one performed during the swing fluctuation, and may be, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or after the big hit game is ended.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for predicting that the button effect will be performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is performed. It is shown that the button effect is performed after being digested. Further, in this production example, by operating the production button 136 in the first button production, a new button production (deca-button production) is started, and when the production button 136 is operated in this button production, the production movable body It is shown that a judge effect is produced in which the (family crest product 224E) operates, and then the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is displayed to be a big hit. Further, in this example of rendering, although button rendering is performed twice, it is shown that only one button icon BTN is digested. The button icon BTN may be digested one by one each time the button effect is performed.

  FIG. 147 is a view illustrating the step effects of another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 147 ((1) -1) to FIG. 147 ((3) -6) are the same as FIG. 146 ((1) -1) to FIG. 146 ((3) -6), and therefore I omit it. Further, as shown in FIG. 147 ((1) -1), also in this example of presentation, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon straddles a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that stock display of BTN is performed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -7), a new button effect is started It is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect in FIG. 147 ((3) -5) to FIG. 147 ((3) -6) It is another button effect started with the event. When this super projecting button effect is performed, it is suggested that a big hit is likely to occur (that is, a big hit symbol is likely to be determined and displayed) than when a normal button effect or a deca-button effect is performed. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, when the super projecting button effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the display operation of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started, but the first button button When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image The projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the display of the 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -8), as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -9), the appearance of the judgment effect of the big hit decision being started It is shown. In this judgment effect, the crest 224E rises to a position overlapping with the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light so that an image resembling a martial arts face is the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect that appears on top of is performed. Thereby, it is notified that it is a big hit decision.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -10) On the device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the hostile swordsman, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, near the navigation character YM, the character "x 1" and the character "standby" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased but is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this example of production, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation indication after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that the advance notice of the symbol variation display started after the big hit game is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” and “decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for predicting that the button effect will be performed is stocked, and then one stocked button icon BTN is performed. It is shown that the button effect is performed after being digested. Moreover, in this example of production, by operating the production button 136 in the first button production, a new button production (super projection button production) is started, and when the production button 136 is operated in this button production, the production A judge effect in which a movable body (family crest 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of a decorative symbol of a big hit is displayed to show that it becomes a big hit. Further, in this example of rendering, although button rendering is performed twice, it is shown that only one button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. ((1) -3) are the same as FIG. 146 ((1) -1) to FIG. I omit it. In addition, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -1), also in this example of presentation, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon straddles a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that stock display of BTN is performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4) shows that the "dice slot game" which is one of the mini games is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4), when the combination of the outcome of the dice of “4-5-6” is displayed, the pre-reading notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is started, “ When the combination of the outcome of the 5-5-5 "dice is displayed, stocking of a button icon for anticipating the start of the button effect is performed, and the outcome of the" 1-1-1 "dice is displayed. When the combination is displayed, it is suggested that some advance notice is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -5), the variable display of three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice in the variable display. Also, the characters “three consecutive strokes” are displayed above the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the lapse of the operation effective period.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -6), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -7) The symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed, "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three-stroke” to “two-stroke” and urges the effect button 136 to be operated two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -8), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -9), the variation display in the middle row The symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed, "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", and urges one more operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -10), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -11) The symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed, “1” is displayed, and the combination of the dice of “1-1-1” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -12), the characters "Deca button stock confirmed!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen, and a button of the default mode displayed on the right of the navigation character YM. A projecting button icon BTP is displayed above the icon BTN, and it is notified that the projecting button effect or the super projecting button effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -13), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed at the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -1) Reach condition is formed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues. In this example of presentation, the stored protruding button icon BTP is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and it is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped with the decorative symbol. Here, the protruding button icon BTP may be displayed overlapping the decoration pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the weak sagohani group advance notice is performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the sword adversary of the enemy character face each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -2), a state where super reach continues is shown, but in this example of rendering, the button icon BTN is digested and the button rendering is There is no notification of being started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -3), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP being digested, and the lower side of the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed on the screen, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, the character of "press" is displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -5), it is displayed near the projecting button icon BTP. It is reported that the display of “× 1” changes to the letters “Activate” and the protrusion button icon BTP is digested. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -6) to FIG. ((3) -7), a button effect start animation in which the protrusion button icon BTP moves to the center of the display screen while being enlarged is displayed. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT, which has been displayed below the button image 136a, becomes "0" and display is also performed to move to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the projecting button icon BTP becomes the projecting button image 136aP1 as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -7), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -8) The character “A” is added to change to the super projecting button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super projecting button effect as a new button effect is started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, or may be the timing before the display of the button effect start animation starts, or the button effect start It may be the timing after the start of the animation display and before the completion, or it may be the timing to change to the super projecting button image 136aS after the display of the button effect start animation is completed, or super It may be the timing after changing to the protruding button image 136aS. Note that the presentation start animation may not be displayed, and may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -9), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -10), the jackpot effect of the big hit decision starts It is shown that it is done.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -11) On the device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the hostile swordsman, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, near the navigation character YM, the character "x 1" and the character "standby" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased but is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this example of production, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation indication after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that the advance notice of the symbol variation display started after the big hit game is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” of “decor 2-decor 2-decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, the protruding button icon BTP for predicting that the protruding button effect or the super protruding button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon When the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the button effect started without being digested, it is shown that the stock protrusion button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super protrusion button effect) is performed. ing. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed to show that it becomes a big hit It is done. Further, in this example of rendering, although the button rendering is performed twice, it is shown that only the projecting button icon BTP among the projecting button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 149 ((1) -1) to FIG. 149 ((3) -1) are the same as FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. I omit it. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 ((1) -1), also in this presentation example, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon straddles a plurality of symbol variation displays. It is shown that stock display of BTN is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -2), after the super reach is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “× 1” displayed in the vicinity of the button icon BTN is “activated”. It changes to a character, and it is informed that the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -3), the button icon BTN is erased and the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed without the button effect start animation being executed. At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, the character of "press" is displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -4) to FIG. 149 ((3) -10) are performed. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -4) to FIG. 149 ((3) -10) are similar to those in FIG. 148 ((3), except that the display in which the button icon BTN is stocked is not performed. 4.) It is the same as the effect shown in -4) to FIG.

  After the judge effect shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -10) is finished, the light emission on the light guide plate IL is finished, and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -11), the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "Decoration 2" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". ing. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” and “decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, the protruding button icon BTP for predicting that the protruding button effect or the super protruding button effect is performed is stocked, and then the button icon One BTN is consumed, and the first button effect is started without the button effect start animation being performed. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the stock protrusion button icon BTP is digested and a button effect start animation is performed, and then a new button effect (super protrusion button effect) is performed . Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed to show that it becomes a big hit It is done. That is, in this example of rendering, button rendering is performed twice, but the button icon BTN and the projecting button icon BTP are digested and executed, respectively. Further, in this example of rendering, when the first button rendering is started, which is started by the button icon BTN being digested, the button rendering start animation is not executed, and the projecting button icon BTP is digested and started 2 At the start of the second button effect, it is shown that the button effect start animation is executed. As a result, among the button effects executed a plurality of times, it may be possible to pay attention to a more highly expected effect. In this presentation example, when the first button presentation is started, a button presentation start animation by the button icon BTN may be performed.

  FIG. 150 is a view stepwise showing another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 ((1) -1) to FIG. ((2) -1) are the same as FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. I omit it. Further, as shown in FIG. 150 ((1) -1), also in this example of presentation, the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icon straddles a plurality of symbol variation displays It is shown that stock display of BTN is performed.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -1), weak decorative symbol group notice is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -2) Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and it is shown that the timer notice is started. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “30:00” is displayed as a timer indication, and it is announced that a certain advance notice effect is started in 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen is displayed where the main character of the hero and the swordsman of an enemy character face each other. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is continued, and "28:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -2), it is shown that super reach continues, but in this example of rendering, the button icon BTN is digested and button rendering is started. There is no notification of Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP being digested, and the lower side of the button image 136a. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed on the screen, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, the character of "press" is displayed above the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "17: 88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3).

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -5), it is displayed near the projecting button icon BTP. It is reported that the display of “× 1” changes to the letters “Activate” and the protrusion button icon BTP is digested. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -6) to FIG. 150 ((3) -7), a button effect start animation in which the protrusion button icon BTP moves to the center of the display screen while being enlarged is displayed. At this time, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT, which has been displayed below the button image 136a, becomes "0" and display is also performed to move to the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aL as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -7), a dark blue character is added as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8). It changes to the super projecting button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super projecting button effect as a new button effect is started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing at which the display of the button effect start animation is completed, or may be the timing before the display of the button effect start animation starts, or the button effect start It may be the timing after the start of the animation display and before the completion, or it may be the timing to change to the super projecting button image 136aS after the display of the button effect start animation is completed, or super It may be the timing after changing to the protruding button image 136aS, or it may be the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and it becomes “00:00”. Further, in this example of rendering, although the super protrusion button effect is started as the second button effect, the operation effective period is not started, while the timer display is continued to count down in timer notice display TM1. “04: 17” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8). That is, in this example of production, as a result of the timer display being counted down in timer preliminary display TM1, it is notified that it becomes possible to operate production button 136 in the super projecting button production which is the second button production. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9), movement display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and moves from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center, and the timer notice is the second time. It is suggested that it corresponds to the button effect of. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is also continued, and "02:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9). As a result, there are cases where it is easy to grasp the timing at which a certain advance presentation effect is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -10), when the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and “00:00” is displayed on the timer display, below the super protruding button image 136aS. The characters "Press" are added, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the super projecting button effect as the second button effect is started. The timer notice display TM1 is then erased.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed and operated at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -11), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -12), the jackpot effect of the big hit decision is started It is shown that it is done.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the domed face is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -13) On the device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the hostile swordsman, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed. It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, near the navigation character YM, the character "x 1" and the character "standby" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". ing. Further, in this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is not erased but is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this example of production, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation indication after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that the advance notice of the symbol variation display started after the big hit game is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” of “decor 2-decor 2-decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game performed by the operation of the effect button 136, the protrusion button icon BTP for predicting that the protrusion button effect or the super protrusion button effect is performed is stocked, and further, the reach effect A timer announcement is made when the is started. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started without the button icon being digested, the stock protrusion button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super protrusion button effect) is performed. The situation is shown. Thereafter, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, the operation of the effect button 136 in the second button effect can be performed. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (household character 224E) operates is performed, and then the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is displayed to show that it becomes a big hit It is done. Further, in this example of rendering, although the button rendering is performed twice, it is shown that only the projecting button icon BTP among the projecting button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages an example of selection effects performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -1) are the same as FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -1). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -1), after the super reach effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -2), the selection effect is started The situation is shown. When the selected effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect explanation display MS1 of "Emergency notification! Determine the final judgment effect by the button effect" and notifies that the selected effect is started. The effect description display MS1 is overlapped with the reduced-displayed decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3), the option display SL1 is displayed. In the option display SL1, the button image 136a and the projecting button image 136aP1 in the default mode are displayed side by side, and the display of the mode in which the button image 136a is surrounded by the cursor CSL represented in a square by a blue broken line is displayed. It has been done.

  Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 151 (A (3) -4), in the option display SL1, the cursor CSL is displayed in a mode in which the protruding button image 136aP is enclosed. At this time, the cursor CSL changes its display mode to a red broken line, and the characters "Heat" are displayed on the left and right, and as a result of the selection effect being performed, the projecting button is larger than when the button image 136a is selected. It is reported that a larger hit is likely to occur when the image 136aP1 is selected.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -5), it is shown that the button operation display BT1 is displayed so as to overlap with the option display SL1. In the button operation display BT1, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the word "Press!" Is displayed below the remaining time display meter MT, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. In this selection effect, one of the button image 163a and the protruding button image 137aP1 in the option display SL1 is selected by the operation of the effect button 136.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -6) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -7) In the device 208, the button operation display BT1 is erased, and in the option display SL1, the cursor CSL surrounds the protruding button image 136aP1 to notify that the protruding button image 136aP1 has been selected. That is, it is shown that the projecting button effect is notified of being started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the selection effect is performed as the first button effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect is finished, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this presentation example, a projection button presentation is started in which the projection button image 136aP1 selected in the selection presentation is displayed as the button presentation. In this projecting button effect, the red effect EFR is displayed in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface of the projecting button image 136aP1 emits light in red, and the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is It is expressed in red. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, characters of "superheat" are displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the projecting button effect is performed by the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 and the projecting operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selection effect as the first button effect is displayed is performed as the second button effect. In addition, when this protrusion button effect is performed, you may make it a big hit by all means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started, but after the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started The protrusion button effect may be started, or the protrusion button effect may be started after the protrusion button effect is started and the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 is started.

  Thereafter, when the depression operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -11), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -12) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2” of “decor 2-decor 2-decor 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and the button effect using the button image selected in the selection effect is performed as the second button effect. There is.

  In addition, the button image which can be selected by option display SL1 displayed in the selection effect in the present embodiment is not limited to the one described above, and option display SL1 of a type different from that described above may be displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (I), a selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 including the button image 136a in the default mode and the big button 136aL is displayed, as shown in FIG. 151 (II) In addition, a selection effect may be performed in which the option display SL1 including the button image 136a in the default mode and the lever image 136Va is displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (III), the button image 136a in the default mode. Selection effect may be performed in which an option display SL1 including one, a protrusion button image 136aP1 and a lever image 136Va to be selected from three or more button images is displayed, as shown in FIG. 151 (IV). A gauge is displayed in which the remaining time display meter MT and the button image 136a of the embodiment and the image imitating the face of the bancho are arranged And a time display meter MTa and Dekabotan image 136AL, selection effect that alternative display SL1 which is adapted to vary the reliability of the big hit by the display mode of at least remaining time display meter is displayed may be performed.

  FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (4) -2) are as shown in FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (4) -2). In the effect pattern that is scheduled to perform the effect to be shown, the effect to be executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selected effect is shown. Here, FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (3) -5) are the same as FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -5). Description is omitted because there is.

  After the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -6), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is in progress, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -7) displays the effect EF2 so as to overlap the option display SL1. It is shown that the selection effect is ended without the selection of any button image due to the time-out and the option display SL1 is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect is finished, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, a normal button effect in which a button image 136a of a default mode is displayed as a button effect is started, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "press" are displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. Be That is, in this production example, when the presentation button 136 is operated in the selection presentation, the projection button image 136aP1 is selected and the projection button presentation is scheduled to be started, but the presentation button 136 is operated in the selection presentation In addition, since neither button image is selected, it is shown that a normal button effect with lower reliability than the jackpot effect is started. Even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and any button image is not selected, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the effect pattern in which the projecting button image 136aP1 has been selected is executed In the case where it is determined, the projected button effect in which the projected button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. As described above, in this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect as the first button effect and the button image is not selected, the protrusion button effect is not started and it is more than the protrusion button effect It is shown that a button effect with a low hit probability is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -11), the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started The situation is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -12) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hit 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in the example of the effect, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and the button image is not selected, the button effect with low big hit reliability It is shown that (a normal button effect in which the default button image 136a is displayed) is performed as the second button effect.

  FIG. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (C (4) -2) are diagrams showing in stages steps of another effect pattern of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (C (4) -2) are shown in FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (4) -2). In the effect pattern which is scheduled to perform the effect to be shown, another example of effect to be executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selected effect is shown. Here, FIG. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (C (3) -8) are the same as FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (3) -8). Description is omitted because there is.

  After the option display SL1 is erased and the selection effect ends, and the effect is returned to the super reach effect, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -9), the button effect is not started, and the strong cut-in The image CI1a is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a having a high hit probability is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the presentation button 136 is operated in the selection presentation, the projection button image 136aP1 is selected and the projection button presentation is scheduled to be started, but the presentation button 136 is operated in the selection presentation Since neither button image is selected, the second button effect is not started, and a cut-in image is displayed instead. Even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and any button image is not selected, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selection effect, the effect pattern in which the projecting button image 136aP1 has been selected is executed In the case where it is determined, the projected button effect in which the projected button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. As described above, in this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the button effect is not started, and other notice effects ( It is shown that the display of the cut-in image is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -10), a pre-judge role turning effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -11), the jackpot determination of the big hit decision is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 153 (C (3) -12) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2." In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “concert 2-deco 2-deco 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in the example of the effect, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selection effect and the button image is not selected, the second button effect is started. It is not shown that another preview effect (display of a cut-in image) is performed.

  FIG. 153 (D (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (D (4) -2) are views showing one example of a continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment step by step. Note that FIG. 153 (D (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) are the same as FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (D (3) -2). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  After the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3), not the option display SL1 but the effect lever 136V The meter image VC imitating the shape of the icon and the icon TDR of the face of the head of the bancho are displayed on the side of the eyebrow, and the characters “Give me a shot with a double shot!” Are displayed on the right side of the display screen. It is informed that the has been started. The meter image VC is composed of 10 stages of meters, the three meters from the lower end are displayed in blue, the three meters displayed above the blue meter are displayed in green, and the green meters are displayed above The three meters displayed are displayed in red. Further, above the red meter, the final point which is formed in a hexagonal shape and on which the letter "V" is displayed is displayed. In this continuous hitting operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho rises according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, and the reliability of the big hit is suggested by the position of the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho at the time when the operation effective period elapses. Be done. That is, the jackpot's face icon TDR on the green meter is more reliable on the big hit than it is on the blue meter, and it is on the red meter than on the green meter. In the case, the jackpot is more reliable. In addition, when the face icon TDR of the head of the game reaches the final point of the meter image VC, it is notified that the big hit is determined. That is, it can be said that the effect description display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is not the display of the explanation of the selection effect but the display of the explanation of the continuous hitting operation effect.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -4), the characters “READY” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is informed that it is before the start of the continuous hitting operation start.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -5), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the character "GO" is displayed, and reception of the continuous hitting operation is started It has been informed. The player who sees this may sometimes try to lift the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho face to the position of a more reliable meter by continuously hitting the production button 136.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -6), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and it is shown that the face icon TDR of the head of the game is positioned on the blue meter. ing. In addition, the operation effective period is continuing and continuous hit operation of the production button 136 is continuously received.

  FIG. 153 (D (3) -7) shows that the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is a display showing "0", and it is shown that the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is positioned on the red meter. . After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -8), the icon TDR of the face of the group is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been determined, and corresponds to the red meter in the meter image VC, The word "It's intense heat!" Is displayed, and it is suggested that a high-hit reliable preview effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -9), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hit operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -10), it is shown that the lever image 136Va is displayed and the lever effect with high reliability of the big hit is started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and the letters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen, and effects The user is urged to operate the lever 136V. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a lever effect is started in which the lever image 136Va is displayed in response to the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho reaching the red meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect Ru. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect being performed, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position at which the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho has arrived. Is shown. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, instead of the lever effect, a button effect (for example, a super protruding button effect, a protruding button effect, or the like) in which a button image is displayed may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3)-11), as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3)-12), a state in which the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started It is shown.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 153 (D (3)-13) On the display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. , It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2." In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -1), it is shown that temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is done. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “hits of the“ decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, according to the position at which the face icon TDR of the face of the length in the meter image VC reaches It is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the indication of the lever effect is started by the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the bank leader in the meter image VC reaches the red meter in the continuous hitting operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2'). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2') indicate other effect patterns following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to FIG. 154 (D (3) -6 ′) are the same as FIG. 153 (D (3) -4) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 ') shows that the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is a display showing "0", and it is shown that the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is positioned on the green meter. . After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 ′), the icon TDR of the face of the group is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been determined, and corresponds to the green meter in the meter image VC. The word "chance" is displayed, and the big meter has higher confidence than the case where the icon of the face icon TDR on the blue meter is stopped, but the red meter shows the case where the icon TDR on the face of the team leader is stopped. It is suggested that a low-reliability advance announcement is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 '), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hitting operation effect is ended, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3)-10 '), the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, and the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed although the reliability is lower than the lever effect. It is shown that the big button production whose big hit reliability is higher than the button production is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "chance" are displayed, which suggests that the big hit reliability is high. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a deca-button effect is started in which a deca-button image 136aL is displayed in response to the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho reaching the green meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect. Ru. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect being performed, the deca-button effect is performed as the second button effect depending on the position at which the face icon TDR of the face of the team has arrived. Is shown. In addition, when this deca-button effect is performed, it may always be a big hit.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12') It is shown that the production is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased and the family crest 224E descends to the initial position, the decoration shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -13 ') In the symbol display device 208, the main character of the hero defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed It is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ′), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is shown. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the "hit 2-decorative 2-decorative 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, according to the position at which the face icon TDR of the face of the length in the meter image VC reaches It is shown that the deca-button effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the deca button effect is suggested to be started by the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the face of the master in the meter image VC reaches the green meter in the continuous hitting operation effect. Moreover, in this example of production, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect button 136) used in the deca-button effect as the second button effect are the same. Although an example is shown, it may be different, and in this case, the mode of the effect button 136 is the first button effect (normal mode) and the second button effect (protruding mode or vibrating mode). It may be different.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ′ ′) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ′ ′). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 '') to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 '') indicate other effect patterns following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). . The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 '') to FIG. 154 (D (3) -6 '') are the same as FIG. 153 (D (3) -4) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in -6), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 '') shows that the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is a display showing “0”, and the icon TDR of the face of the screen has a position on the blue meter because the number of operations of the effect button is small. It is shown that it is doing. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 ′ ′), the icon TDR of the face of the length is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position is determined, and corresponds to the blue meter in the meter image VC And, it is suggested that the letters "How about" are displayed, and there is a possibility that a preview effect of not very high in the jackpot reliability may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 ′ ′), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hit operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) −10 ′ ′), it is shown that the lever image 136Va is displayed and the lever effect with high reliability of the big hit is started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and the letters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen, and effects The user is urged to operate the lever 136V. In this effect example, as the second button effect, the lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed is started despite the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the bancho is the blue meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect The situation is shown. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect being performed, the lever effect which is an effect different from the effect corresponding to the position at which the face icon TDR of the face of the team has arrived is the second It is shown that a so-called collapse of the law is being performed as the button effect of. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail. Further, instead of the lever effect, a button effect (for example, a super protrusion button effect, a protrusion button effect, a button effect for displaying a default button image 136a, or the like) in which a button image is displayed may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 ′ ′), as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12 ′ ′), the judge effect of the big hit determination is It is shown to start.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of a domino is erased, and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, it is shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13 ''). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the winning screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2" which is to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed. It is displayed, and it is informed that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ′ ′), a state in which temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” It is shown. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ′ ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, it does not correspond to the position at which the face icon TDR of the face of the master in the meter image VC has reached It is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that In addition, as described above, the effect that the rule collapse occurs may be performed in advance, the effect according to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 may be started as the second button effect, for example, In the case where the face icon TDR of the key long is a blue meter, a normal button effect in which the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed may be performed as the second button effect.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ′ ′) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ′ ′). The effects shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ′ ′) to FIG. 155 (D (4) −2 ′ ′ ′) show other effect patterns following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). ing. In this demonstration example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is given any pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ′ ′). There is no plain display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ′ ′), the character “READY” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that it is before the start of the continuous hitting operation start.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -5 ′ ′ ′), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the character “GO” is displayed, and acceptance of the continuous hitting operation is started. Has been reported. The player who sees this may be able to improve the will to try to reach the final point of the face icon TDR of the face of the bancho by operating the production button 136 continuously.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -6 ′ ′ ′ ′), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the face of the master is positioned at the lower position of the meter image VC. Is shown. In the state in which the face icon TDR of the long key is at the lower position of the meter image VC, the meter portion corresponding to the position changes to blue. In addition, the operation effective period is continuing and continuous hit operation of the production button 136 is continuously received.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -7 ′ ′ ′ ′), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the state in which the face icon TDR of the head of the game reaches the upper position of the meter image VC. It is shown. In the state where the icon TDR of the face of the head reaches the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter part of the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the meter reaches the icon TDR of the face of the length at the upper position. The part turns red. In addition, the operation effective period is continuing and continuous hit operation of the production button 136 is continuously received.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ′ ′ ′), the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times before the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 elapses, and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho reaches the final point The situation is shown. At this time, in the meter image VC, all the meter portions are colored to notify that the continuous hitting operation effect has succeeded.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 '' '), the lever icon VLV is stocked at the upper right portion of the navigation character YM, and it is predicted that the lever effect is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) −10 ′ ′ ′ ′), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hit operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ′ ′ ′ ′), it is shown that the lever image 136Va is displayed and the lever effect with high reliability of the big hit is started. In addition, near the navigation character YM, the letters "superheat" are displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and the letters "pull the lever!" Are displayed on the left side of the display screen, and effects The user is urged to operate the lever 136V. In this example, as the second button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed corresponding to the fact that the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho reaches the final point in the meter image VC and the lever icon VLV is stocked in the continuous hitting operation effect. The lever effect to be played is started. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect being performed, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position at which the icon TDR of the face of the Bancho has arrived. Is shown. When this lever effect is performed, it may be a big hit without fail.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3)-12 '' '), as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3)-13' '') It is shown that the production is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the domed face is erased and the family crest 224E is lowered to the initial position, it is shown in FIG. 155 (D (3)-13 '"). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, and the victorious screen is displayed, and at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decorative 2" will be displayed in the middle symbol. Is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed, and congratulations on becoming a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ′ ′ ′), temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, characters of "big hit" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ′ ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the continuous hitting operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the bankmaster in the meter image VC reaches the final point Accordingly, it is shown that the lever effect is started as the second button effect. In other words, it can be said that the indication of the lever is started when the face icon TDR of the face of the master in the meter image VC reaches the final point in the continuous hitting operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. It can also be said that

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ′ ′ ′) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ′ ′ ′). The effect shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 '' '') to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 '' '') is another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) Is shown. In this demonstration example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) is given any pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 '' ''). It is considered as a plain display mode. In addition, the effects shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 '' '') to FIG. 155 (D (3) -7 '' '') are the same as FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 '' ') The effect is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ′ ′ ′ ′), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the face of the number head is at the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC. It is shown that it has arrived. In the state where the face icon TDR of the head of the bow reaches the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter part at the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the face icon TDR of the head at the upper position reaches The meter part turns red. In addition, the operation effective period is continuing and continuous hit operation of the production button 136 is continuously received.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 elapses before the face icon TDR of the head of the game reaches the final point, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ′ ′ ′ ′), The icon TDR of the face of the sergeant slips down to the edge of the meter image VC, and the character "Sorry" is displayed, and it is informed that the continuous hitting operation presentation has failed. As a result, no advance notice icon such as a lever icon or a button icon is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) −10 ′ ′ ′ ′ ′), when the meter image VC is erased and the continuous hit operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 '' ''), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed, and the remaining time display meter below the button image 136a The MT is displayed to notify that the advance notice by the normal button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “press” are displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that normal button rendering as the second button rendering is started instead of the lever rendering in response to failure of the continuous hitting operation rendering.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12 '' ''), as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13 '' ''), the big hit is confirmed. "Judge 3" which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 while the screen of the main character of the main character being defeated by the host of the enemy player and losing is displayed. Is displayed, and it is informed that the display is to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In this example of rendering, a screen is displayed that is defeated without the start of the judge in front of the judge being started by the family crest 224E being started, but the screen that is defeated after the display of the in front of the judge is performed is It may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ′ ′ ′ ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. It is shown that it is being done. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Sorry" are displayed, and it is informed that a lost display result will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 '' ''), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holiday 2-Decorative 3 – Decorative 2” . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the bankmaster in the meter image VC does not reach the final point According to the situation, it is shown that a button effect (normal button effect) in which a button image 136a of a default mode is displayed as the second button effect is started. In other words, when the icon TDR of the face of the face of the master in the meter image VC does not reach the final point in the continuous hit operation effect, it can be suggested that the lever effect is not started. Further, in this example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are the same. It has become. Further, in this presentation example, it is shown that the lever icon and the button icon as the reward of success are not displayed because the continuous hit operation presentation has failed.

  FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) to FIG. 156 (E (5) -18) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second number-on-hold display is displayed. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the reserve icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), two suspension icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and both of the suspension icons h11 and h12 of the two special views 1 are displayed. , And the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is the non-power-supply state (non-time-saving state), so it is difficult to open the electric chow. This is because winning of the mouth 232 is difficult.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non power saving state, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the special view 2 is held. The icon is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -1), it is shown that a big hit start effect is performed. When the jackpot start rendition is started, a character MCK of a wedding dress dressed as a machiko teacher (wedding machiko teacher) is staged to congratulate the big hit with four copandas. In addition, when the jackpot start effect starts, a right-handed display that promotes the player to hit the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -2), it is shown that the big hit game has been started and it has been shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect of introducing an effect during a big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "Introduction to effect from the next round" are displayed together with the copanda character, and that effect is notified.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -3), a state of proceeding to the second round is shown. In the second round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of “when it comes out ...” along with the Sabohani icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -4), The word "Expected to group notice!" Is displayed on top of this along with a demonstration display of strong group Sabohani group notice, and a description of the Sabohani group notice is given.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -5), a state of proceeding to the third round is shown. In the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of "when it comes out ..." along with the bomb icon, and then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5)-6), Along with the demonstration display of the timer advance presentation effect, the characters "The timer advance announcement is activated" are displayed, and the timer advance presentation is explained.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -7), a state of proceeding to the fourth round is shown. In this staging example, when moving to the fourth round, the character KGG with a cane appears, and the letters “Emergency notification!” And “Can win with button PUSH !!” are displayed, and this is one of the mini games. It is shown that a certain "dice game" has been started. In this dice game, by operating the effect button 136 within the operation effective period after the variable display of one dice is started, the output of the dice is displayed, and according to the appearance of the displayed dice, the big hit game An effect is given that suggests a later gaming state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), an explanatory display of the dice game is performed, and in the effect example shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8) When the outcome of the dice is displayed, it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game is 100 times a minute (special figure low probability spread figure high probability state) and the outcome of the "5" dice is displayed When it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is a definite change state (special figure high probability common figure high probability) and the outcome of the dice of “6” is displayed, the gaming state after the big hit game Is notified that the probability change state is a definite change state, and it is suggested that the probability setting in this pachinko machine 100 is "setting 6" which is the highest setting. In addition, the outcome of the other dice may be displayed, and other types of notices (for example, advance notices of holding chains, etc.) may be started. In the present embodiment, for example, a probability setting switch is provided in the main control unit 300, and can be set to six stages of setting 1 to setting 6 by this probability setting switch. Each setting has a different jackpot probability and specifications, and the administrator of the game arcade can select any setting. Further, a setting display unit is provided on the main substrate 156, and the setting set by the game arcade manager can be displayed. In this embodiment, the distribution ratio of the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is set according to the setting, and the setting may be estimated by the execution frequency of the fluctuation display pattern of the decorative symbol determined by the fluctuation time. is there. In addition, the main substrate 156 may be provided with a character ratio display unit for displaying a character ratio. The setting display unit and the feature ratio display unit are, for example, 7-segment LEDs, but are not limited thereto. In addition, it may not have a probability setting function.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -9), a state of proceeding to the fifth round is shown. In this effect example, when transitioning to the fifth round, one dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed at "1" and the letter "READY" is displayed, and it is informed that the variation display of the dice symbol DC is started Be done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5)-10), after the variable display of dice symbol DC is started, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5)-11), a button on the right side of the display screen The remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the image 136a, and the operation effective period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes weak cut-in. The image CI1b is displayed, and it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the result of the dice game is low.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -14), a state of proceeding to the sixth round is shown. In addition, the variation display of dice symbol DC is still performed continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -15), the dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed, and "4" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -16), the character “100 hourly short GET” is displayed above the dice symbol DC of the outcome of “4”, and the symbol of the dice symbol DC is displayed. In the lower part, the characters "Don't give up" are displayed, and it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game will be short, and it is shown that the effect of comforting the player is being performed.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -17), a state of proceeding to the 16th round is shown. When moving to the 16th round, the character of "Must be the last R" is displayed while the character of the lord appears and the player is informed that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -18), the sixteenth round is over, and the jackpot end effect is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "100 times time saving" are displayed, and it is informed that the time saving state is to be made until the variation display of the special view is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the big hit game, and it is shown that the game state and setting after the big hit game are suggested according to the result. That is, it is shown that the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the effects other than the judgment of the jackpot whether or not the jackpot.

  FIG. 156 (F (4) -2) to FIG. 157 (F (5) -20) are diagrams showing steps of another effect pattern of the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 156 (F (4) -2) to FIG. 157 (F (5) -12) are as shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) to FIG. (E (5) -12). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a cut-in image or dice is displayed. While the outcome of the symbol DC is not displayed, the replay symbol is displayed, the character "one more time" is displayed, and it is notified that the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started again.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -14), the replay symbol is displayed in a reduced size and the characters "READY" are displayed, and re-variation of the dice symbol DC is started It is informed.

  After the re-variation display of the dice symbol DC is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -15), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed along with the super projecting button image 136aS on the right side of the display screen. The operation effective period is started. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, as a result of the effect button 136 being operated in the dice game as the first button effect, the replay symbol is displayed, and in response, the re-variation display of the dice game as the second button effect is started It is shown that it is being done. Further, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed in the re-variation display of the dice game, so that there is a high possibility that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice game.

  In this embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variation display of the dice game is started and the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started, but the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is After the start, the dice game re-variation display may be started, or after the dice game re-variation display is started and the super protrusion button image 136aS is started to be displayed, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is performed. It may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is depressed and operated at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5)-16), the dice symbol DC is stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5)-17). Displayed and the result of "6" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5)-18), the character of "probability fluctuation GET" is displayed above the dice symbol DC of the outcome of "6" and the lower side of the dice symbol DC The character of “setting 6 may be displayed”, and it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game will be a definite change state, and the possibility that the setting of this pachinko machine 100 is “setting 6” is high. Is suggested.

  FIG. 157 (F (5) -19) shows that the state moves to the 16th round. When moving to the 16th round, the character of "Must be the last R" is displayed while the character of the lord appears and the player is informed that it is the final round.

  In FIG. 157 (F (5) -20), the sixteenth round is over, and the big hit end effect is started. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character of "Probability Fluctuation" is displayed while a character of a lord on a motorbike is boarded, and it is informed that it will be in a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the question mark is displayed together with the letter "6", which suggests that the possibility of being "setting 6" is high.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the big hit game, and it is shown that the game state and setting after the big hit game are suggested according to the result. That is, it is shown that the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the effects other than the judgment of the jackpot whether or not the jackpot. Further, in this effect example, a dice game is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this dice game, the replay symbol is displayed, and the second button is displayed according to the display of the replay symbol. It is shown that the re-variation display of the dice symbol DC as the effect is performed.

  FIG. 157 (G (4) -1) to FIG. 158 (G (4) -20) are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment . Note that FIG. 157 (G (4) -1) to FIG. 157 (G (4) -3) are similar to FIG. 145 ((1) -1) to FIG. 145 ((1) -3), I omit explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -3), after the decorative symbol in the variable display is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen, the decoration shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4) The symbol display device 208 shows that the "dice slot game" which is one of the mini games is being started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “mini game” are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the "dice slot game" is started, an explanation display of "shake the dice with a button" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the operation effective period to display the dice It is shown that the mission is to make the combination of (pattern) a specific combination, and when the mission is achieved, it is shown that the notice effect corresponding to the combination of the dice is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4), when the combination of the outcome of the dice of “4-5-6” is displayed, it becomes a notice that super reach will be performed, “5-5 When the combination of the outcome of the dice of -5 "is displayed, a pending change notice in which the display mode of the pending icon changes is performed, and when the combination of the outcome of the dice of" 1-1-1 "is displayed It is shown that a super-hold change notice is performed with a higher jackpot reliability than the hold change notice performed when the combination of the "5-5-5" dice is displayed. In addition, combinations of other dice may be displayed, and other types of notices (for example, hidden notices) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and button images 136a1 to 136a3 are displayed below the three dice in the variable display. Is displayed, and the character of "three consecutive hits" is displayed above the display screen, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases in accordance with the lapse of the operation effective period. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters “start” are displayed to notify that the mini game has been started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -7) changes in the left row. The symbol of the dice being displayed is displayed stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three-stroke” to “two-stroke” and urges the effect button 136 to be operated two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -9) changes in the middle row. The symbol of the dice being displayed is displayed stopped and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from "double hit" to "last", and urges one more operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -11) produces a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -12), the symbol of the dice being displayed in a variable display in the right column is stopped and “5” is displayed, “5-5-5” The combination of the result of the dice is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -13), the characters “pending change confirmed” are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the pending change is to be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -14), the hold change animation in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes is started, and thereafter, FIG. 157 (G (4)- As shown in 15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice displayed in blue. The symbol variation display performed by digesting the suspension icon of the blue display mode is more likely to display a big hit symbol than the symbol variation display performed by digesting the suspension icon of the default display mode.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -16), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (G (4)-19) following FIG. 157 (G (4)-18), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol A temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation, and then, as shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5” Confirmed by. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini game being performed by the operation of the effect button 136, it is shown that the pre-reading advance notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is performed.

  FIGS. 158 (H (4) -1) to (H (4) -26) are diagrams showing in stages the other effect patterns of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. . Note that FIG. 158 (H (4) -1) to FIG. (H (4) -10) are the same as FIG. 158 (G (4) -1) to FIG. (G (4) -10). Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -10), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -11), the strong cut-in image CI1a Not displayed, the symbol of the dice in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the right column, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice of "5-5-5" is displayed. However, in this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4)-13), the symbols of the three dice then start re-variation display, and it is staged that the second button presentation has been started. ing.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -14), the super projecting button image 136aS and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed so as to overlap with the symbols of the dice in the variable display. At the same time, the character “one shot!” Is displayed on the right side of the super protruding button image 136aS, and the operation valid period is started again. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the player to operate the effect button 136. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, as a result of the effect button 136 being operated in the dice slot game as the first button effect, the symbol combination of dice is displayed, but the variation display of the dice slot game as the second button effect It is shown that was started. Further, in this example of the effect, it is suggested that by displaying the super protruding button image 136aS in the re-variation display of the dice slot game, there is a high possibility that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice slot game. There is.

  In this embodiment, the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-variation display of the dice slot game is started and the display of the super protrusion button image 136aS is started. After the start of the dice slot game re-variation display may be started, or after the dice slot game re-variation display is started and the super protruding button image 136aS is started to be displayed. The protrusion operation may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is depressed and operated at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -16) displays the symbols of three dice Is stopped and displayed at the same time, and the combination of the dice of "1-1-1" is derived. Then, in the center of the display screen, the characters "super pending change confirmed" are displayed, which suggests that the pending icon changes to a highly reliable display mode.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -17), the hold change animation in which the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes is started, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in 18), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice displayed in red. The symbol variation display performed by digesting the red display mode retention icon is easier to determine a big hit symbol than the symbol variation display performed by the blue display mode digest icon.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4)-19), the character of "Yet to know" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the holding icon is further changed. It is informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -20), the on-hold change animation is started again at the second on-hold icon h12, and the display mode of the second on-hold icon h12 further changes. It is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -21), when the hold change animation is completed, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the display mode of red to the display mode of the character of the ninja, It is shown that there is a premiere advance notice, which is a look-ahead notice that the symbol variation display of the jackpot decision is made. In addition, there may be a case where the out-of-pattern aspect is determined and displayed in the symbol variation display which is executed by digesting the hold icon of the display mode of the ninja character.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -22), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -23), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -24), the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -25), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation. As shown in 158 (H (4)-26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the finalized display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, a mini game is performed by operating the effect button 136 as the first button effect, and after the combination of the outcome of the dice is once displayed, the symbol of the dice re-fluctuates, and the said re-is During the execution of the change, the operation of the effect button 136 as the second button effect is required. As a result, it is shown that a prefetch notice is given in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode with a high hit probability. Moreover, in this presentation example, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by two steps in one hold change animation, and the hold change animation is further performed on the same hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon is further ranked It is shown that it is up.

  Note that although the embodiment described above, ie, the effect by the two button effects is applied to the judgment effect of the big hit decision, and the notice effect of the gaming state after the big hit game in the big hit, it is applied to other notice effects For example, as a result of two button effects being performed, the present invention can be applied to other types of preview effects, for example, it can be applied to prefetch notices such as hold changes, and other types of such change forecasts It is.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V have been described as the operation means, but other devices may be used, for example, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic wave other than the button and the lever. And the like may be used.

  In addition, although the example in which the operation request display described above has the same operation means as the target of instructing the operation and the operation means for receiving the operation is shown, it may be different. For example, the operation of the effect button 136 is requested. Although the display is performed, the operation of the effect lever 136V may be received.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, in the button effect that requires a single operation of the effect button 136, there may be a case where the operation of the effect button 136 is required multiple times, and even if there is a case where a continuous hitting operation is required. It may be good or long press may be required.

  Moreover, in the embodiment described above, an example of effect that the second button effect may be performed as the operation response effect in the first button effect is shown, but further, the third time as the operation response effect in the second button effect The button effect of may be performed. In this case, the operation request mode of the effect button 136 may be changed for each button effect. For example, in the first button effect, the operation of the first effect button 136 is requested, but in the second button effect May request a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, and may request an operation of one effect button 136 in the third button effect. Further, in one button effect, a plurality of types of operation request modes of the effect button 136 may be prepared. For example, in the first button effect, the operation of the one effect button 136 is requested, and the second button effect In the effect, a continuous hit operation may first be requested, and, for example, an effect may be performed such that one operation of the effect button 136 is requested in response to the continuous hit gauge becoming full. Furthermore, the fourth button effect, the fifth button effect, etc. may be performed.

  Moreover, in the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the big hit reliability is improved in the mode of the button image in the second button effect than the mode of the button image in the first button effect. That is, it can be said that a step-up effect is performed in which a button image with high jackpot reliability is displayed each time the number of button effects is repeated.

In the above description,
“Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.]
Rendering means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest 224E, etc.];
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3),
One of the plurality of effects is shown in the second effect [for example, a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) It is an effect etc. where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a super projecting button effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3)-4) to FIG. (B (3)-5)] ,
The first effect is an effect prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 137 (A (3)-2) to FIG. 137 (A (3)-3) is an effect button It is an effect that urges 136 operations, etc.],
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, the effect that a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed is an effect. It is an effect to be executed according to the operation of the button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that urges the operation of the operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect [for example, a super protrusion shown in FIG. 137 (B (3)-4) to FIG. (A (3)-5) The button effect is an effect to be executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the normal button effect etc.],
The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operation means [for example, the super projecting button effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) is an effect. It is an effect prompting the operation of the button 136, etc.],
The execution of the first effect is started more than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) If the execution of the third effect is started after that (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to expect about which of the second effect and the third effect is started by performing the first effect.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Also, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of effects or may not execute a plurality of effects.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering, or the rendering other than the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering. May also be feasible. Also, the rendering means may always execute the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering, or when the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering are not performed. There may be

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the operation means. In addition, the first effect may include an effect for urging the operation of the operation means or may not include an effect for urging the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the second effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, or may include effects other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. It is also good. Further, the second effect may include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect without fail, and may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be

  Further, the second effect may not include only the effect for prompting the operation of the operation means, or may not include effects other than the effect for prompting the operation of the operation means. In addition, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means, or may include an effect prompting the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or in the case other than the operation of the operation means in the first effect May also be started. In addition, the second effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. It may be

  Further, the third effect may include only the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect or may include effects other than the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. It is also good. The third effect may include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect without fail, and may not include the operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. May be

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the operation means. In addition, the third effect may include an effect for prompting the operation of the operation means, or may not include an effect for prompting the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or in the case other than the operation of the operation means in the first effect May also be started. In addition, the third effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operation means in the first effect. It may be

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, there may be a case where the out-of-order symbol may be definitely displayed or the big hit symbol mode may be finalized and displayed. May be Moreover, when execution of the third effect is started after execution of the first effect is started, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in a certain manner, or there may be a case where the off symbol is displayed. May be

  In addition, "the execution of the first effect is more than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter referred to as" the first case ") In the case where the execution of the third effect is started after the start of the second effect (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the jackpot symbol form is likely to be finally determined and displayed " The execution of the first effect is started more than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter referred to as "the first case") Later, when the execution of the third effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), an advantageous state may be more easily given.

In addition, “one of the plural effects is the fourth effect [for example, the judgment of the jackpot decision shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6), etc.]”,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started when the operation means is operated while the third effect is being performed [eg, FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) to FIG. As shown in B (3)-6), during the execution of the super projecting button effect, when the effect button 136 is pressed, the judgment effect of the big hit decision is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where expectation can be enhanced when the third effect is performed.

  Here, the fourth effect may be started only when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or the operation is performed during the execution of the third effect. It may be started even when there is no operation of the means. In addition, the fourth effect may always start when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or the operation means may be operated during the execution of the third effect. If it does not start, it may not start.

Also, “the fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is performed [eg, FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) to FIG. As shown in)), after the display of the cut-in image (strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed, the jackpot determination judgment effect is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the second effect is executed, it may be expected.

  Here, the fourth effect may be started only after the second effect is performed, or is started even when the second effect is not performed. There may be cases. Also, the fourth effect may always start after the second effect is performed, or may not start after the second effect is performed. .

"The fourth effect is a judgment effect for a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to increase the sense of expectation for the fourth effect to be executed.

Also, the second effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [eg, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed, for example, as shown in (A (3) -5), when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect, etc.),
The third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [eg, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. As shown in 3) -5), when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect, the button effect is not started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to increase the motivation to perform an operation on the operation means during the execution of the first effect.

  Here, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the second effect may be started, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. If there is not, the effects other than the second effect may be started. Also, the second effect may always be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The second effect may be started also in cases other than the above case. In addition, the second effect may be started when the operation means is not operated only during the execution of the first effect, and the operation means is operated other than during the execution of the first effect. If not, a second effect may be started.

  The second effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, and the third operation is performed when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The production of may be started.

Also, the first effect may be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [eg, FIG. 141 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated in the normal button effect, the normal button effect is started again, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first effect is started again even if the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the player may be given a sense of security.

  Here, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the first effect may be started, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. If there is not, there may be a case where effects other than the first effect are started. In addition, the first effect may always be started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the first operation is not operated during the execution of the first effect. One presentation may not be started.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The first effect may be started also in cases other than the case. In addition, the first effect may be started when the operation means is not operated only while the first effect is being performed, or the operation means is operated other than during the first effect. If not, the first effect may be started.

Also, “the operation means is a means capable of being in a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state [e.g., an aspect in which the effect button 136 is not protruded, etc.],
One of the plurality of states is a second state [e.g., a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes, etc.],
The mode of the first effect is a mode for prompting the operation of the operation means in the first state [e.g., the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) does not protrude] Including display of button image 136a imitating effect button 136, etc.]
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect that urges the operation of the operation means in the second state [for example, the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) is an effect in a state where it protrudes] Including display of super protruding button image 136aS imitating button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the appearance of the operation effect of the operation means in the second state may be noticed.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of becoming only the first state and the second state, or may become states other than the first state and the second state. It may be one. In addition, the operation means may be one that can necessarily be in the first state and the second state, or may be one that may not be in the first state and the second state. .

The first state and the second state may be a state in which the operation means does not protrude or a state in which the operation means does not protrude, or may be a state in which the operation means does not vibrate or a state in which the operation means vibrates. The operating means may be in a vibrating state and in a vibrating and rotating state, or the operating means may be in a non-rotating state and in a rotating state, and the operating means may be in vibration and It may be in a non-rotating state or in a vibrating / rotating state, or the operating means may be in a non-emitting state or in a light emitting state, or the operating means may emit light in a certain color. It may be in the state of emitting light in a certain color different from the one in the normal state and the certain color,
In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [eg, a weakly projecting button effect shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3), etc. ],
The fifth effect aspect is an aspect for prompting the operation of the operation means in the second state [e.g., the operation promotion display shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) is an effect in a projecting state] Including display of weak projecting button image 136aP2 imitating button 136, etc.]
The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started [eg, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -4) As shown in), after the weakly projecting button effect is started, the projecting button effect is started if there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 while the weakly projecting button effect is being executed, etc.],
The fifth effect aspect and the third effect aspect are different aspects,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to expect also the operation effects to be performed first.

  Here, the fifth effect may be an aspect that promotes only the operation of the operating means in the second state, or an aspect that promotes operations other than the operation of the operating means in the second state. Good. Also, the fifth effect may be an aspect that always prompts the operation of the operating means in the second state, or even an aspect that may not prompt the operation of the operating means in the second state. Good.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or after the execution of the fifth effect is started The execution of effects other than the execution may be started. Moreover, the execution of the third effect may always be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the execution of the third effect is not started after the execution of the fifth effect is started There may be cases.

  In addition, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the fifth effect is started, and the third effect may be performed other than after the execution of the fifth effect is started The execution of may be started.

  In addition, the aspect of the fifth effect and the aspect of the third effect may be partially different or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter,“ the third display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) “A projecting button image 136aP1 etc. imitating a mode in which the panel is projected” is displayed.] For example, a projection shown in FIG. 143 (A (3)-4) to FIG. (A (3)-5) Button effects etc.],
The fifth effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, “the fifth display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) is projected "Weakly projecting button image shown in Fig. 143 (A (3) -2) to Fig. (A (3)-3) including the display of Production etc.],
In the third display and the fifth display, the third display is larger [for example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3 (A)) than in the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. The projection button image 136aP1 shown in) -4) is larger, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give the player expectations by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state It may be included. In addition, the third effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be a certain one.

  Further, the fifth effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state, and includes the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state It may be one. In addition, the fifth effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be a certain one.

  In the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display may be larger or may have the same size.

In addition, “the third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter,“ the third display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4) “A projecting button image 136aP1 etc. imitating a mode in which the panel is projected” is displayed.] For example, a projection shown in FIG. 143 (A (3)-4) to FIG. (A (3)-5) Button effects etc.],
The fifth effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, “the fifth display [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) is projected "Weakly projecting button image shown in Fig. 143 (A (3) -2) to Fig. (A (3)-3) including the display of Production etc.],
At least one of the third display and an effect display surrounding the third display [eg, a display of a red effect EFR added to the projecting button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)] One display is displayed in a third color [eg, red etc.]
Among the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display [for example, the display of the blue effect EFB added to the weakly projecting button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), etc.] At least one of the displays is displayed in a fifth color [eg blue, etc.]
The third color and the fifth color are different colors,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give the player expectations by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state It may be included. In addition, the third effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be a certain one.

  Further, the fifth effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state, and includes the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state It may be one. In addition, the fifth effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be a certain one.

  Also, only the third indication of the third indication and the effect indication surrounding the third indication may be displayed in the third color, or the third indication and the effect indication surrounding the third indication Only the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or both the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color . Also, at least a portion of at least one of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display. At least one of them may be displayed in a third color.

  In addition, only the fifth display of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display. Only the effect display surrounding the fifth display of them may be displayed in the fifth color, or both the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color . In addition, a part of at least one of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display. At least one of them may be displayed in a fifth color.

  In addition, the third color and the fifth color may be partially different colors or all different colors.

“The first state is a state in which the operation means is not vibrating,
The second state is a state in which the operation means is vibrating,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easier to grasp the first state and the second state.

“The first effect is a display imitating the operation means in the first state (hereinafter,“ the first display [eg, button image 136a shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2), etc. (Eg, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3), etc.)
The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, “third display [for example, a projecting button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6)]) It is an effect that includes the display of
In the second case, after the execution of the first effect is started, before the execution of the third effect is started, a change animation changing from the first display to the third display [For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -7), the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect (normal button effect) Then, when the second button effect (projected button effect) is started, when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, an animation in which the button image 136a changes to the projected button image 136aP1 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the change in presentation is easy to understand.

  Here, the first effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means in the first state, or the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the first state It may be included. In addition, the first effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the first state, or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the first state. It may be a certain one.

  Further, the third effect may include only the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state, and also includes the display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means of the second state It may be one. In addition, the third effect may include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state or may not include the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be a certain one.

In addition, “the operation means is an operation means configured by a plurality of operation means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.],
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.],
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V, etc.],
The first effect is an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3) is , And the like prompting the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The third effect is an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3)-4) to FIG. (B (3)-5), It is the production which urges the operation of the production lever 136V, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for being able to operate the second operation means.

  Here, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or there may be operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

  In addition, the first effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the first operation means . In addition, the first effect may include an effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may not include an effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. . In addition, the third effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. Good.

Also, there may be cases where the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern [eg, FIG. 137 (B As shown in (3) -2) to (B (3) -4), the super projection button effect is started after the normal button effect is started, etc.],
The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with the certain fluctuation pattern, and the execution of the third effect is subsequently started For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 143 (B (3) -4), the normal button effect is not started, and the super projecting button is delayed after being delayed for a predetermined time. Production has been started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be given a sense of discomfort with respect to the delay in the start of presentation, and in some cases, it may be possible to give an expectation.

  Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, or a certain variation After the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in the pattern, the execution of the effects other than the execution of the third effect may be started. In addition, the execution of the first effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display with a certain fluctuation pattern, or the execution of the third effect may always be started, or the symbol fluctuation with a certain fluctuation pattern The execution of the third effect may not be started after the execution of the first effect is started during execution of the display.

  In addition, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, or a certain variation pattern The execution of the third effect may be started even after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in. Moreover, after the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol change display with a certain change pattern, the execution of the third effect may be started in some cases, or a certain change pattern The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started even during execution of the symbol variation display in.

  In addition, during execution of the symbol fluctuation display with a certain fluctuation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then only the execution of the third effect is started The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern, and then the third The execution of effects other than the effect may be started. In addition, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display with a certain fluctuation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and the execution of the third effect is always started after that The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain fluctuation pattern, and the execution of the third effect is thereafter performed. It may not be started.

  In addition, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol variation display with a certain fluctuation pattern, and then the execution of the third effect is started The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started even when the symbol variation display with a certain variation pattern is not being executed, and then the first The execution of three effects may be started.

Further, the first effect is an effect including display of an operation request display [for example, a display including the character display of “press” shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2), etc.],
The third effect is an effect including a display of an operation request display [for example, a display including the character display of “push” as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4)],
The character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect and the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect are different.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the sense of expectation may be able to be changed by the difference in the character string.

  Here, the first effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include the display other than the display of the operation request display. Further, the first effect may include the display of the operation request display without fail or may not include the display of the operation request display.

  Further, the third effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include the display other than the display of the operation request display. The third effect may include the display of the operation request display without fail or may not include the display of the operation request display.

  Moreover, a part may differ in the character string contained in the operation request display displayed in the 1st production, and the character string contained in the operation request display displayed in the 3rd production, or all It may be different.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a sixth effect [eg, a normal button effect executed as a second button effect, etc.]”,
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The execution of the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started [eg, FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. (A (3) -7) When the button image 136a is selected in the selection effect as the first button effect shown in), the normal button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.],
The first effect is an effect for selecting whether the execution of the third effect is started or the execution of the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is performed. [For example, in the selection effects shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -7), the button image is selected from a plurality of types of button images (button image 136a and projecting button image 136aP1) To select whether the normal button effect is started or the protrusion button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to improve the player's desire to operate by deciding the contents of the effect by the subsequent operation means by the selected effect.

  Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the sixth effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the sixth effect after the execution of the first effect is started Execution of effects other than the execution of may be started. Also, the execution of the sixth effect may always be started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the execution of the sixth effect is not started after the execution of the first effect is started There may be cases.

Also, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the sixth effect may be started [eg, FIG. 151 (B (3) -3)- As shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), when the operation effective period elapses without the production button 136 being operated in the selection production as the first button production, the normal button production as the second button production Is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to improve the desire to operate the operating means in order to perform the third effect.

  Here, there may be a case where only the execution of the sixth effect is started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated while the first effect is being executed. Execution of effects other than the execution of the sixth effect may be started when not operated. Moreover, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the sixth effect may always be started, or when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect There may be cases where the execution of the sixth effect is not started.

  In addition, the execution of the sixth effect may be started only when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operation means is operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may be started other than when it is not performed.

In addition, “the above-mentioned effect means is the effect of“ 5-5-5 ”in the dice slot game shown in the stock effect [for example, FIG. 146 ((1) -4) to FIG. (1) -12]. This is a means capable of executing effects such as the button icon BTN being stocked by the combination being displayed,
The stock effect is an effect that suggests an effect of prompting the user to operate the operation means once or a plurality of times by the stock of the icon,
In the first case, one of the icons is digested [eg, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2) to FIG. 145 ((3) -7), one button icon BTN is digested and After the normal button effect is performed, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
Even in the second case, one of the icons is digested [eg, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2) to FIG. 146 ((3) -7), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, the deca button effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, although the effect by the operation means is actually performed twice, since the consumption of the stock of the icons can be suppressed to one, it may be possible to make the player feel like he / she obtained.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even when the stock of the icon in the stock effect is one, it may be possible to give expectation to the start of the effect by the operation means.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only stock rendering, or may be capable of performing rendering other than stock rendering. In addition, the effect means may always execute stock effect or may not execute stock effect.

  In addition, the stock effect may be an indication by an icon stock of an effect that urges one operation of the operation means, or an effect by an icon stock that suggests an effect of urging the plural operation means to operate. It may be one.

  Further, in the first case, only one icon may be digested or two or more icons may be digested.

  Further, in the second case, only one icon may be digested or two or more icons may be digested.

Also, “the first effect is an effect prompting one operation of the operation means [for example, normal buttons shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) to FIG. (B (3) -3) The effect is prompting one operation by the effect button 136, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the first effect is a continuous hit effect that requires a plurality of operations of the operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) to FIG. (D (3) -8) In the continuous hitting operation effect, it is an effect requiring continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the operation effective period of the operation means in the first effect and the operation effective period of the operation means in the third effect are different periods [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) ~ As shown in the same figure (B (3)-5), the operation effective period in the normal button effect as the first button effect and the operation effective period in the super projecting button effect as the second button effect are different. Period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, an operation effective period of the operation means in the first effect and an operation effective period of the operation means in the third effect may or may not partially overlap or may partially overlap. It does not have to overlap.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “a plurality of operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.),
Rendering means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest 224E, etc.];
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3),
One of the plurality of effects is shown in the second effect [for example, a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) It is an effect etc. where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a lever shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4),
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.],
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V, etc.],
The first effect is an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. (A (3) -3) is , And the like prompting the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed Is an effect to be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [eg, FIG. 139 (B (3)-4) to FIG. (A (3)-5). The lever effect to be shown is the effect to be executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the normal button effect etc.],
The third effect is an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3)-4) to FIG. (B (3)-5), It is the production which urges the operation of the production lever 136V, etc.]
The execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started If it is done, it will be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming platform, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the rendering means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for being able to operate the second operation means.

  Here, the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where persons other than the player can also operate. Further, the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player can not operate.

  Further, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of effects or may not execute a plurality of effects.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering, or the rendering other than the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering. May also be feasible. Also, the rendering means may always execute the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering, or when the first rendering, the second rendering and the third rendering are not performed. There may be

  Also, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or there may be operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

  In addition, the first effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the first operation means . In addition, the first effect may include an effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may not include an effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  The second effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. In addition, the second effect may include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. There may be cases.

  In addition, the second effect may not include only the effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, or may not include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the first operation means It is also good. In addition, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means. Good.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operation means in the first effect Depending on the case, it may be started also in cases other than. In addition, the second effect may be necessarily started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. It may not be started.

  In addition, the third effect may include only the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. In addition, the third effect may include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or does not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. There may be cases.

  Further, the third effect may include only an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may include effects other than the effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. . In addition, the third effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the second operation means. Good.

  In addition, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operation means in the first effect Depending on the case, it may be started also in cases other than. Further, the third effect may be necessarily started according to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or according to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect. It may not be started.

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, there may be a case where the out-of-order symbol may be definitely displayed or the big hit symbol mode may be finalized and displayed. May be Moreover, when execution of the third effect is started after execution of the first effect is started, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in a certain manner, or there may be a case where the off symbol is displayed. May be

  In addition, “the third effect of the first effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, rather than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. If execution is started, it is likely that the big hit symbol form will be finalized and displayed finally, "if the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started." It is more likely that an advantageous state is more easily given when execution of the third effect is started after execution of the first effect is started.

  FIGS. 159 to 174 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner the change effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 is an example of the effect performed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 is shown in the other drawings. Various effects are also feasible. Furthermore, in FIGS. 159 to 174, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used, and in this case, the second The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. In FIGS. 159 to 174, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be disposed.

  Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 159 to 174, and Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In addition, although the description in FIG. 159-FIG. 174 is applicable to any presentation example of this specification, the application to the presentation example demonstrated using FIG. 14-FIG. 158 is preferable.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram showing some examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG. 159 (A8), first, in FIG. 159 (A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost (“decorative” 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is displayed stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the second decorative symbol of a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In the example of effect, for the sake of describing the position of the icon display area HN1 for the sake of convenience, it is surrounded by a broken line, but in actuality, it is not visible. Further, in the icon display area HN1, the variation icon is an area where the standby animation can be executed, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Also, in FIG. 159 (A1), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 4, and the first reservation icon h11, the second reservation icon h12, the third reservation icon h13, and the fourth reservation icon h14 of the special view 1 are displayed. ing. All the pending icons are the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of all the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), the second number-of-holds display is displayed. It is reported that

  Further, FIG. 159 (A1) shows a state where the combination is displayed with the combination of the lost design ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2"), and the fluctuation icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (A2), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  In FIG. 159 (A3), a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that it falls in the vertical direction . The second variation icon h02 in this example of presentation has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (A4) to (A6), the second variation icon h02 continues to fall and is shown to overlap with a part of the first variation icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (A6), when all of the second change icon H02 overlaps with all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 159 (A7), the first change icon h01 is erased. The second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode).

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 159 (A3) and may end immediately before the same figure (A7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (A6). In addition, during the display of the icon change animation, the first decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display is performed only in the first decorative symbol. May be performed. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be all of the period during the display of the icon change animation, or may be a partial period.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of the big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is changed to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown in FIG. 159 (A1)-(A8) may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in FIG. 159 (A1)-(A8) Is true. In the example shown in FIG. 159 (B1) to FIG. (B8), FIGS. (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG. (A4) described above, It is shown that the second variation icon h02 falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (B5), after all of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first fluctuation icon 01, the falling in the vertical direction is further performed without staying in the icon display area HN1, and the display screen It is shown how to start the frame out from the lower end of. Thereafter, FIGS. 159 (B6) to (B7) show that the second change icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon is not changed. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159 (C1) to FIG. 159 (C8), first, in FIG. 159 (C1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration" 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is displayed stopped. In the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the second decorative symbol having a size smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), a holding frame UI is displayed. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In the example of effect, for the sake of describing the position of the icon display area HN1 for the sake of convenience, it is surrounded by a broken line, but in actuality, it is not visible. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (C1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 4, and the first reservation icon h11, second reservation icon h12, third reservation icon h13, and fourth reservation icon h14 of Special Figure 1 are displayed. ing. In this presentation example, only the second hold icon h12 of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is displayed, but all the other hold icons are displayed as default (white) It is an aspect. In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the second number-of-holds display is displayed, the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is 4 and the number-of-holds of the special figure 2 is 0 It is reported that

  Further, FIG. 159 (C1) is a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2"), and the fluctuation icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (C2), the reserve of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started, and the movement animation of the reserve icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In this presentation example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, but the other hold icons h12 and h13 and the first variation icon h01 are the default (white) display mode. This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  In FIG. 159 (C3), a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears from the center upper end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state of falling in the vertical direction is shown . The second variation icon h02 in this presentation example has a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01, is different in color, and is a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (C4) to (C6), the second variation icon h02 continues to fall and is shown to overlap with a part of the first variation icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), when a part of the second change icon H02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 159 (C7), the second change icon h02 is reduced. The first change icon h01 is displayed in the same size as the first change icon h01, the first change icon h01 is erased, and the second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1. A state of changing to (display mode of blue) is shown. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, in this effect example, the second change icon h02 may overlap the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the advance notice, and the second change icon h02 may overlap the advance notice.

  The icon change animation described above may be started from FIG. 159 (C3) and may end immediately before FIG. 159 (C7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (C6).

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is finalized, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be finalized and displayed. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is changed to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), a part of the suspension icons is set as the advance notice mode, but in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) , All pending icons are the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 159 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the same diagrams (D1) to (D4) are the same as FIG. 159 (C1) to FIG. (C4) described above, A state is shown in which the second fluctuation icon h02, which is larger than the first fluctuation icon h01, falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (D5), after a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, the second change icon h02 is displayed in the vertical direction without animation being displayed in a reduced size. Dropping is further performed, and it is illustrated that frame-out is started from the lower end of the display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon is not changed. There is. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. In addition, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is the lower end of the display screen You may frame it out. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 159 are examples for the change icon, but may be performed for the hold icon.

  In addition, as the aspect of the second variation icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red may be used, or other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes showing the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or no pattern aspect (A aspect), a blue or diagonal aspect (B aspect), a green or diamond aspect (C aspect), red or The lattice pattern aspect (D aspect) and the golden color and vertical line pattern aspect (E aspect) become higher in order, and the rainbow color and horizontal line aspect aspect (F aspect) become the highest aspect . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the fluctuating icon and the hold icon, but each mode is not limited to the mode described using FIG. That is, white in the example described using FIG. 159 may be replaced with blue. For example, the first variation icon h01, which is a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the first variation icon h01, which is a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with white or green. In addition, when the aspect is roughly divided, the aspect (the C aspect) of the green or diamond pattern, the following aspects (the first group which is the group of the A aspect, the B aspect, the C aspect), the red color and the Lattice Pattern Aspect (D Aspect) The above aspect (D aspect, E aspect, F group second group) can be divided. Here, the aspect belonging to the first group can not be changed to the aspect belonging to the second group, and the aspect belonging to the second group can not be altered to the aspect belonging to the first group. On the other hand, while exchanging of the aspect in a 1st group is enabled, the exchange of an aspect in a 2nd group may also be enabled. Furthermore, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's degree of advantage and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be represented by the difference in size and number or the like. In addition, the player's advantage is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state or / and a short time state), that a premier effect is likely to be started, or a big hit finalization effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is also included that it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the big hit, even if it is not directly connected to the big hit. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear. Matters relating to the aspect described in this paragraph are the same as in the previous examples and the subsequent examples.

  Furthermore, the aspect of each icon may be the aspect of the entire icon (entire area) or the aspect of only a part of the icon (partial area).

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 159, the normal advance notice by the change icon whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice. In addition, even when the on-hold change effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon fails, it may be a big hit, or may be always off.

  FIG. 160 shows several other examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (A1) to (A8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and In the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 (D1) to 160 (D8), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player can see the icon display area. HN2 is made visible. Example of effect shown in FIG. 160 (A1) to FIG. (A8), example of effect shown in FIG. 160 (B1) to FIG. (B8), example of effect shown in FIG. 160 (C1) to FIG. The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in FIG. 159 (A1) to (A8) except for the aspect of the icon display area, and FIGS. 159 (B1) to FIG. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (C1) to FIG. (C8), and the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (D1) to FIG. (D8) are respectively the same. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 160 (D5), when the on-hold change effect fails, the second change icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing another example in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed.

  First, an example of effects shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A8) will be described. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A2) are similar to FIG. 159 (A1) except that the navigation character YM in the display mode in which the blue kimono is worn is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is the same as the effect shown in). Here, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2) is displayed in a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn. That is, at least a part is displayed in blue. In other words, all may be displayed in blue, or only a portion (for example, a kimono portion) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later. The navigation character YM is displayed in an initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing standby animation (for example, animation repeating a certain operation).

  In FIG. 161 (A3), the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts an icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls the sword and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a situation of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this example of presentation has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (A4) to (A6), the second change icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1 and overlaps a part of the first change icon h01. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (A6), when all of the second change icon H02 overlaps with all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (A7), the first change icon h01 is erased. The second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (display mode in blue) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the change icon after change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 161 (A3) and may end immediately before FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (A6).

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (A8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is set to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the following description, description overlapping with the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) Is true. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (B1) to FIG. (B8), the same diagrams (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. (A4) described above, It is shown that the second variation icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (B5), after all of the second variation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variation icon h01, the second variation icon h02 drops downward without staying in the icon display area HN1, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen. It is shown how to start the Thereafter, FIGS. 161 (B6) to 161 (B7) show that the second variation icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon is not changed. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  Next, an effect example shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 161 (C8) will be described. Here, since the effects shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 161 (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 161 (C3), the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, starts icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls the sword and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation showing a situation of moving toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variation icon h02 in this presentation example has a size larger than that of the first variation icon h01, is also different in color, and is a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 161 (C4) to FIG. (C6), when a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (C7), The second variation icon h02 is reduced and displayed to be the same size as the first variation icon h01, the first variation icon h01 is erased, the second variation icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variation icon is default A state of changing from the display mode of (1) to the advance display mode (display mode of blue) is shown. That is, it is shown that the first variation icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variation icon h02 which is the same display mode (display mode in blue) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the change icon after change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 161 (C6), the second variation icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the notice may be overlapped with the second variation icon h02.

  The icon change animation described above may start from FIG. 161 (C3) and may end immediately before FIG. 161 (C7), and while the second variation icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) ~ It may be considered as animation performed only in the same figure (C6).

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decoration symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (C8) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the variation icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is finalized, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be finalized and displayed. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 161 (C8) described above, the second change icon h02 appears separately from the first change icon h01, and the change icon of the default display mode is changed to the A-th color This is an example of changing with the Ath frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the examples shown in FIG. 161 (D1) to FIG. 161 (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 161 (C8) and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the same diagrams (D1) to (D4) are the same as FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. (C4) described above, A state is shown in which a second change icon h02 larger in size than the first change icon h01 moves toward the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (D5), after a part of the second change icon h02 overlaps all of the first change icon h01, the second change icon h02 drops downward without an animation in which a reduction display is performed. , Starting frame out from the lower end of the display screen is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D6) to (D7), the second variation icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon is not changed. There is. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon does not change from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second fluctuation icon h02, the second fluctuation icon h02 may pass behind the first fluctuation icon h01. In addition, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is the lower end of the display screen You may frame it out. Moreover, in this example of presentation, after the second fluctuation icon h02 is out of frame, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 161 are examples for the variation icon, but may be performed for the suspension icon.

  In any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161, the normal advance notice by the change icon whose display mode has been changed is a false advance notice, but may be a big hit and a true advance notice. In addition, even when the on-hold change effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon fails, it may be a big hit, or may be always off.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing several other examples in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is. In addition, an example of an effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to the same figure (A8), an example of an effect shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to the same figure (B8), an example of effect shown in FIG. In the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (D1) to FIG. (D8), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed within the rectangular frame, and the player can see the icon display area. HN2 is made visible. An example of the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to the same figure (A8), an example of the effect shown in FIG. 162 (B1) to the same figure (B8), an example of effect shown in FIG. 162 (C1) to the same figure (C8) The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in (A1) to (A8) of FIG. 161, except for the aspect of the icon display area. The example of the effect shown in (B8), the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. (C8) and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161 (D1) to FIG. . Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (D5), when the on-hold change effect fails, the second change icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  In FIGS. 163A1 to 163A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 163 (A1) to FIG. 163 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A3), the frame change animation is started, and the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed in a gradually reduced size as shown in FIG. 163 (A3) to FIG. 163 (A5). In this production example, while the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased, and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is erased and the first ornament is displayed. The variable display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be all of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a partial period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variation icon h01, the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. The copy variation icon h01 'may or may not execute the standby animation in the variation icon display area HN1. In addition, the first change icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed. In addition, the first change icon h01 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of a period during which the reduced display after the frame change animation is performed is displayed. The same applies to during and after the frame change animation in FIGS.

  When the reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 163 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A7), a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 from the right side of the display screen is frame-in. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (second fluctuation icon h02) and the three holding icons (holding icons h21, h22, h23). However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. Do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. In addition, the second variation icon h02 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of the displayed period of the reduced display. In addition, the variation icons of both or one of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A11) to (A12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 163 (A13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy reserve icons h11', h12 'and h13' overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second The change icon h02 is changed to indicate that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A16) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is fixed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. Further, in this example, the first frame image FL1 is moved in parallel to move out of the frame, and the second frame image FL2 is moved in parallel to move in the frame. While rotating in the direction (which may be the right direction), the first frame image FL1 rotates in the left direction and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears in the right depth direction and is left direction It may be a display of an aspect of rotating to. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIGS. 163B1 to 163B, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 163 (B1) to FIG. 163 (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 163 (A1) to FIG. 163 (A9), the description will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 163 (B9), they move to the left of the display screen respectively, but FIG. 163 (B9) to FIG. As shown in B10), the third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 is framed in from the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes the third change icon h03 different from the first change icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and the second change icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. The display mode is the same as the default display mode as the first variation icon h01. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h31, h32 and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163B10 and B12, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is a display screen. Move towards the center of the At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, and a period in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed is generated. In addition, the third change icon h03 may or may not perform the standby animation in at least a part of the displayed period of the reduced display. In addition, the variation icon of both or one of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform standby animation. The same applies to the display of the reduced display in FIGS.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (B11) to (B12), while the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to be left. Move in the direction and frame out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B13), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 163 (B13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy reserve icons h11', h12 'and h13' are overlapped with the third frame image FL3 and difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. It changes to the change icon h03, and it is shown that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the third variation icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIGS. 164A1 to 164A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16). The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 163 (A1) to FIG. 163 (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 164 (B1) to (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16). The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 163 (B1) to FIG. 163 (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIGS. 165A1 to 165A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player is an icon The display area HN2 is made visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  In FIG. 165 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to 165 (B16), the aspect of the icon display area in which the variation icon is displayed is an aspect formed in a rectangular frame, and the player is an icon The display area HN2 is made visible. The effect examples shown in FIG. 165 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIG. 163 (B1) to (B16) except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

  In FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16). The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (A1) to (A16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIGS. 166 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (B1) to (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16). The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (B1) to (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Incidentally, the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A2) are the same except that the display mode of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is a display mode wearing a white kimono. Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2), the description is omitted. In addition, the navigation character YM of the display mode which wore a white kimono is a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed by being gradually reduced as shown in FIG. 167 (A3) to FIG. 167 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 167 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A7), the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (wearing a white kimono), but even the display mode wearing a blue kimono Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A7) to (A9), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 both move in the left direction. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1, which is in the initial posture, is performed. The navigation character YM included in the character YM and the second frame image FL2 starts an icon change animation, turns to the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02, changes to a pose in which the sword is removed and swung Do. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a portion of the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a portion of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 The first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which are covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, respectively, are less visible than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which are default (white) display modes until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered by the effect image Eh0, are the same display modes as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changing to the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 after the change. It is something to suggest (preliminary).

  When the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed after the effect image Eh0 is erased, as shown in FIG. 167 (A9) to FIG. (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resumes moving to the left. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 167 (A13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy reserve icons h11', h12 'and h13' overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second The change icon h02 is changed to indicate that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A16) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (second variation icon h02) whose display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 167 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 167 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the first change icon h01 Although the second variation icon h02 appears, neither the first variation icon h01 nor the second variation icon h02 has changed from the display mode of the default (white). That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 167 (B9) to FIG. (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 turn to the left. Resume the movement of Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (B11) to (B12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move in the left direction, Frame out of the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B13), enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variation icon h02 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 167 (B13) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy reserve icons h11', h12 'and h13' overlap with the second frame image FL2 and become difficult to be recognized visually.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the second It changes to the change icon h02, and it is shown that the change icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed And then confirmed. When the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed, the second variation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is erased. In this effect example, the display mode of the variation icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and a state in which the hold change effect has failed is shown. In this example of presentation, although the pending change presentation has failed and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been determined and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be determined and displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 168 (A1) to FIG. (A16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 168 (A1) to FIG. 168 (A16) are the holding example when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to FIG. It is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to FIG. 167 (A16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 168 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 168 (B1) to (B16) are the holding examples when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16). The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 167 (B1) to FIG. (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIGS. 169A1 to 169A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A1) to the same figure (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A1) to the same figure (A8), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Of the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation and turn to the second variation icon h02, It changes to the pose which is thrown out and waved. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. Then, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, The fluctuation icon h02 is more difficult to view than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the second variation icon h02, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a display mode of blue that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

  When the second variation icon h02 is displayed after the effect image Eh0 is erased, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are directed to the left as shown in FIG. 169 (A9) to FIG. 169 (A10). Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A11) to FIG. 169 (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 169 (A11) to FIG. 169 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (A11) to FIG.

  In FIG. 169 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 169 (B1) to FIG. (B8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (B1) to FIG.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 169 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 is not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 169 (B9) to FIG. (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 169 (B11) to the same figure (B16) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 169 (B11) to the same figure (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 167 (B11) to the same figure (B16), the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 170 (A1) to (A16) show both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 170 (A1) to FIG. 170 (A16) are the holding example when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect example shown in FIG. 169 (A1) to FIG. The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 169 (A1) to (A16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

  In FIG. 170 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIG. 170 (B1) to FIG. 170 (B16) are the holding example when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed and the effect example shown in FIG. 169 (B1) to FIG. The effect example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 169 (B1) to FIG. (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 171 (A1) to (A16) show both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 171 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), so the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the suspension of the special view 1 is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the moving animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the characters “attention!” Are displayed on the timer notice display TM, and notice that the timer display countdown is started is notified. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern in the variable display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed in a gradually reduced size as shown in FIG. 171 (A3) to FIG. 171 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM, and it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, it is presented that a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM is “39.99”, and the timer display countdown is continuously performed. In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 171 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A7), the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first change icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 are overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and are viewed more visually than when the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is considered difficult. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move in the left direction. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is continued, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Of the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navi characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation and turn to the second variation icon h02, It changes to the pose which is thrown out and waved. On the other hand, although the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and is difficult to visually recognize, the icon change animation is not started with the initial posture. Then, the wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, The fluctuation icon h02 is more difficult to view than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that only part of the second variation icon h02 may be covered by the effect image Eh0, or all may be covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the second variation icon h02, which is the display mode of the default (white) until the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is a display mode of blue that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (notices) the display mode of the change icon h0 after change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variation icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

  When the second variation icon h02 is displayed after the effect image Eh0 is erased, as shown in FIG. 171 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move in the left direction. Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. In addition, when the second frame image FL2 moves in the left direction, the second frame image FL2 is displayed so as to be overlapped on the timer notice display TM, which is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped on the timer notice display TM. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM, and it is considered that visual recognition is difficult. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (A11) to FIG. 171 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  In FIG. 171 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 171 (B9), an icon change animation is performed by the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 is not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 171 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (B10), the wave may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the attitude. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 171 (B11) to the same figure (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display TM. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted.

  In FIGS. 172A1 to 172A16, both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Since the effect shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the moving animation of the suspension icon of the special diagram 1 is completed. As a result, three suspension icons of the first suspension icon h11, the second suspension icon h12, and the third suspension icon h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until that time is displayed as the first change icon h01. In any of the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01, the display mode is default (white). This variation icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, all may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, an area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second number-of-holds display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the characters “attention!” Are displayed on the timer notice display TM, and notice that the timer display countdown is started is notified. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern in the variable display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. The first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being displayed in a gradually reduced size as shown in FIG. 172 (A3) to FIG. 172 (A5). In the first frame image FL1, besides the first variation icon h01, the navigation character YM and the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduction display of the first frame image FL1. Be done. At this time, a copy of the holding frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy fluctuation icon h01 'as a copy of the first fluctuation icon h01 is displayed in the copy of the holding frame UI. At the same time, copy suspension icons h11 ', h12' and h13 'as copies of the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed. In addition, a copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer advance display TM, and it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, it is presented that a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM is “39.99”, and the timer display is continuously counted down. In addition, although the timer advance notice display TM is displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed overlapping with the first frame image FL1. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A4) to FIG. 172 (A5), a state is shown in which the navigation character YM is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM.

  When the reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (A6), the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A7), it is shown that a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a holding frame UI that includes a change icon (second change icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23) and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, similarly to the first variation icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Note that the second fluctuation icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are overlapped on the timer notice display TM, and are considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. Further, the display modes of the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h11, h12, h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move in the left direction. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 that was in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts icon change animation, but is overlapped by the timer notice display TM. The situation is considered to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. In this effect example, although the icon change animation overlapped in the timer notice display TM and performed in the second frame image FL2 is not visible, when the icon change animation is completed, the display mode is the default (white). The second variation icon h02 changes to a blue display mode which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (A9) to FIG. (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are made visible. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM and can not be visually recognized. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates “35.00”. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 172 (A11) to FIG. 172 (A16) are performed. Incidentally, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  In FIG. 172 (B1) to (B16), both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another presentation pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 172 (B1) to FIG. (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 172 (A1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 172 (B9) in this presentation example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2 and is overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and the appearance thereof can not be visually recognized, but the second variation The icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the preview effect by the icon change animation has failed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume the movement in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are made visible. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM and can not be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 172 (B11) to FIG. 172 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed across the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, the pseudo connected effect starts . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM indicates "32.00".

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. . Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173A1 to A12 are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 164A1 to A12, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of the frame, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the third frame image FL3 is moved in to the position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similarly to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes the third variation icon h03 different from the second variation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the reserve icons h31, h32, h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and the same display manner as the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the second frame image FL2 It has become. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving in the left direction, and as shown in FIG. 173 (A14) to FIG. (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (A15) to FIG. (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is left Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A18), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 173 (A18) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, whereby the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. The change icon h03 is changed to indicate that the change icon is changed from the default display mode to the advance notice display mode (red display mode). That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the on-hold change advance notice has succeeded by switching the frame image.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed is performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A21) Then, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and then the display is finalized. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) in which the display mode has changed is erased. Note that the variation icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false announcement than in the case of a true announcement. In this example of effect, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed, but the combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second change icon h02 displayed separately from the first change icon h01 are displayed. . Note that the effects shown in FIG. 174 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 164 (A1) to (A6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When reduction display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving in the left direction as shown in FIG. 174 (A6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A7) It is shown that a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen. The second frame image FL2 in this presentation example includes the display of the holding frame UI including the variation icon (the second variation icon h02) and the three holding icons (the holding icons h21, h22 and h23). Each of the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the frame image FL2 has a default display mode as in the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this presentation example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but is the background color for notice (for example, blue), It functions as a big hit notice. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the announcement presentation is performed by changing the elements other than the fluctuation icon. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (A7) to FIG. (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen Do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1 After that, the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A11) to (A12), when the second frame image FL2 completes the movement to the center of the display screen, only the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left, Frame out from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A13), a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2 It is shown that the frame FL3 is moved in and is moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes the display of the holding frame UI including the fluctuation icon (third fluctuation icon h03) and the three holding icons (holding icons h31, h32, h33). The third variation icon h03 and the hold icons h31, h32 and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this example of presentation has a background color different from that of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and is a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the advance notice, and is the background color that is more highly hit-hit than the blue background color. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the announcement presentation is performed by changing the elements other than the fluctuation icon. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving in the left direction, and as shown in FIG. 174 (A14) to FIG. (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A15) to (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped and displayed when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is left Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A18), enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, in FIG. 174 (A18) to FIG. As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the fluctuation icon in the icon display area HN1 is the first fluctuation icon h01 to the third fluctuation icon h01. The state of changing to the fluctuation icon h03 is shown. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the background color is changed by the switching of the frame image, and thereby the advance notice is performed. In this example of presentation, the advance notice is given by changing the display mode other than the change icon, but the display mode of the change icon may be changed.

  In this effect example, a notice (normal notice) of a big hit in the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given by the change of the background color, but the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 174 (A21) In the device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) is erased. In the case where the background color is changed, when the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, the variation icon may be erased and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In the example of the effect, the background color is changed and the combination of the lost design symbols is determined and displayed. However, the combination of the big hit decoration symbols may be determined and displayed.

In the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means can display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “a fluctuation icon [eg, a first fluctuation icon h01, a second fluctuation icon h02, etc. shown in FIG. 159 (A3)]) related to symbol fluctuation display being executed. It is a means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)] in the display area of the display means [for example, FIG. As shown in (A3), the first change icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
One of the two change icons is a first change icon [eg, the first change icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)],
One of the two change icons is a second change icon [eg, the second change icon h02 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)],
The second change icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 159 (A3), the second change icon h02 is in an area other than the icon display area HN1. Displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variation icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variation icon. Further, the display means may display the fluctuation icon without fail or may not display the fluctuation icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means, and the display means may be other than the change icon in a display area of the display areas. May also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means, or display the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display area in the display means. It may not be possible.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying the fluctuation icon only in a certain display area of the display areas in the display means, or a display area other than a certain display area in the display areas in the display means Also, it may be capable of displaying a fluctuation icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only two variation icons, or may be capable of displaying other than two variation icons. Further, the display means may always display two change icons, or may not display two change icons.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying three or more change icons.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first variation icon and the second variation icon, or may be capable of displaying variation icons other than the first variation icon and the second variation icon. It may be In addition, the display means may always display the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon, and may not display the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon. It is also good.

  In addition, the second variation icon may be able to be displayed only in a display area other than a certain display area, or can be displayed in a display area other than a display area other than a certain display area. It may be Also, the second variation icon may be necessarily displayed in a display area other than a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area. It may be.

  Also, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

In addition, “an animation in which the second variation icon moves during a period in which the first variation icon is displayed (hereinafter,“ second movement animation [for example, FIG. 159 (A3) to FIG. The icon change animation shown and the movement display etc. of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. 164 (A15) may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the movement animation of the second fluctuation icon can make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and in some cases, the expectation to the big hit can be improved.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Also, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where the second variation icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [eg, FIG. 159] After the icon change animation shown in (A3) to (A6) is displayed, the second change icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the second variation icon in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variation icon, and it may be possible to further improve the expectation for a big hit.

  Here, after the second moving animation is displayed, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second variation is displayed. The icon may be displayed on a display area other than a certain display area. In addition, after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon may be displayed in a certain display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

  In addition, after the second moving animation is displayed, only the second changing icon may be displayed in a display area, or after the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon may be displayed. Other variation icons may be displayed in a display area.

  In addition, the second variation icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. The variation icon of may be displayed in a display area.

Also, in the first case, the size of the second variation icon displayed in the certain display area is displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. Different from the size of the fluctuation icon [for example, the size of the second fluctuation icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIG. 159 (C3) to FIG. (C6) corresponds to the second fluctuation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1. Greater than the size of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by varying the size of the second variation icon, it is possible to make various effects by the variation icon, and it may be possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Note that the size of the second change icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second change icon displayed in the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, It may be large.

Also, the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. (A6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first change icon h01 while displaying the icon change animation, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the fluctuation icons overlap, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, the second variation icon may overlap only with the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second variation animation is displayed, and the second variation animation is displayed. The second variation icon may also overlap other than the first variation icon during at least a portion of the period being performed. Also, the second variation icon may always overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the period during which the second movement animation is displayed The second variation icon may not overlap the first variation icon during at least a part of the period of.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap the first change icon during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation is displayed. During at least a part of the period, a variation icon other than the second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon.

  In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon only during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation may be displayed. The second change icon may overlap the first change icon also in a period other than at least a part of the period.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon during part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during the entire period of the period.

In addition, the second variation icon may overlap with the advance notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), While the change animation is displayed, the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the preview preview, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, when the second change icon and the advance notice display overlap, the effect by the change icon can be made colorful, and it may be expected that the change may be a big hit.

  Here, the second variation icon may overlap only with the advance notice display in at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variation icon may also overlap the display other than the advance notice display in at least a part of the period. In addition, the second variation icon may always overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second change icon does not overlap with the advance notice during the period.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap with the notice display in at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least the period during which the second animation is displayed. There may be a case where a change icon other than the second change icon may overlap with the notice display in a certain period.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap with the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the advance notice also in a period other than a partial period.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the advance notice in a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period during which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the advance notice.

In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. 159 (C6 As shown in), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first change icon h01 in the display mode of the preview notice while the icon change animation is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the second fluctuation icon overlaps with the first fluctuation icon and the notice display, various effects can be produced by the fluctuation icon, and it may be expected that the fluctuation may be a big hit. is there.

  Here, the second change icon may overlap only with the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move The second variation icon may overlap with the first variation icon and the display other than the advance notice during at least a part of the period during which the animation is displayed. In addition, the second variation icon may always overlap the first variation icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second variation animation is displayed, or the second variation animation is displayed. The second change icon may not overlap with the first change icon and the advance notice during at least a part of the period.

  In addition, only the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, or the second move animation may be displayed. In at least a part of the period in which the is displayed, there may be a case where the change icons other than the second change icon overlap the first change icon and the notice display.

  In addition, the second variation icon may overlap with the first variation icon and the notice display only during at least a part of a period during which the second variation animation is displayed, or the second variation animation may be displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display also in a period other than at least a part of the period in which the is displayed.

  Note that the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed, and the second move animation is displayed. The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the advance notice during the entire duration of the period.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 164 (A2) etc. according to the execution of the symbol variation display],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 164 (A2), etc.] according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays,
Only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A3) to FIG. (A15), during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and only the variation display by the second decorative symbol is displayed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, the player is concentrated on the moving animation by displaying only one of the first decorative symbol fluctuation display and the second decorative symbol fluctuation display during the period of the moving icon moving animation. There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display Other displays may also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or displays the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be possible.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, and other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display The display of may also be displayable. In addition, the display means may always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or displays the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be possible.

  In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases, and one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be also in a period other than at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. Only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. Also, during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is always displayed. It is also preferable that only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, there may be a case where only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be, or only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. May be

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first frame After the movement display of the image FL1 is started, the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying a plurality of movement animations of the fluctuation icon, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. In addition, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, only the display of the second moving animation may be started, or after the display of the first moving animation is started, the second movement may be started. Display other than the animation display may also be started. Also, the display of the second moving animation may always be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation is after the display of the first moving animation is started It may not be started.

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the movement animation of the first fluctuation icon can make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may make a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. In addition, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168, etc.],
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 168 (A1)],
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 161 (A1)],
The movement display of the certain display of the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of a period during which the first movement animation is displayed,
The movement display of the certain display of the second display mode is displayed during at least a part of a period during which the second movement animation is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the big hit expectation during the movement animation period of the fluctuation icon, various effects of the fluctuation icon can be made, and it may be expected that the fluctuation may cause a big hit. is there.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may always display a certain display, or may not display a certain display.

  In addition, a certain display may be displayable only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be a display mode other than the plurality of display modes. In addition, a certain display may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  Further, a certain display may be capable of displaying only the first display mode and the second display mode, or may be capable of displaying display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be In addition, a certain display may be necessarily displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. May be

  In addition, the movement display of a certain display of a 1st display aspect may be displayed in the one part period of the period while the 1st movement animation is displayed, and the period when the 1st movement animation is displayed. The movement display of a certain display of the first display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

  Moreover, the movement display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or the period during which the second movement animation is displayed. The movement display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

Also, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [eg, FIG. 164 (A2) to FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first fluctuation icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area other than the icon display area HN1, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the first change icon in a display area different from a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the change icon, and to expect that the change may be a big hit. There is a possibility.

  Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area other than the display area other than the one display area. In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon may be always displayed in a display area other than a display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started Later on, the first variation icon may not be displayed in a display area other than a display area.

  In addition, the first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from a display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started The first variation icon may be displayed in a display area other than the display area other than the rear.

In addition, during the execution of one pattern change display, when the second state is changed to the second state and then the second state is changed to the third state (hereinafter, “the second case” There is).
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A5), a first change icon h01 and a second change icon State in which only the first variation icon h01 of the icons h02 is displayed, etc.]
In the second state, both of the two change icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A9), both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. State, etc.],
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A12), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon The state in which only the second variation icon h02 of the icons h02 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, by changing the number of fluctuation icons, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may cause a big hit.

  Here, during the execution of one pattern variation display, there may be a case where it becomes from the second state to the third state after the first state becomes the second state, or one time During execution of the symbol variation display, there may be cases where the second state does not change to the third state after the first state changes to the second state. In addition, during the execution of one pattern variation display, it may be possible to change from the second state to the third state only after the first state becomes the second state, or one time During the execution of the symbol variation display, the second state may be changed to the third state other than after the first state is changed to the second state. Also, only during execution of one pattern variation display, there may be a case where the second state changes to the third state after changing from the first state to the second state, or one time Even during execution of the symbol variation display, the second state may be changed to the third state after changing from the first state to the second state.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a third change icon [for example, the third change icon h03 shown in FIG. 173 (A17)],
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the first variation icon,
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the second variation icon,
After the second case is reached, after the third state is changed to the fourth state, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state.
The fourth state is a state in which the second fluctuation icon and the third fluctuation icon are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A14), the second fluctuation icon h02 and the third fluctuation icon h03 In the condition that both are displayed, etc.],
The fifth state is a state where only the third change icon of the second change icon and the third change icon is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), 2) a state in which only the third change icon h03 of the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, by changing the number of fluctuation icons, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may cause a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variation icon, or may be capable of displaying variation icons other than the third variation icon. Further, the display means may display the third fluctuation icon without fail or may not display the third fluctuation icon.

  Also, the third variation icon may be partially different from the first variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  Also, the third variation icon may be partially different from the second variation icon, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, after the second case, the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state to the fifth state may occur, or the second case After reaching the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state to the fifth state may not occur. In addition, after the second case, the fourth state to the fifth state may occur only after the third state to the fourth state, or the second case In addition to the above, the third state to the fourth state may be followed by the fourth state to the fifth state. Also, only after the second case has been reached, there may be a case where the fourth state to the fifth state may occur after the third state has become the fourth state, or the second state may be the second state. Other than after the case, there may be a case where the fourth state to the fifth state may be reached after the third state to the fourth state.

Also, during at least a part of the period during which the two variation icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area [eg, FIG. 164 (A9) As shown, during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, no change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by not displaying the fluctuation icon in a certain display area, the effect by the fluctuation icon can be made colorful, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

  Here, in a part of a period in which two variation icons are displayed, there may be a period in which none of the two variation icons is displayed in a display area, or two variation icons are displayed. During the entire period, there may be a period in which none of the two change icons is displayed in a display area.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to the suspension of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon [for example, pending icon h11, h12, h13 shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]). Yes,
In a period during which the two variation icons are displayed [for example, a period in which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to the figure (A10)] The number [for example, six etc.] of the reserved icons is displayed before the two change icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6), of the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 More than the number [for example, three etc.] of the reserved icons in the period during which only the first variation icon h01 is displayed]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where various effects can be made by changing the number of holding icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may display the hold icon without fail or may not display the hold icon.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to the suspension of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon [for example, pending icon h11, h12, h13 shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]). Yes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter referred to as "number hold display [for example, second hold number display shown in FIG. 164 (A2), etc.]") which displays the number of hold of symbol variation display with numbers. And
The number of reservations indicated by the number suspension display [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. (A10), in the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the second The number of reservations for the special view 1 in the display indicates “3”, etc.] indicates the number of the suspension icons during the period in which the two variation icons are displayed [eg, FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. While the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the number of the hold icons is six, etc.).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there are cases where various effects can be made by changing the number of holding icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may display the hold icon without fail or may not display the hold icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number hold display. Further, the display means may always display the number hold display or may not display the number hold display.

In addition, during at least a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, the moving display of the hold icon is displayed,
The moving display of the hold icon is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, there may be cases where various effects can be made by the hold icon.

  Here, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed in a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, or in the entire period in which the first moving animation is displayed. , And a movement display of the hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second movement animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the second movement animation is displayed, A movement display of the hold icon may be displayed.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means can display an icon (hereinafter referred to as "a variation icon [eg, a first variation icon h01, a second variation icon h02, etc. shown in FIG. 159 (C3)]) related to symbol variation display being executed. It is a means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 159 (C3)] in the display area of the display means [for example, FIG. As shown in (C3), the first variation icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
One of the two change icons is the first change icon [eg, the first change icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (C3)],
One of the two change icons is a second change icon [eg, the second change icon h02 shown in FIG. 159 (C3)],
The first change icon and the second change icon may be displayed without overlapping. For example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C3), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. It is displayed without overlapping etc.],
The whole of the second change icon may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C3), the second change icon h02 is an icon display area Displayed in areas other than HN1, etc.],
An animation in which the second fluctuation icon moves during a period in which the first fluctuation icon is displayed (hereinafter, “second movement animation [for example, icon change shown in FIG. 159 (C3) to FIG. (C6) Animation and moving display etc. of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. 164 (A15) may be displayed.
At least a portion of the second variation icon may overlap with at least a portion of the advance notice during at least a portion of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6) As shown, in the icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 172 (A6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the advance notice, in the icon change animation. Variation icon h02 is overlapped with timer notice display TM, etc.],
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second variable icon may be displayed in the certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [eg, FIG. 159 (C3) ~ As shown in the figure (C7), after the icon change animation is displayed, the second change icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

[The above-mentioned notice display [for example, the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the notice shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 172 (A6), etc.] Is a different display than
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the display mode of the first variation icon may be the same as the display mode of the second variation icon [eg, as shown in FIG. 172 (B2) and FIG. (B15), Both the display mode of the first variation icon h01 and the display mode of the second variation icon h02 in the front and back are default display modes, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the first case, the size of the second variation icon displayed in the certain display area is displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. Different from the size of the fluctuation icon [for example, the size of the second fluctuation icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIG. 159 (C3) to FIG. (C6) corresponds to the second fluctuation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1. The size of the second change icon h02 in the icon change animation is displayed in the icon display area HN1 after the end of the icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A7) to (A15), which is larger than the size of Smaller than the size of the second variation icon h02, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in some cases, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. (C6), as shown in FIG. 172 (A13) to FIG. (A14), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first change icon h01 while the icon change animation is displayed. While the icon change animation is displayed, the second change icon h02 overlaps the copy change icon h01 ', etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [eg, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 and so on],
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A1)],
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A15)],
The certain display of the first display mode is a display showing a first jackpot expectation degree,
The certain display of the second display mode is a display showing a second jackpot expectation degree,
The second jackpot expectation is a higher expectation than the first jackpot expectation,
A state in which the certain display of the first display mode and the first variation icon are displayed simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as “the sixth state [for example, a display wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A2) State etc. in which the navigation character YM and the first variation icon h01 are displayed].
A state in which the certain display of the second display mode and the second variation icon are displayed simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as “the seventh state [for example, a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A15) State etc. in which the navigation character YM and the first variation icon h01 are displayed].
After being in the sixth state, the seventh state may be in place.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in C6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first change icon h01 in the display mode of the preview notice while displaying the icon change animation, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I explained about similarities.

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first frame After the movement display of the image FL1 is started, the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 169 (A2), etc.] according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 169 (A2), etc.] according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays,
Only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first decorative symbol is erased during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, and only the variation display by the second decorative symbol is displayed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [eg, FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first fluctuation icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area other than the icon display area HN1, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, there may be a case where the above-mentioned advance notice display is a pre-reading notice display [for example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 159 (C1) is a blue display mode (display mode of pre-reading notice, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the above-mentioned prefetch notice display is displayed by displaying the hold icon in the pre-read notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is blue ( Pre-reading notice display is performed because it is display mode of pre-reading notice)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the execution of one pattern change display, when the second state is changed to the second state and then the second state is changed to the third state (hereinafter, “the second case” There is).
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A5), a first change icon h01 and a second change icon State in which only the first variation icon h01 of the icons h02 is displayed, etc.]
In the second state, both of the two change icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 169 (A8), both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. State, etc.],
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A12), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon The state in which only the second variation icon h02 of the icons h02 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a third change icon [for example, the third change icon h03 shown in FIG. 173 (A17)],
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the first variation icon,
The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the second variation icon,
After the second case is reached, after the third state is changed to the fourth state, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state.
The fourth state is a state in which the second fluctuation icon and the third fluctuation icon are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A14), the second fluctuation icon h02 and the third fluctuation icon h03 In the condition that both are displayed, etc.],
The fifth state is a state in which only the third change icon of the second change icon and the third change icon is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), 2) a state in which only the third change icon h03 of the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during at least a part of the period in which the two variation icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area [eg, FIG. 168 (A9) As shown, during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, no change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[A period during which the two variation icons are displayed [for example, a period during which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. 169 (A10) The number of pending icons [eg, six etc.] in [etc.] are displayed before the two change icons are displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A6), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 More than the number [for example, three etc.] of pending icons in the period during which only the first variation icon h01 of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means displays the number of reserved symbol variation displays in numerical form (hereinafter referred to as“ display of number suspension display [for example, second number of suspension display shown in FIG. 169 (A2)] ”). It is a possible means,
The number of reservations indicated by the number suspension display [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. (A10), in the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the second The number of reservations for the special view 1 in the display indicates “3”, etc.] indicates the number of suspension icons during the period in which the two variation icons are displayed [eg, FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. (A10) During the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with “display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The display means can display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "a variation icon [eg, a first variation icon h01, a second variation icon h02, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A8)]) related to symbol variation display being executed. It is a means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area [for example, an icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 164 (A1)] in a display area of the display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display [eg, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the notice shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 172 (A6), etc.] ,
One of the two change icons is the first change icon [eg, the first change icon h01 shown in FIG. 164 (A2)],
One of the two change icons is a second change icon [eg, the second change icon h02 shown in FIG. 164 (A7)],
In some cases, the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon may be displayed without overlapping [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. (A10), with the first fluctuation icon h01 and The second variation icon h02 is displayed without overlapping, etc.],
The whole of the second change icon may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. (A14), the second change icon may be displayed. The icon h02 is displayed in an area other than the icon display area HN1, etc.],
An animation in which the second fluctuation icon moves during a period in which the first fluctuation icon is displayed (hereinafter, “second movement animation [for example, icon change shown in FIG. 159 (C3) to FIG. (C6) Animation and moving display etc. of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. 164 (A15) may be displayed.
In the case of changing from the first state to the second state, and from the second state to the third state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), during execution of one pattern variation display There is
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A2) to FIG. (A6), a first change A state in which only the first change icon h01 of the icon h01 and the second change icon h02 is displayed, etc.]
In the second state, both of the two change icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A7) to FIG. (A10), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 In the condition that both are displayed, etc.],
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 164 (A11) to FIG. (A15), a first change A state in which only the second change icon h02 of the icon h01 and the second change icon h02 is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

“The notice display is a display different from the first change icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the display mode of the first variation icon may be the same as the display mode of the second variation icon [eg, as shown in FIG. 172 (B2) and FIG. (B15), Both the display mode of the first variation icon h01 and the display mode of the second variation icon h02 in the front and back are default display modes, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the first case, the size of the second variation icon displayed in the certain display area is displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. Different from the size of the fluctuation icon [for example, the size of the second fluctuation icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIG. 159 (C3) to FIG. (C6) corresponds to the second fluctuation icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1. The size of the second change icon h02 in the icon change animation is displayed in the icon display area HN1 after the end of the icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A7) to (A15), which is larger than the size of Smaller than the size of the second variation icon h02, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in some cases, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. (C6), as shown in FIG. 172 (A13) to FIG. (A14), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first change icon h01 while the icon change animation is displayed. While the icon change animation is displayed, the second change icon h02 overlaps the copy change icon h01 ', etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [eg, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 and so on],
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A1)],
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode [for example, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A15)],
The certain display of the first display mode is a display showing a first jackpot expectation degree,
The certain display of the second display mode is a display showing a second jackpot expectation degree,
The second jackpot expectation is a higher expectation than the first jackpot expectation,
A state in which the certain display of the first display mode and the first variation icon are displayed simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as “the sixth state [for example, a display wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A2) State etc. in which the navigation character YM and the first variation icon h01 are displayed].
A state in which the certain display of the second display mode and the second variation icon are displayed simultaneously (hereinafter referred to as “the seventh state [for example, a white kimono shown in FIG. 169 (A15) State etc. in which the navigation character YM and the first variation icon h01 are displayed].
After being in the sixth state, the seventh state may be in place.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the second change icon may overlap the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second move animation is displayed [eg, FIG. As shown in C6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first change icon h01 in the display mode of the preview notice while displaying the icon change animation, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first frame After the movement display of the image FL1 is started, the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 169 (A2), etc.] according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 169 (A2), etc.] according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays,
Only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A15), the first decorative symbol is erased during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, and only the variation display by the second decorative symbol is displayed. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “an animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter,“ first movement animation [for example, movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 169 (A3) to FIG. (A12) Etc.] may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [eg, FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first fluctuation icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area other than the icon display area HN1, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, there may be a case where the above-mentioned advance notice display is a pre-reading notice display [for example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 159 (C1) is a blue display mode (display mode of pre-reading notice, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the above-mentioned prefetch notice display is displayed by displaying the hold icon in the pre-read notice mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C1), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is blue ( Pre-reading notice display is performed because it is display mode of pre-reading notice)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during at least a part of the period in which the two variation icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area [eg, FIG. 168 (A9) As shown, during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, no change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[A period during which the two variation icons are displayed [for example, a period during which the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. 169 (A10) The number of pending icons [eg, six etc.] in [etc.] are displayed before the two change icons are displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A6), the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 More than the number [for example, three etc.] of pending icons in the period during which only the first variation icon h01 of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means displays the number of reserved symbol variation displays in numerical form (hereinafter referred to as“ display of number suspension display [for example, second number of suspension display shown in FIG. 169 (A2)] ”). It is a possible means,
The number of reservations indicated by the number suspension display [eg, as shown in FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. (A10), in the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the second The number of reservations for the special view 1 in the display indicates “3”, etc.] indicates the number of suspension icons during the period in which the two variation icons are displayed [eg, FIG. 169 (A7) to FIG. (A10) During the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a time until a certain effect is performed,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes.
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display than the second one is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a jackpot than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The display of one of the multiple displays is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the above-mentioned substitute sign is the effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of motion is a rendering motion,
The certain effect is the effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Supplementary Note 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
It is easier to make a big hit if the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than if it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
A hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is the gaming machine described in the supplementary note 14,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third effect display,
There may be cases where the timing at which the third effect display is displayed is not notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is an off-state,
The big hit symbol variation is configured to have a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect movable means is a means which may perform an effect operation,
While the display of the third effect display, the power-out movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is not displayed, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "2nd timing") which displays a 2nd effect display.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which the display mode of at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Supplementary note 30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a display of a first type,
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a timer advance display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
Equipped with operating means,
The display of the first type is the display of the operation effective period,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The said period display is a display which may alert | report the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 2nd effect display may be displayed in a 1st period,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 33, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
It is a game console described in Appendix 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the first display mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 35 to 39, wherein
The start and end of the countdown display is performed within a period of one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
40. A game console according to any one of appendices 35 to 40, wherein
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
Even during the movement of the countdown display, the notification of the time by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 43)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
Supplementary note 35 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is any one of the following.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification is given indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console described in Appendix 44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed is 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 45, wherein
There is also a case where it does not change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 47)
Supplementary note 35 to 46, wherein the gaming machine according to any one of
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
In some cases, the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 48)
It is a game console described in Appendix 47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 50)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 51)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display starts.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the third display starts.
During display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game console described in Appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console described in Appendix 53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when the third display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 55)
Appendices 52 to 54, wherein the game console according to any one of
It is equipped with effect moving means capable of performing multiple types of motions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation,
The first operation may be performed while the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 56)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 55, wherein
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
It is a game console as described in any one of supplementary notes 51 to 58,
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 60)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 62)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification in which the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
The display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 63)
It is a game console described in Appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, wherein
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 66)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 67)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier for the final display of the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 68)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 67, wherein
The display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
Appendices 62 to 68, wherein the game console according to any one of
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
Even during the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 74)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 73, wherein
The countdown display is a display of a countdown of time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74,
The timing notification is a notification that indicates that the timing at which the certain effect is performed is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 76)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74 or 75,
After the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 77)
It is a game console described in Appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased after the second indication is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 62 to 77, wherein
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations of the jackpot,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state , High expectations of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2)
In the game console described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state high,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A1 or A2, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A4)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the second state,
The expectation of the jackpot is higher in the case where the display is started in the second state than in the case where the display of the first meter is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein
Among the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by the first icon being displayed a first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by the first icon being displayed a second number of times,
The second number is a number less than the first number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed,
The big hit display is easier to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than the second state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a pseudo-sequence effect,
The pseudo-series advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A10, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a certain effect,
The certain effect is a effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A12)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the start of a certain period in the period when a reach production display is performed,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports a 1st timing during display of the said reach production display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
The preliminary display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) from the first position to the third position (end position), from the start to the end of the first period is notified. Is configured and
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed,
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A14, wherein
The said period display is a display which may perform movement display.
A game console that is long.

(Appendix A16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A17)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A15 or A16,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode, the final hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) is larger than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode It is easy to confirm the symbol form,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18,
The first effect display when the first timing is reached when the preliminary display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first display mode is displayed. Is easy to get started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A20)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A20, wherein
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (e.g., a default),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21,
Depending on the display mode of the advance notice display, it is not understood whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or displayed in the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A23)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A21 or A22,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the fourth display mode when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A24)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A24, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a second preview display,
The above-mentioned notice display is the first notice display,
In some cases, it may be notified that the first notice display is displayed by the second notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A26)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25,
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than when the first preliminary display is not notified by the second preliminary display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A26,
If the advance notice is displayed before the period display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the advance notice is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The preliminary display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A29, wherein
By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the advance display, it is notified that the period display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A31)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A30, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed with the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A31, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed in a symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is also displayed during a period in which symbol stop display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is not displayed during the period in which the symbol stop display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A34, wherein
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed while the reach effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A36)
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A37)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing when a certain effect may be started,
The display means is a means by which an Ath display may be displayed as a certain effect,
The display A may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display at timing when the display A starts (hereinafter referred to as "the timing A").
A game stand characterized by

  Here, a certain effect may be the A-th display. Moreover, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A37,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the A-th display may be displayed in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, the timing at which the A-th display is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 39)
The game console described in Appendix A38,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the A display is displayed at the A timing, the B display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A40)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A37,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the A-th display is displayed,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display is completed, the A-th display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
When the Ath timing comes, the Ath display may be displayed,
When the A timing is reached, the A display may not be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A40,
When the Ath timing comes, the Ath display is always displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A43)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A42, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A43, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A44,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A46)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A44,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A47)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A46,
When the Ath display is made at the Ath timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the Ath display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A48)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A47, wherein
When the Ath display is displayed at the Ath timing, the first display is not displayed, and the first display is not displayed, and the first display is overlapped with at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed. The display of A is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A48,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means among the plurality of types of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means,
The second display is displayed by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A50)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49,
The second image display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
When the first display is displayed by the first image display unit, the second image display unit may be configured to perform the rendering operation in the previous period when the A timing is reached. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A51)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A50,
Equipped with operating means,
The said A-th display is a display regarding the said operation means,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A37 to A51,
The display means is a means by which the Cth display may be displayed as a certain effect,
The Cth display may be displayed at a timing when the Cth display starts (hereinafter referred to as "the Cth timing").
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A53)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 54)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A55)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A56)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing (hereinafter referred to as “a timing”) at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 57)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A56,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A58)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A59)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A60)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A61)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A60, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A62)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A61, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 63)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A64)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A64, wherein
In the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A66)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A67)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game console described in Appendix A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is not changed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 68)
It is a game console described in Appendix A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, at least a part of the display modes of the first display may be changed is there,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 69)
The game console described in Appendix A65,
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A71)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A55 to A69, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A72)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter referred to as “a timing”),
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, the first display may perform the advance notice display. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 73)
The game console described in Appendix A 72,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
The certain timing is informed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A74)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 73,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 75)
The game console described in Appendix A 72,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 77)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A75, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A77, wherein
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 79)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A78,
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 79,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 79,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A81, wherein
The notice display is a display for giving notice of a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A82, wherein
Equipped with operating means,
The preliminary display is a display regarding the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 84)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A83, wherein
After the preliminary display is performed, a time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A84, wherein
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, the first display necessarily performs the advance display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 86)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A85, wherein
When the first display is displayed, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 87)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 88)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A72 to A86, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 89)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means by which a first display may be displayed;
The first display is a display for notifying of a timing at which a certain effect may be started (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing"),
The display means is a means by which a second display may be displayed;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A plurality of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of second displays") may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A90)
The game console described in Appendix A 89,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period,
According to the passage of time of a certain period, the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes,
The certain timing is informed during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 91)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A90,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 91)
The game console described in Appendix A 89,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 92)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When it comes to the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 93)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A91, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A94)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A93, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A 95)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 96)
The game console described in Appendix A94,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed according to the passage of time,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 97)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96, wherein
The first display is always displayed when the second display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 98)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A96, wherein
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 99)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A98, wherein
The second display is a display in preparation.
The display of the plurality of brothers is a plurality of display in preparation
The display of one of the plurality of preparation displays is a first preparation display,
One of the plurality of preparation indications is a second preparation indication,
The first in-progress display is a display displayed before the second in-provision display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A100)
The game console described in Appendix A 99,
After the first preparation indication is displayed, a timer indication (hereinafter referred to as "first timer indication") corresponding to the first preparation indication is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") corresponding to the second in-provision display is displayed.
The first timer display is configured to be displayed prior to the second timer display;
A game stand characterized by

  Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation display.

(Appendix A 101)
The game console described in Appendix A 99,
After the first preparation indication is displayed, a timer indication (hereinafter referred to as "first timer indication") corresponding to the first preparation indication is displayed.
After the second in-provision display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") corresponding to the second in-provision display is displayed.
The first timer display may be displayed prior to the second timer display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 102)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 103)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A89 to A101, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A104)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a first display;
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display may change according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
Prior to the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice may be given,
The notice is a notice for giving notice that the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A105)
The game console described in Appendix A104,
The first indication is a period indication,
The period display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”),
During the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display, a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A106)
The game console described in Appendix A105,
The period display is a display in which the B display may be displayed,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A107)
The game console described in Appendix A104,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying of a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “a certain timing”),
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A108)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, wherein
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
At the certain timing, the certain effect may not be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 109)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A107, wherein
The certain effect is always started when the certain timing comes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A110)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A109,
The display means is a means that may display a second display;
The second display is a display for notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A110, wherein
The first display is a display in which movement display may be performed,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, movement display may be performed without fail, and movement display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
The game console described in Appendix A 111,
The movement display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 113)
The game console described in Appendix A 111,
The movement display may be performed while the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A114)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A113, wherein
The notice is the notice by the first display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A115)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 104 to A114, wherein
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, a false notice may be given,
Even if the false notice is given, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A116)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 104 to A115,
The notification is configured to be performed before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is performed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A117)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A118)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A104 to A116, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A119)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
At least a part of the timer effect is configured to be performed during execution of the big hit game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A120)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A121)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed across two or more round games,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A122)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and to be subtracted from the initial value to indicate the certain time,
The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer effect”) indicates a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect may be executed across a first number of round games,
The first timer effect may be executed across a second number of round games,
The second number of times is a number of times greater than the first number of times,
The first number of times is one or more times,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A123)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121,
One round game is configured to end when the first time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and to be subtracted from the initial value to indicate the certain time,
The indication indicating the certain time is an indication indicating the time when the timer indication is 0,
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 124)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A123, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the display of the timer display is not performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The certain effect is a certain effect when the timer display is started as a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The certain effect in the first case is a effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect"),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as "second effect"),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A125)
The game console described in Appendix A 124,
The timing at which the second effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 126)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A124 or A125,
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case,
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is performed and the timing at which the second effect is performed are different.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 127)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A119 to A126, wherein
The certain effect is a fixed effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 128)
Appendix A 127, which refers to any one of Appendices A 124 to A 126;
The determined effect is an effect notifying that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold,
In the case where the number of big-hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, it may be configured to execute one of the first effect and the second effect. ,
When there are two or more number of symbol variation display which becomes a big hit included in the hold, it is configured such that both of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 129)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A124 to A126, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that the player may be given an advantageous benefit.
There is a high possibility that the player is provided with an advantage that is more advantageous to the player in the second effect than in the first effect.
There is a case where the first effect is performed as a final effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There are cases where the first effect is not the final effect (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The second effect is a finalized effect notifying that the player is given an advantageous benefit,
The second case is configured to be more easily performed in the second case than in the first case.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A130)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A129, wherein
The timer display is configured to be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display showing the certain time while the big hit game is being performed. Being
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 131)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A130,
The timer effect is configured such that there is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "third case") that is executed in one symbol variation display,
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 132)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A119,
The timer display is configured to be displayed during execution of the big hit game and to be a display indicating the certain time during execution of symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over Yes,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A133)
The game console described in Appendix A 132,
The timer display is configured to initiate a display change to indicate the certain time if certain conditions regarding gaming are achieved,
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to be a display showing the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is over, according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved.
According to the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the big hit game may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 134)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A119, A132 or A133, wherein
As the certain effect, there may be a case where an effect (hereinafter referred to as "the eleventh effect") indicating the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is executed,
In some cases, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “the twelfth effect”) may be executed to notify that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold as the certain effect.
The certain effect may be configured to be executed even if the timer display does not indicate the certain time,
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A135)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
At least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game,
An effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth effect") may be executed to indicate that the player is given an advantageous benefit while the big hit game is being executed.
The fourth effect is an effect that may be performed when the certain effect is performed at least once.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A136)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A135, wherein
The presentation means is display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 137)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A136, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A138)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A137,
The predetermined time is a time when the remaining time of the timer indicates 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A139)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A119 to A138, wherein
The certain effect is an effect that can also be performed at intervals during the execution of the big hit game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A140)
It is a game console provided with presentation means capable of executing timer presentation,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. And the
A timer effect is performed at least while symbol fluctuation display is being performed, and after the symbol fluctuation display is finished, a certain effect may be performed in a period in which a new symbol fluctuation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 141)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The said operation display is a display regarding the said operation means,
The display means may be means for displaying a timer display.
The timer display is a display for giving notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed,
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the display of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed,
The operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 142)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A 141,
A first timer display may be displayed as the timer display,
When a change of display of at least a part of the first timer display is started and the first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed.
A second timer display may be displayed as the timer display,
The display of the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed when a second time has passed as a certain time after a change of display of at least a part of the second timer display is started.
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A143)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A141 or A142,
Equipped with a second operating means,
The operation means is a first operation means,
The operation display is a first operation display.
The display means is a display on which a second operation display may be displayed;
The second operation display is a display related to the second operation means,
The second operation display may be displayed when a certain time until the operation display is displayed has elapsed while the timer display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 144)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A141 to A143,
When the operation means is operated during display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A145)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A144, wherein
The display mode of the timer display may change in a case where the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display by the timer display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A146)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A141 to A145,
The display means is a means by which a notice display may be displayed;
The notice display is a display for giving notice that the timer notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 147)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A141 to 146,
Whether the jackpot symbol aspect is finally displayed or the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of symbol fluctuation,
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
The big hit determination is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined.
The big hit probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
A game console equipped with
The operation means is a means capable of being in a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state,
One of the plurality of states is a second state,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple effects is a second effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operation means in the first state,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is not an effect that urges the operation of the operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operation means in the second state,
An effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern,
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern including that the second effect is started after the first effect is started,
The second pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the first effect is started,
The jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note B1,
One of the plurality of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be an operation response effect of the operation means in the third effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is performed,
The fourth effect is an indication effect regarding the success or failure of the symbol variation display being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B3)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note B1 or B2,
In the first pattern, the second effect is started even when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect,
The third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3,
The second effect is started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein
One of the plurality of effects is the fifth effect,
One of the plurality of patterns is a third pattern,
The third pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the fifth effect is started,
The fifth effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operation means in the second state,
The fifth effect aspect and the third effect aspect are different aspects,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5,
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”) is displayed,
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) is displayed,
In the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display is larger,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B7)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B5 or B6,
The third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “the thirteenth display”) is displayed,
The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as the “fifteenth display”) is displayed,
At least one of the thirteenth display and the effect display surrounding the thirteenth display is displayed in a thirteenth color,
At least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is displayed in a fifteenth color,
The thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern,
The fourth pattern is a pattern in which an effect is not started at a timing when the first effect is started in the second pattern,
The fourth pattern is a pattern in which the third effect is started at a timing when the third effect is started in the second pattern.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern,
The fourth pattern is a pattern including a pattern in which a sixth effect is started after the first effect is started,
The sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect,
The first effect is an effect for selecting whether the third effect is started or the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B10)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B9,
The sixth effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operation means in the first state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B11)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B9 or B10,
When the operation means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is started after the first effect ends.
Game console characterized by the above (Appendix B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, wherein
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect (hereinafter referred to as "stock effect") indicating that an effect prompting the operation of the operation means is stocked,
The stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means one or more times,
The stock effect is an effect in which the stock is reduced in relation to the execution of the effect for prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock rendition,
The second pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock rendition,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, wherein
When the operation means is not operated in the first effect, the second effect is started after the first effect ends.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B14)
A plurality of operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple effects is a second effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is not an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the second operation means,
An effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern,
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern including that the second effect is started after the first effect is started,
The second pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the first effect is started,
The jackpot symbol is more easily determined and displayed when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B14-1)
A plurality of operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple effects is a second effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The first effect is an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that urges the operation of the first operation means,
The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the second operation means,
The execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started than when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started If it is done, it will be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B15)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to symbol variation display being executed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the variation icon in a first display area of the display areas in the display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
One of the two change icons is a first change icon,
One of the two change icons is a second change icon,
The second variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B15,
A movement animation of the second movement icon (hereinafter referred to as "second movement animation") may be displayed during the display period of the first movement icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B17)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B16,
The second change icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B18)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B16 or B17,
The size of the second variation icon displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation is the size of the second variation icon during at least a part of the period of the movement animation and Is different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B18, wherein
The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a portion of a period of the second movement animation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B19, wherein
The second variation icon may overlap the preview display during at least a portion of the second movement animation period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B21)
It is a game console as described in any one of supplementary notes B16 to B20,
The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon and the preview display during at least a portion of a period of the second movement animation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B21, wherein
Only one of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B22, wherein
Only one mini decoration symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B16 to B23, wherein
Only one of the decoration symbol variation display and the mini decoration symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B25)
The gaming machine according to any one of notes B15 to B24, wherein
The moving animation of the first variation icon (hereinafter referred to as "first moving animation") may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B26)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note B25, wherein any one of supplementary notes B16 to B24 is cited,
The second movement animation may be started after the start of the first movement animation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B27)
Supplementary note B25 or B26, wherein any one of supplementary notes B16 to B24 is cited,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display indicating a first jackpot expectation,
The moving display of the first display is performed during at least a part of the period of the first moving animation,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display indicating a second jackpot expectation degree,
The movement display of the second display is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B25 to B27 which cites any one of appendices B16 to B24, wherein
The display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation,
The move display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the second move animation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B 29)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes B25 to B28,
The first variation icon may be displayed in a display area different from the first display area after the start of the first movement animation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B29, wherein
The variation icon is not displayed in the first display area during at least a part of the display period of the two variation icons.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B31)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B30, wherein
In a period of 1 decorative symbol variation display, the number of the variation icons may decrease to 1 after increasing from 1 to 2;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B31, wherein
During the period of decorative symbol variation display of 1, the number of the variation icons may increase from 1 to 2 and then decrease to 1, and after the decrease, increase to 2 and then decrease to 1.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B32, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The number of pending icons in the display period of the two variation icons is larger than the number of pending icons before the display of the two variation icons.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix B34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B15 to B33, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number hold display,
The number of holdings indicated by the number holding display is smaller than the number of the holding icons in the display period of the two variation icons,
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  FIG. 175 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 175, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above, and the display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 175 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, wherein the enclosed sphere is used as a firing sphere and the balls are dispensed May be implemented by credit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176, a slot machine (rotary gaming machine) as a game console applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 176 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 176) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of the operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 177 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the examples, the modifications, the various examples, the supplementary notes, and the like described above, the configuration requirements may be changed to another embodiment, an example, and The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 production button 208 decoration symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 224 production movable body 246 shielding device 300 main control part 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 game board lamp 542 game stand lamp

Claims (16)

It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to symbol variation display being executed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fluctuation icon in a display area of the display areas of the display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying two of the variation icons (hereinafter referred to as "two variation icons"),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display.
One of the two change icons is a first change icon,
One of the two change icons is a second change icon,
The first variation icon and the second variation icon may be displayed without overlapping,
In some cases, all of the second change icon may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area.
An animation in which the second fluctuation icon moves (hereinafter referred to as "second movement animation") may be displayed in a period in which the first fluctuation icon is displayed.
In the case of changing from the first state to the second state, and from the second state to the third state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), during execution of one pattern variation display There is
The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed,
The second state is a state in which both of the two change icons are displayed,
The third state is a state in which only the second change icon of the two change icons is displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The notice display is a display different from the first change icon.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The display mode of the first variation icon may be the same as the display mode of the second variation icon,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the first case, the size of the second change icon displayed in the certain display area is the size of the second change icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. Different from the size,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The second variation icon may overlap the first variation icon during at least a portion of a period during which the second moving animation is displayed.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display,
The certain display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The certain display of the first display mode is a display showing a first jackpot expectation degree,
The certain display of the second display mode is a display showing a second jackpot expectation degree,
The second jackpot expectation is a higher expectation than the first jackpot expectation,
There may be a state in which the certain display of the first display mode and the first change icon are simultaneously displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “sixth state”).
There may be a state in which the certain display of the second display mode and the second change icon are simultaneously displayed (hereinafter referred to as "the seventh state"),
After being in the sixth state, the seventh state may be in place.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The second change icon may overlap the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of a period during which the second moving animation is displayed.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is:
An animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter referred to as "first movement animation") may be displayed.
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display according to execution of the symbol variation display,
The first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays,
Only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There is a case,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is:
An animation in which the first variation icon moves (hereinafter referred to as "first movement animation") may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 8 or 9,
After the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variation icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein
The above-mentioned notice display may be read-ahead notice display,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 11, and
The pre-reading notice display is displayed by displaying the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
During at least a part of the period in which the two variation icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variation icons is displayed in the certain display area.
A game stand characterized by 14. A game stand according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The number of pending icons during the period in which the two variation icons are displayed is greater than the number of pending icons before the two variation icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by 15. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter referred to as "number hold display") for displaying the number of pending symbol change displays in numerical form,
The number of holdings indicated by the number holding display is smaller than the number of holding icons in a period in which the two variation icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by